520 Um001 - en e PDF

PowerFlex 520-Series Adjustable Frequency AC Drive
PowerFlex 523 Catalog Number 25A

PowerFlex 525 Catalog Number 25B
User Manual
Original Instructions
Important User Information
Solid-state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety
Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-1.1 available from
your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/) describes some
important differences between solid-state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference,
and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid-state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment
must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the
use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software, PowerFlex, Connected Components Workbench, Studio 5000, Studio 5000 Logix Designer, DriveTools SP, AppView, CustomView, QuickView, MainsFree
Programming, PointStop, and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001G-EN-E - September 2014 3
Summary of Changes
This manual contains new and updated information.
New and Updated
Information
This table contains the changes made to this revision.
Topic Page
Added Warning table for Motor Cable Length Restrictions 32
Updated Maximum Control Wire Recommendations information on noise immunity 36
Updated Start Method and Stop Method tables for PowerFlex 523 drives 37
Updated Start Method and Stop Method tables for PowerFlex 525 drives 40
Added Important table for EMC category C3 installation information 52
Updated Additional Installation Requirements table for meeting EMC 53
Updated Recommended Placement of EMC Cores table 54
Added software version requirement for Automatic Device Configuration (ADC) support 60
Added new parameter d392 [RdyBit Mode Act] 67, 106, 142
Added new parameter A574 [RdyBit Mode Cfg] 67, 129, 142
Updated descriptions of options for parameter P040 [Autotune] 78
Updated description of PointStop for option 10 and 11 of parameter P045 [Stop Mode] 79
Added Important table to parameter P046, P048, P050 [Start Source x] 80
Updated entries for Maximum Output column of parameter t088 [Analog Out Sel] from
200% Drive Rated FLA to 200% Drive Rated Current
89
Added table of recommended minimum Encoder PPR to parameter A536 [Encoder PPR] 122
Updated Intermittent Overload specification for PowerFlex 523 158
Added catalog numbers for replacement EMC cores 170
Updated I/O Terminals C1 and C2 wiring information on noise immunity 190
Added recommended Ethernet cables to description of Appendix H 235
General maintenance updates Throughout manual
4 Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001G-EN-E - September 2014
Summary of Changes
Notes:
Table of Contents
Preface
Overview Who Should Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Recommended Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Drive Frame Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring Mounting Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
AC Supply Source Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
General Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Power and Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Control Module Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Power Module Terminal Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Power Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Power Terminal Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Common Bus/Precharge Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Control I/O Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Start and Speed Reference Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
CE Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Chapter 2
Start Up Prepare for Drive Start-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Display and Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Viewing and Editing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Drive Programming Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Language Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Smart Start-Up with Basic Program Group Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
LCD Display with QuickView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Using the USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Chapter 3
Programming and Parameters About Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Basic Display Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Basic Program Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Terminal Block Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Communications Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Logic Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Advanced Display Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Advanced Program Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Network Parameter Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Table of Contents
Modified Parameter Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fault and Diagnostic Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
AppView Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
CustomView Parameter Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Parameter Cross Reference by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Chapter 4
Troubleshooting Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fault Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Appendix A
Supplemental Drive Information Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Power Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Appendix B
Accessories and Dimensions Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Product Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Optional Accessories and Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Appendix C
RS485 (DSI) Protocol Network Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Supported Modbus Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Writing (06) Logic Command Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Writing (06) Comm Frequency Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Reading (03) Logic Status Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Reading (03) Drive Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Reading (03) Drive Operational Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Reading (03) and Writing (06) Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Additional Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Appendix D
Velocity StepLogic, Basic Logic and
Timer/Counter Functions
Velocity StepLogic Using Timed Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Velocity StepLogic Using Basic Logic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Timer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Counter Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Velocity StepLogic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Table of Contents
Appendix E
Encoder/Pulse Train Usage and
Position StepLogic Application
Encoder and Pulse Train Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Wiring Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Positioning Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Common Guidelines for All Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Positioning Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Homing Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Encoder and Position Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Use Over Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Setup Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Appendix F
PID Set Up PID Loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
PID Reference and Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Analog PID Reference Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Appendix G
Safe-Torque-Off Function PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
EC Type Examination Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
EMC Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Using PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Safety Concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Enabling PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Verify Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
PowerFlex 525 Certification for Safe-Torque-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Appendix H
EtherNet/IP Establishing A Connection With EtherNet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Appendix I
Control Diagrams Induction Motor Tuning Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Adjusting Speed Control Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Table of Contents
Notes:
Preface
Overview
The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information needed
to install, start-up and troubleshoot the PowerFlex 520-Series Adjustable
Frequency AC Drive.
Who Should Use this Manual
This manual is intended for qualified personnel. You must be able to program
and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices. In addition, you must have
an understanding of the parameter settings and functions.
Recommended
Documentation
All the recommended documentation listed in this section is available online at
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.
The following publications provide general drive information:
The following publications provide specific PowerFlex 520-Series information on
drive installation, features, specifications, and service:
For information on See page
Who Should Use this Manual 9
Recommended Documentation 9
Manual Conventions 10
Drive Frame Sizes 11
General Precautions 12
Catalog Number Explanation 13
Title Publication
Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001
Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Drive System Equipment DRIVES-TD001
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control SGI-1.1
A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 100-2.10
Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-4.5.2
Title Publication
PowerFlex 520-Series AC Drive Specifications 520-TD001
PowerFlex Dynamic Braking Resistor Calculator PFLEX-AT001
PowerFlex AC Drives in Common Bus Configurations DRIVES-AT002
Preface Overview
The following publications provide specific Network Communications
information:
Manual Conventions
In this manual we refer to PowerFlex 520-Series Adjustable Frequency AC
Drive as; drive, PowerFlex 520-series, PowerFlex 520-series drive or
PowerFlex 520-series AC drive.
Specific drives within the PowerFlex 520-series may be referred to as:
PowerFlex 523, PowerFlex 523 drive or PowerFlex 523 AC drive.
PowerFlex 525, PowerFlex 525 drive or PowerFlex 525 AC drive.
Parameter numbers and names are shown in this format:
The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an
action:
Title Publication
PowerFlex 525 Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter 520COM-UM001
PowerFlex 25-COMM-D DeviceNet Adapter 520COM-UM002
PowerFlex 25-COMM-E2P Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Adapter 520COM-UM003
PowerFlex 25-COMM-P PROFIBUS DPV1 Adapter 520COM-UM004
P 031 [Motor NP Volts]
Name
Number
Group
b
P
t
C
L
d
A
N
M
f
G
= Basic Display
= Basic Program
= Terminal Blocks
= Communications
= Logic
= Advanced Display
= Advanced Program
= Network
= Modified
= Fault and Diagnostic
= AppView and CustomView
Words Meaning
Can Possible, able to do something
Cannot Not possible, not able to do something
May Permitted, allowed
Must Unavoidable, you must do this
Shall Required and necessary
Should Recommended
Should Not Not Recommended
Overview Preface
The Studio 5000 Engineering and Design Environment combines
engineering and design elements into a common environment. The first
element in the Studio 5000 environment is the Logix Designer
application. The Studio 5000 Logix Designer application is the
rebranding of RSLogix 5000 software and will continue to be the product
to program Logix 5000 controllers for discrete, process, batch, motion,
safety, and drive-based solutions. The Studio 5000 environment is the
foundation for the future of Rockwell Automation engineering design
tools and capabilities. It is the one place for design engineers to develop all
the elements of their control system.
Drive Frame Sizes
Similar PowerFlex 520-series drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes to simplify
spare parts ordering, dimensioning, etc. A cross reference of drive catalog
numbers and their respective frame sizes is provided in Appendix B.
Preface Overview
General Precautions
ATTENTION: The drive contains high voltage capacitors which take time to
discharge after removal of mains supply. Before working on drive, ensure
isolation of mains supply from line inputs [R, S, T (L1, L2, L3)]. Wait three
minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels. Failure to do so may
result in personal injury or death.
Darkened display LEDs is not an indication that capacitors have discharged to
safe voltage levels.
ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC
drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation,
start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may
result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts
and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing,
servicing or repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESD
control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control
procedures, reference A-B publication 8000-4.5.2, Guarding Against
Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook.
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component
damage or a reduction in product life. Wiring or application errors, such as
undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient
temperatures may result in malfunction of the system.
ATTENTION: The bus regulator function is extremely useful for preventing
nuisance overvoltage faults resulting from aggressive decelerations,
overhauling loads, and eccentric loads. However, it can also cause either of the
following two conditions to occur.
1. Fast positive changes in input voltage or imbalanced input voltages can cause
uncommanded positive speed changes;
2. Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded deceleration times
However, a Stall Fault is generated if the drive remains in this state for 1
minute. If this condition is unacceptable, the bus regulator must be disabled
(see parameter A550 [Bus Reg Enable]). In addition, installing a properly sized
dynamic brake resistor will provide equal or better performance in most cases.
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Drive does not contain
user-serviceable components. Do not disassemble drive chassis.
Overview Preface
Catalog Number Explanation
Code Type
25A PowerFlex 523
25B PowerFlex 525
1-3 4 5 6-8 9 10 11 12 13 14
25B B 2P3 N 1 1 4
Drive Dash Voltage Rating Rating Enclosure Reserved Emission Class Reserved Dash Dash

Output Current @ 1 Phase, 100...120V Input
Code Amps Frame ND HD
HP kW HP kW
1P6
(1)
1.6 A 0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2
2P5 2.5 A 0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4
4P8 4.8 B 1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75
6P0 6.0 B 1.5 1.1 1.5 1.1
HP kW HP kW
1P6
(1)
1.6 A 0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2
2P5 2.5 A 0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4
4P8 4.8 A 1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75
8P0 8.0 B 2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5
011 11.0 B 3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2
Output Current @ 3Phase, 200...240V Input
HP kW HP kW
1P6
(1)
1.6 A 0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2
2P5 2.5 A 0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4
5P0 5.0 A 1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75
8P0 8.0 A 2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5
011 11.0 A 3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2
017 17.5 B 5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0
024 24.0 C 7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5
032 32.2 D 10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5
048
(2)
48.3 E 15.0 11.0 10.0 7.5
062
(2)
62.1 E 20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0

HP kW HP kW
1P4 1.4 A 0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4
2P3 2.3 A 1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75
4P0 4.0 A 2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5
6P0 6.0 A 3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2
010 10.5 B 5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0
013 13.0 C 7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5
017 17.0 C 10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5
024 24.0 D 15.0 11.0 15.0 11.0
030
(2)
30.0 D 20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0
037
(2)
37.0 E 25.0 18.5 20.0 15.0
043
(2)
43.0 E 30.0 22.0 25.0 18.5
HP kW HP kW
0P9 0.9 A 0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4
1P7 1.7 A 1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75
3P0 3.0 A 2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5
4P2 4.2 A 3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2
6P6 6.6 B 5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0
9P9 9.9 C 7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5
012 12.0 C 10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5
019 19.0 D 15.0 11.0 15.0 11.0
022
(2)
22.0 D 20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0
027
(2)
27.0 E 25.0 18.5 20.0 15.0
032
(2)
32.0 E 30.0 22.0 25.0 18.5
Code Voltage Phase
V 120V AC 1
A 240V AC 1
B 240V AC 3
D 480V AC 3
E 600V AC 3
Code Enclosure
N IP20 NEMA / Open
Code Interface Module
1 Standard
Code EMC Filter
0 No Filter
1 Filter
Code Braking
4 Standard
(1) This rating is only available for PowerFlex 523 drives.
(2) Normal and Heavy Duty ratings are available for this drive.
Preface Overview
Notes:
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
This chapter provides information on mounting and wiring the PowerFlex 520-
series drives.
Most start-up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring. Every precaution must
be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed. All items must be read and
understood before the actual installation begins.
Mounting Considerations
Mount the drive upright on a flat, vertical and level surface.
Protect the cooling fan by avoiding dust or metallic particles.
For information on... See page...
Mounting Considerations 15
AC Supply Source Considerations 19
General Grounding Requirements 20
Fuses and Circuit Breakers 22
Power and Control Module 27
Control Module Cover 30
Power Module Terminal Guard 30
Power Wiring 31
Power Terminal Block 34
Common Bus/Precharge Notes 35
I/O Wiring 35
Control I/O Terminal Block 36
Start and Speed Reference Control 46
CE Conformity 49
ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper
installation. Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the
compliance or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or otherwise for
the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment. A hazard of
personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during
installation.
Frame Screw Size Screw Torque
A M5 (#10...24) 1.56...1.96 Nm (14...17 lb-in.)
B M5 (#10...24) 1.56...1.96 Nm (14...17 lb-in.)
C M5 (#10...24) 1.56...1.96 Nm (14...17 lb-in.)
D M5 (#10...24) 2.45...2.94 Nm (22...26 lb-in.)
E M8 (5/16 in.) 6.0...7.4 Nm (53...65 lb-in.)
Chapter 1 Installation/Wiring
Do not expose to a corrosive atmosphere.
Protect from moisture and direct sunlight.
Minimum Mounting Clearances
See Appendix B for mounting dimensions.
(1) For Frame E with Control Module Fan Kit only, clearance of 95 mm (3.7 in.) is required.
(2) For Frame E with Control Module Fan Kit only, clearance of 12 mm (0.5 in.) is required.
25 mm
(1.0 in.)
25 mm
(1.0 in.)
(2)
(2)
25 mm
(1.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
(1)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
(1)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
(1)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
(1)
Vertical, Zero Stacking
No clearance between drives.
Horizontal, Zero Stacking with
Control Module Fan Kit
Vertical Vertical, Zero Stacking with
Vertical with Control Module Fan Kit
Horizontal with Control Module Fan Kit
Installation/Wiring Chapter 1
Ambient Operating Temperatures
See Appendix B for option kits.
Current Derating Curves
Vertical Mounting
Horizontal/Floor Mounting
Mounting Enclosure Rating
(1)
Ambient Temperature
Minimum Maximum (No Derate) Maximum (Derate)
(2)
Maximum with
Control Module Fan Kit (Derate)
(3)(5)
Vertical IP 20/Open Type
-20 C (-4 F)
50 C (122 F) 60 C (140 F) 70 C (158 F)
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 45 C (113 F) 55 C (131 F)
Vertical, Zero Stacking IP 20/Open Type 45 C (113 F) 55 C (131 F) 65 C (149 F)
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 40 C (104 F) 50 C (122 F)
Horizontal with
(4)(5)
IP 20/Open Type 50 C (122 F) 70 C (158 F)
Horizontal, Zero Stacking
with Control Module Fan Kit
(4)(5)
IP 20/Open Type
45 C (113 F)
65 C (149 F)
(1) IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 rating requires installation of the PowerFlex 520-Series IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 option kit, catalog number 25-JBAx.
(2) For catalogs 25x-D1P4N104 and 25x-E0P9N104, the temperature listed under the Maximum (Derate) column is reduced by 5 C (9 F) for all mounting methods.
(3) For catalogs 25x-D1P4N104 and 25x-E0P9N104, the temperature listed under the Maximum with Control Module Fan Kit (Derate) column is reduced by 10 C (18 F) for vertical and vertical with zero
stacking mounting methods only.
(4) Catalogs 25x-D1P4N104 and 25x-E0P9N104 cannot be mounted using either of the horizontal mounting methods.
(5) Requires installation of the PowerFlex 520-Series Control Module Fan Kit, catalog number 25-FANx-70C.
Ambient Temperature (C)
40
100
90
110
120
80
70
60
50
45 40 35 30 60 65 70 75 80 55 50
P
e
r
c
e
n
t
a
g
e

o
f

R
a
t
e
d

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

(
%
)
IP 30/NEMA 1 with Control
Module Fan Kit
IP 20/Open Type
40
100
90
110
120
80
70
60
50
45 40 35 30 60 65 70 75 80 55 50
P
e
r
c
e
n
t
a
g
e

o
f

R
a
t
e
d

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

(
%
)
IP 30/NEMA 1 with Control
Module Fan Kit
IP 20/Open Type
Single Drive Zero Stacking
40
100
90
120
110
80
70
60
50
30 35 70 75 80 60 65 50 55 40 45
P
e
r
c
e
n
t
a
g
e

o
f

R
a
t
e
d

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

(
%
)
with Control
Module Fan Kit
IP 20/Open Type
40
100
90
120
110
80
70
60
50
30 35 70 75 80 60 65 50 55 40 45
P
e
r
c
e
n
t
a
g
e

o
f

R
a
t
e
d

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

(
%
)
with Control
Module Fan Kit
IP 20/Open Type
Single Drive Zero Stacking
Derating Guidelines for High Altitude
The drive can be used without derating at a maximum altitude of
1000 m(3300 ft). If the drive is used above 1000 m (3300 ft):
Derate the maximum ambient temperature by 5 C (9 F) for every
additional 1000 m (3300 ft), subject to limits listed in the Altitude Limit
(Based on Voltage) table below.
Or
Derate the output current by 10% for every additional 1000 m (3300 ft),
up to 3000 m (9900 ft), subject to limits listed in the Altitude Limit
(Based on Voltage) table below.
High Altitude
Debris Protection
Take precautions to prevent debris from falling through the vents of the drive
housing during installation.
Storage
Store within an ambient temperature range of -40...85C
(1)
.
Store within a relative humidity range of 0...95%, noncondensing.
Do not expose to a corrosive atmosphere.
(1) The maximum ambient temperature for storing a Frame E drive is 70 C.
Altitude Limit (Based on Voltage)
Drive Rating Center Ground (Wye Neutral) Corner Ground, Impedance
Ground, or Ungrounded
100...120V 1-Phase 6000 m 6000 m
200...240V 1-Phase 2000 m 2000 m
200...240V 3-Phase 6000 m 2000 m
380...480V 3-Phase 4000 m 2000 m
525...600V 3-Phase 2000 m 2000 m
Altitude (m)
P
e
r
c
e
n
t
a
g
e

o
f

R
a
t
e
d

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

(
%
)
40
90
100
110
120
80
70
60
50
0 4000 3000 2000 1000
Altitude (m)
A
m
b
i
e
n
t

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

(
C
)
20
50
60
40
30
0 4000 3000 2000 1000
AC Supply Source
Considerations
Ungrounded Distribution Systems
Disconnecting MOVs
To prevent drive damage, the MOVs connected to ground shall be disconnected
if the drive is installed on an ungrounded distribution system (IT mains) where
the line-to-ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125% of the nominal line-
to-line voltage. To disconnect these devices, remove the jumper shown in the
diagrams below.
1. Turn the screw counterclockwise to loosen.
2. Pull the jumper completely out of the drive chassis.
3. Tighten the screw to keep it in place.
Jumper Location (Typical)
Phase to Ground MOV Removal
ATTENTION: PowerFlex 520-series drives contain protective MOVs that are
referenced to ground. These devices must be disconnected if the drive is
installed on an ungrounded or resistive grounded distribution system.
ATTENTION: Removing MOVs in drives with an embedded filter will also
disconnect the filter capacitor from earth ground.
IMPORTANT Tighten screw after jumper removal.
Power Module
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
1 2 3 4
Three-Phase
AC Input
Jumper
Input Power Conditioning
The drive is suitable for direct connection to input power within the rated
voltage of the drive (see page 157). Listed in the Input Power Conditions table
below are certain input power conditions which may cause component damage or
reduction in product life. If any of these conditions exist, install one of the devices
listed under the heading Corrective Action on the line side of the drive.
General Grounding
Requirements
The drive Safety Ground - (PE) must be connected to system ground. Ground
impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial
safety regulations and/or electrical codes. The integrity of all ground connections
should be periodically checked.
Typical Grounding
IMPORTANT Only one device per branch circuit is required. It should be mounted closest to
the branch and sized to handle the total current of the branch circuit.
Input Power Conditions
Input Power Condition Corrective Action
Low Line Impedance (less than 1% line reactance) Install Line Reactor
(2)
or Isolation Transformer
(2) See Appendix B for accessory ordering information.
Greater than 120 kVA supply transformer
Line has power factor correction capacitors Install Line Reactor
(2)
or Isolation Transformer
Line has frequent power interruptions
Line has intermittent noise spikes in excess of 6000V (lightning)
Phase to ground voltage exceeds 125% of normal line to line voltage Remove MOV jumper to ground.
or Install Isolation Transformer with
grounded secondary if necessary.
Ungrounded distribution system
240V open delta configuration (stinger leg)
(1)
(1) For drives applied on an open delta with a middle phase grounded neutral system, the phase opposite the phase that is tapped in
the middle to the neutral or earth is referred to as the stinger leg, high leg, red leg, etc. This leg should be identified throughout
the system with red or orange tape on the wire at each connection point. The stinger leg should be connected to the center Phase B
on the reactor. See Bulletin 1321-3R Series Line Reactors on page 171 for specific line reactor part numbers.
Install Line Reactor
(2)
SHLD
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Ground Fault Monitoring
If a system ground fault monitor (RCD) is to be used, only Type B (adjustable)
devices should be used to avoid nuisance tripping.
Safety Ground - (PE)
This is the safety ground for the drive that is required by code. One of these
points must be connected to adjacent building steel (girder, joist), a floor ground
rod or bus bar. Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial
safety regulations and/or electrical codes.
Motor Ground
The motor ground must be connected to one of the ground terminals on the
drive.
Shield Termination - SHLD
Either of the safety ground terminals located on the power terminal block
provides a grounding point for the motor cable shield. The motor cable shield
connected to one of these terminals (drive end) should also be connected to the
motor frame (motor end). Use a shield terminating or EMI clamp to connect the
shield to the safety ground terminal. The earthing plate or conduit box option
may be used with a cable clamp for a grounding point for the cable shield.
When shielded cable is used for control and signal wiring, the shield should be
grounded at the source end only, not at the drive end.
RFI Filter Grounding
Using a drive with filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents.
Therefore, the filter must only be used in installations with grounded AC
supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly grounded (bonded)
to the building power distribution ground. Ensure that the incoming supply
neutral is solidly connected (bonded) to the same building power distribution
ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any
form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection. Some local
codes may require redundant ground connections. The integrity of all
connections should be periodically checked.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The PowerFlex 520-series drive does not provide branch short circuit protection.
This product should be installed with either input fuses or an input circuit
breaker. National and local industrial safety regulations and/or electrical codes
may determine additional requirements for these installations.
The tables found on pages 23...26 provide recommended AC line input fuse and
circuit breaker information. See Fusing and Circuit Breakers below for UL and
IEC requirements. Sizes listed are the recommended sizes based on 40 C
(104 F) and the U.S. N.E.C. Other country, state or local codes may require
different ratings.
Fusing
The recommended fuse types are listed in the tables found on pages 23...26. If
available current ratings do not match those listed in the tables provided, choose
the next higher fuse rating.
IEC BS88 (British Standard) Parts 1 & 2
(1)
, EN60269-1, Parts 1 & 2,
type GG or equivalent should be used.
UL UL Class CC, T, RK1, or J should be used.
Circuit Breakers
The non-fuse listings in the tables found on pages 23...26 include inverse time
circuit breakers, instantaneous trip circuit breakers (motor circuit protectors)
and 140M self-protected combination motor controllers. If one of these is chosen
as the desired protection method, the following requirements apply:
IEC Both types of circuit breakers and 140M self-protected
combination motor controllers are acceptable for IEC installations.
UL Only inverse time circuit breakers and the specified 140M self-
protected combination motor controllers are acceptable for UL
installations.
Bulletin 140M (Self-Protected Combination Controller)/UL489 Circuit Breakers
When using Bulletin 140M or UL489 rated circuit breakers, the guidelines listed
below must be followed in order to meet the NEC requirements for branch
circuit protection.
Bulletin 140M can be used in single motor applications.
Bulletin 140M can be used up stream from the drive without the need for
fuses.
(1) Typical designations include, but may not be limited to the following;
Parts 1 & 2: AC, AD, BC, BD, CD, DD, ED, EFS, EF, FF, FG, GF, GG, GH.
F
u
s
e
s

a
n
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

f
o
r

P
o
w
e
r
F
l
e
x

5
2
0
-
S
e
r
i
e
s

D
r
i
v
e
s
1
0
0
.
.
.
1
2
0
V

1
-
P
h
a
s
e

I
n
p
u
t

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

D
e
v
i
c
e
s

F
r
a
m
e
s

A
.
.
.
B
2
0
0
.
.
.
2
4
0
V

1
-
P
h
a
s
e

I
n
p
u
t

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

D
e
v
i
c
e
s

F
r
a
m
e
s

A
.
.
.
B
(
1
)
W
h
e
n

t
h
e

d
r
i
v
e

i
s

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

m
o
t
o
r
s

w
i
t
h

l
o
w
e
r

a
m
p

r
a
t
i
n
g
s
,

r
e
f
e
r

t
o

t
h
e

d
r
i
v
e

n
a
m
e
p
l
a
t
e

f
o
r

d
r
i
v
e

i
n
p
u
t

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

r
a
t
i
n
g
.
(
2
)
T
h
e

A
I
C

r
a
t
i
n
g
s

o
f

t
h
e

B
u
l
l
e
t
i
n

1
4
0
M

M
o
t
o
r

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
o
r

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

m
a
y

v
a
r
y
.

S
e
e

B
u
l
l
e
t
i
n

1
4
0
M

M
o
t
o
r

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
.
(
3
)
B
u
l
l
e
t
i
n

1
4
0
M

w
i
t
h

a
d
j
u
s
t
a
b
l
e

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

r
a
n
g
e

s
h
o
u
l
d

h
a
v
e

t
h
e

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

t
r
i
p

s
e
t

t
o

t
h
e

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

r
a
n
g
e

t
h
a
t

t
h
e

d
e
v
i
c
e

w
i
l
l

n
o
t

t
r
i
p
.
(
4
)
M
a
n
u
a
l

S
e
l
f
-
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

(
T
y
p
e

E
)

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

M
o
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
,

U
L

l
i
s
t
e
d

f
o
r

4
8
0
Y
/
2
7
7

a
n
d

6
0
0
Y
/
3
4
7

A
C

i
n
p
u
t
.

N
o
t

U
L

l
i
s
t
e
d

f
o
r

u
s
e

o
n

4
8
0
V

o
r

6
0
0
V

D
e
l
t
a
/
D
e
l
t
a
,

c
o
r
n
e
r

g
r
o
u
n
d
,

o
r

h
i
g
h
-
r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e

g
r
o
u
n
d

s
y
s
t
e
m
s
.
C
a
t
a
l
o
g

N
o
.
O
u
t
p
u
t

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
I
n
p
u
t

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
F r a m e S i z e
C o n t a c t o r
C a t a l o g N o .
I
E
C

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

(
N
o
n
-
U
L
)
U
L

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
P
F

5
2
3
P
F

5
2
5
N
D
H
D
A m p s
k V A
M
a
x
A
m
p
s
(
1
)
F
u
s
e
s

(
R
a
t
i
n
g
)
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s
F
u
s
e
s

(
M
a
x
.

R
a
t
i
n
g
)
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s
M
i
n
.
E
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e
V
o
l
.

(
i
n
.
3
)
H
P
k
W
H
P
k
W
M
i
n
.
M
a
x
.
1
4
0
U
/
1
4
0
G
1
4
0
M
C
l
a
s
s

/

C
a
t
a
l
o
g

N
o
.
1
4
0
U
/
1
4
0
G
1
4
0
M
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
2
5
A
-
V
1
P
6
N
1
0
4
0
.
2
5
0
.
2
0
.
2
5
0
.
2
1
.
6
0
.
8
6
.
4
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
1
0
1
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
B
8
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
6
3
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
B
8
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
6
3
2
5
A
-
V
2
P
5
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
V
2
P
5
N
1
0
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
2
.
5
1
.
3
9
.
6
A
1
0
0
-
C
1
2
1
6
2
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
1
2
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
0
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
2
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
C
2
-
C
1
2
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
0
2
5
A
-
V
4
P
8
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
V
4
P
8
N
1
0
4
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
4
.
8
2
.
5
1
9
.
2
B
1
0
0
-
C
2
3
2
5
4
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
2
5
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
C
2
0
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
4
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
2
5
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
C
2
0
2
5
A
-
V
6
P
0
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
V
6
P
0
N
1
0
4
1
.
5
1
.
1
1
.
5
1
.
1
6
.
0
3
.
2
2
4
.
0
B
1
0
0
-
C
2
3
3
2
5
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
3
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
5
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
3
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5
C
a
t
a
l
o
g

N
o
.
O
u
t
p
u
t

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
I
n
p
u
t

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
F r a m e S i z e
C o n t a c t o r
C a t a l o g N o .
I
E
C

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

(
N
o
n
-
U
L
)
U
L

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
P
F

5
2
3
P
F

5
2
5
N
D
H
D
A m p s
k V A
M
a
x
A
m
p
s
(
1
)
F
u
s
e
s

(
R
a
t
i
n
g
)
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s
F
u
s
e
s

(
M
a
x
.

R
a
t
i
n
g
)
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s
M
i
n
.
E
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e
V
o
l
.

(
i
n
.
3
)
H
P
k
W
H
P
k
W
M
i
n
.
M
a
x
.
1
4
0
U
/
1
4
0
G
1
4
0
M
C
l
a
s
s

/

C
a
t
a
l
o
g

N
o
.
1
4
0
U
/
1
4
0
G
1
4
0
M
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
2
5
A
-
A
1
P
6
N
1
0
4
0
.
2
5
0
.
2
0
.
2
5
0
.
2
1
.
6
1
.
4
5
.
3
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
6
1
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
6
3
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
6
3
2
5
A
-
A
1
P
6
N
1
1
4
0
.
2
5
0
.
2
0
.
2
5
0
.
2
1
.
6
1
.
4
5
.
3
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
6
1
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
6
3
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
6
3
2
5
A
-
A
2
P
5
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
A
2
P
5
N
1
0
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
2
.
5
1
.
7
6
.
5
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
1
0
1
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
0
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
0
2
5
A
-
A
2
P
5
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
A
2
P
5
N
1
1
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
2
.
5
1
.
7
6
.
5
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
1
0
1
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
0
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
0
2
5
A
-
A
4
P
8
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
A
4
P
8
N
1
0
4
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
4
.
8
2
.
8
1
0
.
7
A
1
0
0
-
C
1
2
1
6
2
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
6
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
2
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
6
2
5
A
-
A
4
P
8
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
A
4
P
8
N
1
1
4
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
4
.
8
2
.
8
1
0
.
7
A
1
0
0
-
C
1
2
1
6
2
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
6
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
2
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
6
2
5
A
-
A
8
P
0
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
A
8
P
0
N
1
0
4
2
.
0
1
.
5
2
.
0
1
.
5
8
.
0
4
.
8
1
8
.
0
B
1
0
0
-
C
2
3
2
5
4
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
2
5
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

4
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
2
5
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5
2
5
A
-
A
8
P
0
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
A
8
P
0
N
1
1
4
2
.
0
1
.
5
2
.
0
1
.
5
8
.
0
4
.
8
1
8
.
0
B
1
0
0
-
C
2
3
2
5
4
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
2
5
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

4
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
2
-
C
2
5
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5
2
5
A
-
A
0
1
1
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
A
0
1
1
N
1
0
4
3
.
0
2
.
2
3
.
0
2
.
2
1
1
.
0
6
.
0
2
2
.
9
B
1
0
0
-
C
3
7
3
2
5
0
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
3
5
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

5
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5
2
5
A
-
A
0
1
1
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
A
0
1
1
N
1
1
4
3
.
0
2
.
2
3
.
0
2
.
2
1
1
.
0
6
.
0
2
2
.
9
B
1
0
0
-
C
3
7
3
2
5
0
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
3
5
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

5
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5

F
u
s
e
s

a
n
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

f
o
r

P
o
w
e
r
F
l
e
x

5
2
0
-
S
e
r
i
e
s

D
r
i
v
e
s

(
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
d
)
2
0
0
.
.
.
2
4
0
V

3
-
P
h
a
s
e

I
n
p
u
t

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

D
e
v
i
c
e
s

F
r
a
m
e
s

A
.
.
.
E
(
1
)

N
o
r
m
a
l

D
u
t
y

(
N
D
)

a
n
d

H
e
a
v
y

D
u
t
y

(
H
D
)

r
a
t
i
n
g
s

a
r
e

a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

t
h
i
s

d
r
i
v
e
.
(
2
)
W
h
e
n

t
h
e

d
r
i
v
e

i
s

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

m
o
t
o
r
s

w
i
t
h

l
o
w
e
r

a
m
p

r
a
t
i
n
g
s
,

r
e
f
e
r

t
o

t
h
e

d
r
i
v
e

n
a
m
e
p
l
a
t
e

f
o
r

d
r
i
v
e

i
n
p
u
t

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

r
a
t
i
n
g
.
(
3
)
T
h
e

A
I
C

r
a
t
i
n
g
s

o
f

t
h
e

B
u
l
l
e
t
i
n

1
4
0
M

M
o
t
o
r

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
o
r

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

m
a
y

v
a
r
y
.

S
e
e

B
u
l
l
e
t
i
n

1
4
0
M

M
o
t
o
r

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
.
(
4
)
B
u
l
l
e
t
i
n

1
4
0
M

w
i
t
h

a
d
j
u
s
t
a
b
l
e

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

r
a
n
g
e

s
h
o
u
l
d

h
a
v
e

t
h
e

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

t
r
i
p

s
e
t

t
o

t
h
e

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

r
a
n
g
e

t
h
a
t

t
h
e

d
e
v
i
c
e

w
i
l
l

n
o
t

t
r
i
p
.
(
5
)
M
a
n
u
a
l

S
e
l
f
-
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

(
T
y
p
e

E
)

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

M
o
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
,

U
L

l
i
s
t
e
d

f
o
r

4
8
0
Y
/
2
7
7

a
n
d

6
0
0
Y
/
3
4
7

A
C

i
n
p
u
t
.

N
o
t

U
L

l
i
s
t
e
d

f
o
r

u
s
e

o
n

4
8
0
V

o
r

6
0
0
V

D
e
l
t
a
/
D
e
l
t
a
,

c
o
r
n
e
r

g
r
o
u
n
d
,

o
r

h
i
g
h
-
r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e

g
r
o
u
n
d

s
y
s
t
e
m
s
.
(
6
)
W
h
e
n

u
s
i
n
g

a

M
a
n
u
a
l

S
e
l
f
-
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

(
T
y
p
e

E
)

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

M
o
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

w
i
t
h

t
h
i
s

d
r
i
v
e

p
o
w
e
r

r
a
t
i
n
g
,

t
h
e

d
r
i
v
e

m
u
s
t

b
e

i
n
s
t
a
l
l
e
d

i
n

a

v
e
n
t
i
l
a
t
e
d

o
r

n
o
n
-
v
e
n
t
i
l
a
t
e
d

e
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e

w
i
t
h

t
h
e

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

v
o
l
u
m
e

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
e
d

i
n

t
h
i
s

c
o
l
u
m
n
.

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

t
h
e
r
m
a
l

c
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

m
a
y

r
e
q
u
i
r
e

a

l
a
r
g
e
r

e
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e
.
C
a
t
a
l
o
g

N
o
.
(
1
)
O
u
t
p
u
t

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
I
n
p
u
t

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
F r a m e S i z e
C o n t a c t o r
C a t a l o g N o .
I
E
C

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

(
N
o
n
-
U
L
)
U
L

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
P
F

5
2
3
P
F

5
2
5
N
D
H
D
A m p s
k V A
M
a
x
A
m
p
s
(
2
)
F
u
s
e
s

(
R
a
t
i
n
g
)
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s
F
u
s
e
s

(
M
a
x
.

R
a
t
i
n
g
)
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s
M
i
n
.
E
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e

V
o
l
.

(
i
n
.
3
)
H
P
k
W
H
P
k
W
M
i
n
.
M
a
x
.
1
4
0
U
/
1
4
0
G
1
4
0
M
C
l
a
s
s

/

C
a
t
a
l
o
g

N
o
.
1
4
0
U
/
1
4
0
G
1
4
0
M
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
2
5
A
-
B
1
P
6
N
1
0
4
0
.
2
5
0
.
2
0
.
2
5
0
.
2
1
.
6
0
.
9
1
.
9
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
3
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
3
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
2
5
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
3
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
2
5
2
5
A
-
B
2
P
5
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
B
2
P
5
N
1
0
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
2
.
5
1
.
2
2
.
7
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
6
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
4
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
4
0
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
4
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
4
0
2
5
A
-
B
5
P
0
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
B
5
P
0
N
1
0
4
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
5
.
0
2
.
7
5
.
8
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
1
0
1
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
8
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
6
3
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
8
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
6
3
2
5
A
-
B
8
P
0
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
B
8
P
0
N
1
0
4
2
.
0
1
.
5
2
.
0
1
.
5
8
.
0
4
.
3
9
.
5
A
1
0
0
-
C
1
2
1
6
2
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
0
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
2
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
0
2
5
A
-
B
0
1
1
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
B
0
1
1
N
1
0
4
3
.
0
2
.
2
3
.
0
2
.
2
1
1
.
0
6
.
3
1
3
.
8
A
1
0
0
-
C
2
3
2
0
3
2
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
6
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
3
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
6
2
5
A
-
B
0
1
7
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
B
0
1
7
N
1
0
4
5
.
0
4
.
0
5
.
0
4
.
0
1
7
.
5
9
.
6
2
1
.
1
B
1
0
0
-
C
2
3
3
2
4
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
2
5
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

4
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
2
5
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5
2
5
A
-
B
0
2
4
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
B
0
2
4
N
1
0
4
7
.
5
5
.
5
7
.
5
5
.
5
2
4
.
0
1
2
.
2
2
6
.
6
C
1
0
0
-
C
3
7
3
5
6
3
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
3
5
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
3
2
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

6
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
3
2
2
5
A
-
B
0
3
2
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
B
0
3
2
N
1
0
4
1
0
.
0
7
.
5
1
0
.
0
7
.
5
3
2
.
2
1
5
.
9
3
4
.
8
D
1
0
0
-
C
4
3
4
5
7
0
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
6
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
4
5
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
7
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
4
5
2
5
A
-
B
0
4
8
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
B
0
4
8
N
1
0
4
1
5
.
0
1
1
.
0
1
0
.
0
7
.
5
4
8
.
3
2
0
.
1
4
4
.
0
E
1
0
0
-
C
6
0
6
3
9
0
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
7
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
4
5
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

9
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
4
5
1
4
1
6
.
0
(
6
)
2
5
A
-
B
0
6
2
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
B
0
6
2
N
1
0
4
2
0
.
0
1
5
.
0
1
5
.
0
1
1
.
0
6
2
.
1
2
5
.
6
5
6
.
0
E
1
0
0
-
C
7
2
7
0
1
2
5
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
9
0
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

1
2
5

F
u
s
e
s

a
n
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

f
o
r

P
o
w
e
r
F
l
e
x

5
2
0
-
S
e
r
i
e
s

D
r
i
v
e
s

(
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
d
)
3
8
0
.
.
.
4
8
0
V

3
-
P
h
a
s
e

I
n
p
u
t

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

D
e
v
i
c
e
s

F
r
a
m
e
s

A
.
.
.
E
(
1
)

N
o
r
m
a
l

D
u
t
y

(
N
D
)

a
n
d

H
e
a
v
y

D
u
t
y

(
H
D
)

r
a
t
i
n
g
s

a
r
e

a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

t
h
i
s

d
r
i
v
e
.
(
2
)
W
h
e
n

t
h
e

d
r
i
v
e

i
s

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

m
o
t
o
r
s

w
i
t
h

l
o
w
e
r

a
m
p

r
a
t
i
n
g
s
,

r
e
f
e
r

t
o

t
h
e

d
r
i
v
e

n
a
m
e
p
l
a
t
e

f
o
r

d
r
i
v
e

i
n
p
u
t

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

r
a
t
i
n
g
.
(
3
)
T
h
e

A
I
C

r
a
t
i
n
g
s

o
f

t
h
e

B
u
l
l
e
t
i
n

1
4
0
M

M
o
t
o
r

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
o
r

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

m
a
y

v
a
r
y
.

S
e
e

B
u
l
l
e
t
i
n

1
4
0
M

M
o
t
o
r

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
.
(
4
)
B
u
l
l
e
t
i
n

1
4
0
M

w
i
t
h

a
d
j
u
s
t
a
b
l
e

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

r
a
n
g
e

s
h
o
u
l
d

h
a
v
e

t
h
e

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

t
r
i
p

s
e
t

t
o

t
h
e

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

r
a
n
g
e

t
h
a
t

t
h
e

d
e
v
i
c
e

w
i
l
l

n
o
t

t
r
i
p
.
(
5
)
M
a
n
u
a
l

S
e
l
f
-
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

(
T
y
p
e

E
)

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

M
o
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
,

U
L

l
i
s
t
e
d

f
o
r

4
8
0
Y
/
2
7
7

a
n
d

6
0
0
Y
/
3
4
7

A
C

i
n
p
u
t
.

N
o
t

U
L

l
i
s
t
e
d

f
o
r

u
s
e

o
n

4
8
0
V

o
r

6
0
0
V

D
e
l
t
a
/
D
e
l
t
a
,

c
o
r
n
e
r

g
r
o
u
n
d
,

o
r

h
i
g
h
-
r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e

g
r
o
u
n
d

s
y
s
t
e
m
s
.
(
6
)
W
h
e
n

u
s
i
n
g

a

M
a
n
u
a
l

S
e
l
f
-
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

(
T
y
p
e

E
)

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

M
o
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

w
i
t
h

t
h
i
s

d
r
i
v
e

p
o
w
e
r

r
a
t
i
n
g
,

t
h
e

d
r
i
v
e

m
u
s
t

b
e

i
n
s
t
a
l
l
e
d

i
n

a

v
e
n
t
i
l
a
t
e
d

o
r

n
o
n
-
v
e
n
t
i
l
a
t
e
d

e
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e

w
i
t
h

t
h
e

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

v
o
l
u
m
e

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
e
d

i
n

t
h
i
s

c
o
l
u
m
n
.

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

t
h
e
r
m
a
l

c
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

m
a
y

r
e
q
u
i
r
e

a

l
a
r
g
e
r

e
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e
.
C
a
t
a
l
o
g

N
o
.
(
1
)
O
u
t
p
u
t

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
I
n
p
u
t

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
F r a m e S i z e
C o n t a c t o r
C a t a l o g N o .
I
E
C

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

(
N
o
n
-
U
L
)
U
L

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
P
F

5
2
3
P
F

5
2
5
N
D
H
D
A m p s
k V A
M
a
x
A
m
p
s
(
2
)
F
u
s
e
s

(
R
a
t
i
n
g
)
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s
F
u
s
e
s

(
M
a
x
.

R
a
t
i
n
g
)
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s
M
i
n
.
E
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e

V
o
l
.

(
i
n
.
3
)
H
P
k
W
H
P
k
W
M
i
n
.
M
a
x
.
1
4
0
U
/
1
4
0
G
1
4
0
M
C
l
a
s
s

/

C
a
t
a
l
o
g

N
o
.
1
4
0
U
/
1
4
0
G
1
4
0
M
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
2
5
A
-
D
1
P
4
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
D
1
P
4
N
1
0
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
1
.
4
1
.
7
1
.
9
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
3
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
3
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
2
5
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
6
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
2
5
2
5
A
-
D
1
P
4
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
D
1
P
4
N
1
1
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
1
.
4
1
.
7
1
.
9
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
3
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
3
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
2
5
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
6
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
2
5
2
5
A
-
D
2
P
3
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
D
2
P
3
N
1
0
4
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
2
.
3
2
.
9
3
.
2
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
6
1
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
6
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
4
0
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
4
0
2
5
A
-
D
2
P
3
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
D
2
P
3
N
1
1
4
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
2
.
3
2
.
9
3
.
2
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
6
1
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
6
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
4
0
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
4
0
2
5
A
-
D
4
P
0
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
D
4
P
0
N
1
0
4
2
.
0
1
.
5
2
.
0
1
.
5
4
.
0
5
.
2
5
.
7
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
1
0
1
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
6
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
6
3
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
6
3
2
5
A
-
D
4
P
0
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
D
4
P
0
N
1
1
4
2
.
0
1
.
5
2
.
0
1
.
5
4
.
0
5
.
2
5
.
7
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
1
0
1
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
6
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
6
3
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
6
3
2
5
A
-
D
6
P
0
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
D
6
P
0
N
1
0
4
3
.
0
2
.
2
3
.
0
2
.
2
6
.
0
6
.
9
7
.
5
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
1
0
1
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
0
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
0
2
5
A
-
D
6
P
0
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
D
6
P
0
N
1
1
4
3
.
0
2
.
2
3
.
0
2
.
2
6
.
0
6
.
9
7
.
5
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
1
0
1
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
0
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
0
2
5
A
-
D
0
1
0
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
D
0
1
0
N
1
0
4
5
.
0
4
.
0
5
.
0
4
.
0
1
0
.
5
1
2
.
6
1
3
.
8
B
1
0
0
-
C
2
3
2
0
3
2
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
6
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
3
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
6
2
5
A
-
D
0
1
0
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
D
0
1
0
N
1
1
4
5
.
0
4
.
0
5
.
0
4
.
0
1
0
.
5
1
2
.
6
1
3
.
8
B
1
0
0
-
C
2
3
2
0
3
2
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
6
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
3
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
6
2
5
A
-
D
0
1
3
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
D
0
1
3
N
1
0
4
7
.
5
5
.
5
7
.
5
5
.
5
1
3
.
0
1
4
.
1
1
5
.
4
C
1
0
0
-
C
2
3
2
0
3
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
2
5
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
C
2
0
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

3
5
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
C
2
0
2
5
A
-
D
0
1
3
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
D
0
1
3
N
1
1
4
7
.
5
5
.
5
7
.
5
5
.
5
1
3
.
0
1
4
.
1
1
5
.
4
C
1
0
0
-
C
2
3
2
0
3
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
2
5
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
C
2
0
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

3
5
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
C
2
0
2
5
A
-
D
0
1
7
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
D
0
1
7
N
1
0
4
1
0
.
0
7
.
5
1
0
.
0
7
.
5
1
7
.
0
1
6
.
8
1
8
.
4
C
1
0
0
-
C
2
3
2
5
4
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
2
5
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
C
2
0
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

4
0
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
C
2
0
2
5
A
-
D
0
1
7
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
D
0
1
7
N
1
1
4
1
0
.
0
7
.
5
1
0
.
0
7
.
5
1
7
.
0
1
6
.
8
1
8
.
4
C
1
0
0
-
C
2
3
2
5
4
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
2
5
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
C
2
0
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

4
0
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
C
2
0
2
5
A
-
D
0
2
4
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
D
0
2
4
N
1
0
4
1
5
.
0
1
1
.
0
1
5
.
0
1
1
.
0
2
4
.
0
2
4
.
1
2
6
.
4
D
1
0
0
-
C
3
7
3
5
6
3
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
4
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
3
2
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

6
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
3
2
6
5
6
.
7
(
6
)
2
5
A
-
D
0
2
4
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
D
0
2
4
N
1
1
4
1
5
.
0
1
1
.
0
1
5
.
0
1
1
.
0
2
4
.
0
2
4
.
1
2
6
.
4
D
1
0
0
-
C
3
7
3
5
6
3
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
4
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
3
2
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

6
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
3
2
6
5
6
.
7
(
6
)
2
5
A
-
D
0
3
0
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
D
0
3
0
N
1
0
4
2
0
.
0
1
5
.
0
1
5
.
0
1
1
.
0
3
0
.
0
3
0
.
2
3
3
.
0
D
1
0
0
-
C
4
3
4
5
7
0
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
5
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
4
5
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

7
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
4
5
6
5
6
.
7
(
6
)
2
5
A
-
D
0
3
0
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
D
0
3
0
N
1
1
4
2
0
.
0
1
5
.
0
1
5
.
0
1
1
.
0
3
0
.
0
3
0
.
2
3
3
.
0
D
1
0
0
-
C
4
3
4
5
7
0
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
5
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
4
5
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

7
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
4
5
6
5
6
.
7
(
6
)
2
5
A
-
D
0
3
7
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
D
0
3
7
N
1
1
4
2
5
.
0
1
8
.
5
2
0
.
0
1
5
.
0
3
7
.
0
3
0
.
8
3
3
.
7
E
1
0
0
-
C
4
3
4
5
7
0
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
5
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
4
5
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

7
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
4
5
2
5
A
-
D
0
4
3
N
1
1
4
2
5
B
-
D
0
4
3
N
1
1
4
3
0
.
0
2
2
.
0
2
5
.
0
1
8
.
5
4
3
.
0
3
5
.
6
3
8
.
9
E
1
0
0
-
C
6
0
5
0
8
0
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
6
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
4
5
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

8
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
4
5

F
u
s
e
s

a
n
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

f
o
r

P
o
w
e
r
F
l
e
x

5
2
0
-
S
e
r
i
e
s

D
r
i
v
e
s

(
c
o
n
t
i
n
u
e
d
)
5
2
5
.
.
.
6
0
0
V

3
-
P
h
a
s
e

I
n
p
u
t

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

D
e
v
i
c
e
s

F
r
a
m
e
s

A
.
.
.
E
(
1
)

N
o
r
m
a
l

D
u
t
y

(
N
D
)

a
n
d

H
e
a
v
y

D
u
t
y

(
H
D
)

r
a
t
i
n
g
s

a
r
e

a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e

f
o
r

t
h
i
s

d
r
i
v
e
.
(
2
)
W
h
e
n

t
h
e

d
r
i
v
e

i
s

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
i
n
g

m
o
t
o
r
s

w
i
t
h

l
o
w
e
r

a
m
p

r
a
t
i
n
g
s
,

r
e
f
e
r

t
o

t
h
e

d
r
i
v
e

n
a
m
e
p
l
a
t
e

f
o
r

d
r
i
v
e

i
n
p
u
t

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

r
a
t
i
n
g
.
(
3
)
T
h
e

A
I
C

r
a
t
i
n
g
s

o
f

t
h
e

B
u
l
l
e
t
i
n

1
4
0
M

M
o
t
o
r

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
o
r

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

m
a
y

v
a
r
y
.

S
e
e

B
u
l
l
e
t
i
n

1
4
0
M

M
o
t
o
r

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
.
(
4
)
B
u
l
l
e
t
i
n

1
4
0
M

w
i
t
h

a
d
j
u
s
t
a
b
l
e

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

r
a
n
g
e

s
h
o
u
l
d

h
a
v
e

t
h
e

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

t
r
i
p

s
e
t

t
o

t
h
e

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

r
a
n
g
e

t
h
a
t

t
h
e

d
e
v
i
c
e

w
i
l
l

n
o
t

t
r
i
p
.
(
5
)
M
a
n
u
a
l

S
e
l
f
-
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

(
T
y
p
e

E
)

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

M
o
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
,

U
L

l
i
s
t
e
d

f
o
r

4
8
0
Y
/
2
7
7

a
n
d

6
0
0
Y
/
3
4
7

A
C

i
n
p
u
t
.

N
o
t

U
L

l
i
s
t
e
d

f
o
r

u
s
e

o
n

4
8
0
V

o
r

6
0
0
V

D
e
l
t
a
/
D
e
l
t
a
,

c
o
r
n
e
r

g
r
o
u
n
d
,

o
r

h
i
g
h
-
r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e

g
r
o
u
n
d

s
y
s
t
e
m
s
.
(
6
)
W
h
e
n

u
s
e
d

w
i
t
h

t
h
e

1
4
0
M

c
i
r
c
u
i
t

b
r
e
a
k
e
r
,

t
h
e

2
5
A
-
E
9
P
9
1
0
4

m
u
s
t

b
e

i
n
s
t
a
l
l
e
d

i
n

a

v
e
n
t
i
l
a
t
e
d

o
r

n
o
n
-
v
e
n
t
i
l
a
t
e
d

e
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e

w
i
t
h

t
h
e

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

s
i
z
e

o
f

4
5
7
.
2

x

4
5
7
.
2

x

2
6
9
.
8

m
m

(
1
8

x

1
8

x

1
0
.
6
2

i
n
.
)
.
(
7
)
W
h
e
n

u
s
i
n
g

a

M
a
n
u
a
l

S
e
l
f
-
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
e
d

(
T
y
p
e

E
)

C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

M
o
t
o
r

C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r

w
i
t
h

t
h
i
s

d
r
i
v
e

p
o
w
e
r

r
a
t
i
n
g
,

t
h
e

d
r
i
v
e

m
u
s
t

b
e

i
n
s
t
a
l
l
e
d

i
n

a

v
e
n
t
i
l
a
t
e
d

o
r

n
o
n
-
v
e
n
t
i
l
a
t
e
d

e
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e

w
i
t
h

t
h
e

m
i
n
i
m
u
m

v
o
l
u
m
e

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
e
d

i
n

t
h
i
s

c
o
l
u
m
n
.

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

s
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

t
h
e
r
m
a
l

c
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s

m
a
y

r
e
q
u
i
r
e

a

l
a
r
g
e
r

e
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e
.
C
a
t
a
l
o
g

N
o
.
(
1
)
O
u
t
p
u
t

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
I
n
p
u
t

R
a
t
i
n
g
s
F r a m e S i z e
C o n t a c t o r
C a t a l o g N o .
I
E
C

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

(
N
o
n
-
U
L
)
U
L

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s
P
F

5
2
3
P
F

5
2
5
N
D
H
D
A m p s
k V A
M
a
x
A
m
p
s
(
2
)
F
u
s
e
s

(
R
a
t
i
n
g
)
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s
F
u
s
e
s

(
M
a
x
.

R
a
t
i
n
g
)
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

B
r
e
a
k
e
r
s
M
i
n
.

E
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e

V
o
l
.

(
i
n
.
3
)
H
P
k
W
H
P
k
W
M
i
n
.
M
a
x
.
1
4
0
U
/
1
4
0
G
1
4
0
M
C
l
a
s
s

/

C
a
t
a
l
o
g

N
o
.
1
4
0
U
/
1
4
0
G
1
4
0
M
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
2
5
A
-
E
0
P
9
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
E
0
P
9
N
1
0
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
0
.
5
0
.
4
0
.
9
1
.
4
1
.
2
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
3
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
2
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
2
5
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
6
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
2
5
2
5
A
-
E
1
P
7
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
E
1
P
7
N
1
0
4
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
1
.
0
0
.
7
5
1
.
7
2
.
6
2
.
3
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
3
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
3
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
2
5
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
6
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
2
5
2
5
A
-
E
3
P
0
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
E
3
P
0
N
1
0
4
2
.
0
1
.
5
2
.
0
1
.
5
3
.
0
4
.
3
3
.
8
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
6
1
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
5
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
4
0
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
4
0
2
5
A
-
E
4
P
2
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
E
4
P
2
N
1
0
4
3
.
0
2
.
2
3
.
0
2
.
2
4
.
2
6
.
1
5
.
3
A
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
1
0
1
6
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
B
8
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
B
6
3
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
B
6
3
2
5
A
-
E
6
P
6
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
E
6
P
6
N
1
0
4
5
.
0
4
.
0
5
.
0
4
.
0
6
.
6
9
.
1
8
.
0
B
1
0
0
-
C
0
9
1
0
2
0
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
1
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
0
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
2
0
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
C
1
0
2
5
A
-
E
9
P
9
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
E
9
P
9
N
1
0
4
7
.
5
5
.
5
7
.
5
5
.
5
9
.
9
1
2
.
8
1
1
.
2
C
1
0
0
-
C
1
6
1
6
2
5
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
1
5
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
6
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
2
5
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
C
1
6
(
6
)
2
5
A
-
E
0
1
2
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
E
0
1
2
N
1
0
4
1
0
.
0
7
.
5
1
0
.
0
7
.
5
1
2
.
0
1
5
.
4
1
3
.
5
C
1
0
0
-
C
2
3
2
0
3
2
1
4
0
U
-
D
6
D
3
-
C
2
0
1
4
0
M
-
C
2
E
-
C
1
6
C
L
A
S
S

R
K
5
,

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

D
L
S
-
R
-
3
0
1
4
0
M
-
D
8
E
-
C
1
6
2
5
A
-
E
0
1
9
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
E
0
1
9
N
1
0
4
1
5
.
0
1
1
.
0
1
5
.
0
1
1
.
0
1
9
.
0
2
7
.
4
2
4
.
0
D
1
0
0
-
C
3
0
3
2
5
0
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
3
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

5
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
2
5
6
5
6
.
7
(
7
)
2
5
A
-
E
0
2
2
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
E
0
2
2
N
1
0
4
2
0
.
0
1
5
.
0
1
5
.
0
1
1
.
0
2
2
.
0
3
1
.
2
2
7
.
3
D
1
0
0
-
C
3
0
3
5
6
3
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
3
5
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
3
2
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

6
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
3
2
6
5
6
.
7
(
7
)
2
5
A
-
E
0
2
7
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
E
0
2
7
N
1
0
4
2
5
.
0
1
8
.
5
2
0
.
0
1
5
.
0
2
7
.
0
2
8
.
2
2
4
.
7
E
1
0
0
-
C
3
0
3
5
5
0
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
3
5
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
3
2
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

5
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
3
2
1
4
1
6
.
0
(
7
)
2
5
A
-
E
0
3
2
N
1
0
4
2
5
B
-
E
0
3
2
N
1
0
4
3
0
.
0
2
2
.
0
2
5
.
0
1
8
.
5
3
2
.
0
3
3
.
4
2
9
.
2
E
1
0
0
-
C
3
7
4
0
6
3
1
4
0
G
-
G
6
C
3
-
C
5
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
3
2
C
L
A
S
S

C
C
,

J
,

o
r

T

/

6
0
1
4
0
M
-
F
8
E
-
C
3
2
1
4
1
6
.
0
(
7
)
Power and Control Module
PowerFlex 520-series drives consist of a Power Module and Control Module.
Separating the Power and Control Module
1. Press and hold down the catch on both sides of the frame cover, then pull
out and swing upwards to remove (Frames B...E only).
2. Press down and slide out the top cover of the Control Module to unlock it
from the Power Module.
ATTENTION: Perform this action only when drive is NOT powered.
1
2
3. Hold the sides and top of the Control Module firmly, then pull out to
separate it from the Power Module.
Connecting the Power and Control Module
1. Align the connectors on the Power Module and Control Module, then
push the Control Module firmly onto the Power Module.
2. Push the top cover of the Control Module towards the Power Module to
lock it.
3. Insert the catch at the top of the frame cover into the Power Module, then
swing the frame cover to snap the side catches onto the Power Module
(Frames B...E only).
Control Module Cover
To access the control terminals, DSI port, and Ethernet port, the front cover must
be removed. To remove:
1. Press and hold down the arrow on the front of the cover.
2. Slide the front cover down to remove from the Control Module.
Re-attach the front cover when wiring is complete.
Power Module Terminal
Guard
To access the power terminals, the terminal guard must be removed. To remove:
1. Press and hold down the catch on both sides of the frame cover, then pull
out and swing upwards to remove (Frames B...E only).
1
2
2. Press and hold down the locking tab on the terminal guard.
3. Slide the terminal guard down to remove from the Power Module.
Re-attach the terminal guard when wiring is complete.
To access the power terminals for Frame A, you need to separate the Power and
Control Modules. See Separating the Power and Control Module on page 27 for
instructions.
Power Wiring
Motor Cable Types Acceptable for 100...600 Volt Installations
A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations. For many
installations, unshielded cable is adequate, provided it can be separated from
sensitive circuits. As an approximate guide, allow a spacing of 0.3 m (1 ft) for
every 10 m (32.8 ft) of length. In all cases, long parallel runs must be avoided. Do
not use cable with an insulation thickness less than 15 mils (0.4 mm/0.015 in.).
Do not route more than three sets of motor leads in a single conduit to minimize
cross talk. If more than three drive/motor connections per conduit are required,
shielded cable must be used.
ATTENTION: National Codes and standards (NEC, VDE, BSI, etc.) and local codes
outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment. Installation must
comply with specifications regarding wire types, conductor sizes, branch circuit
protection and disconnect devices. Failure to do so may result in personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages,
unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both ends. For the same
reason, if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed, all drives using
this conduit should be disabled. This will help minimize the possible shock
hazard from cross coupled power leads.
UL installations above 50 C ambient must use 600V, 90 C wire.
UL installations in 50 C ambient must use 600V, 75 C or 90 C wire.
UL installations in 40 C ambient should use 600V, 75 C or 90 C wire.
Use copper wire only. Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based
on 75 C. Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire.
Unshielded
THHN, THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry
environments provided adequate free air space and/or conduit fill rates limits are
provided. Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15 mils
and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity.
Shielded/Armored Cable
Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi-conductor cable with
the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise
generated by a typical AC Drive. Strong consideration for shielded cable should
be given in installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales, capacitive
proximity switches and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in
the distribution system. Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar
location, imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications /
networking are also good candidates for shielded cable.
Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents
for some applications. In addition, the increased impedance of shielded cable may
help extend the distance that the motor can be located from the drive without the
addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks. Refer to
Reflected Wave in Wiring and Grounding Guide, (PWM) AC Drives,
publication DRIVES-IN001.
Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by the
environment of the installation, including temperature, flexibility, moisture
characteristics and chemical resistance. In addition, a braided shield should be
included and be specified by the cable manufacturer as having coverage of at
least 75%. An additional foil shield can greatly improve noise containment.
A good example of recommended cable is Belden 295xx (xx determines gauge).
This cable has four (4) XLPE insulated conductors with a 100% coverage foil and
an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire) surrounded by a
PVCjacket.
WARNING: The distance between the drive and motor must not exceed the
maximum cable length stated in the Motor Cable Length Restrictions Tables in
Wiring and Grounding Guide, (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN001.
ATTENTION: Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas.
Other types of shielded cable are available, but the selection of these types may
limit the allowable cable length. Particularly, some of the newer cables twist 4
conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield. This
construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and reduce
the overall drive performance. Unless specified in the individual distance tables as
tested with the drive, these cables are not recommended and their performance
against the lead length limits supplied is not known.
Reflected Wave Protection
The drive should be installed as close to the motor as possible. Installations with
long motor cables may require the addition of external devices to limit voltage
reflections at the motor (reflected wave phenomena). Refer to Reflected Wave in
Wiring and Grounding Guide, (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-
IN001.
The reflected wave data applies to all carrier frequencies 2...16 kHz.
For 240V ratings and lower, reflected wave effects do not need to be considered.
Output Disconnect
The drive is intended to be commanded by control input signals that will start
and stop the motor. A device that routinely disconnects then reapplies output
power to the motor for the purpose of starting and stopping the motor should
not be used. If it is necessary to disconnect power to the motor with the drive
outputting power, an auxiliary contact should be used to simultaneously disable
drive (Aux Fault or Coast to Stop).
Recommended Shielded Wire
Location Rating/Type Description
Standard (Option 1) 600V, 90 C (194 F) XHHW2/RHW-2
Anixter B209500-B209507, Belden
29501-29507, or equivalent
Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation.
Copper braid/aluminum foil combination shield and
tinned copper drain wire.
PVC jacket.
Standard (Option 2) Tray rated 600V, 90 C (194 F)
RHH/RHW-2 Anixter OLF-7xxxxx or
equivalent
Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation.
5 mil single helical copper tape (25% overlap min.)
with three bare copper grounds in contact with shield.
PVC jacket.
Class I & II;
Division I & II
Tray rated 600V, 90 C (194 F)
RHH/RHW-2 Anixter 7V-7xxxx-3G or
equivalent
Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation
and impervious corrugated continuously welded
aluminum armor.
Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket overall.
Three copper grounds on #10 AWG and smaller.
Power Terminal Block
Power Terminal Block
Terminal Description
R/L1, S/L2 1-Phase Input Line Voltage Connection
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3-Phase Input Line Voltage Connection
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 Motor Phase Connection = Switch any two motor leads to change
forward direction.
DC+, DC- DC Bus Connection (except for 110V 1-Phase)
BR+, BR- Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection
Safety Ground - PE
IMPORTANT Terminal screws may become loose during shipment. Ensure that all terminal
screws are tightened to the recommended torque before applying power to the
drive.
Power Terminal Block Wire Specifications
Frame Maximum Wire Size
(1)
(1) Maximum/minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept these are not recommendations.
Minimum Wire Size
(1)
Torque
A 5.3 mm
2
(10 AWG) 0.8 mm
2
(18 AWG) 1.76...2.16 Nm (15.6...19.1 lb-in.)
B 8.4 mm
2
(8 AWG) 2.1 mm
2
(14 AWG) 1.76...2.16 Nm (15.6...19.1 lb-in.)
C 8.4 mm
2
(8 AWG) 2.1 mm
2
(14 AWG) 1.76...2.16 Nm (15.6...19.1 lb-in.)
D 13.3 mm
2
(6 AWG) 5.3 mm
2
(10 AWG) 1.76...2.16 Nm (15.6...19.1 lb-in.)
E 26.7 mm
2
(3 AWG) 8.4 mm
2
(8 AWG) 3.09...3.77 Nm (27.3...33.4 lb-in.)
V/T2 T/L3 S/L2 R/L1 U/T1 W/T3
BR+
BR- DC- DC+
BR+
BR- DC- DC+
Frame A, B, C & D Frame E
Common Bus/Precharge
Notes
If drives are used with a disconnect switch to the common DC bus, then an
auxiliary contact on the disconnect must be connected to a digital input of the
drive. The corresponding input (parameter t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn
TermBlk xx]) must be set to 30, Precharge En This provides the proper
precharge interlock, guarding against possible damage to the drive when
connected to a common DC bus.
I/O Wiring
Motor Start/Stop Precautions
Important points to remember about I/O wiring:
Always use copper wire.
Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended.
Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least
0.3 m (1 ft).
Signal and Control Wire Types
Recommendations are for 50 C ambient temperature.
75 C wire must be used for 60 C ambient temperature.
ATTENTION: A contactor or other device that routinely disconnects and
reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive
hardware damage. The drive is designed to use control input signals that will
start and stop the motor. If used, the input device must not exceed one
operation per minute or drive damage can occur.
ATTENTION: The drive start/stop control circuitry includes solid-state
components. If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or
unintentional flow of liquid, gas or solids exist, an additional hardwired stop
circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive. When the AC line is
removed, there will be a loss of any inherent regenerative braking effect that
might be present - the motor will coast to a stop. An auxiliary braking method
may be required. Alternatively, use the drives safety input function.
IMPORTANT I/O terminals labeled Common are not referenced to the safety ground (PE)
terminal and are designed to greatly reduce common mode interference.
ATTENTION: Driving the 4-20 mA analog input from a voltage source could
cause component damage. Verify proper configuration prior to applying input
signals.
Maximum Control Wire Recommendations
Do not exceed control wiring length of 30 m (100 ft). Control signal cable length
is highly dependent on electrical environment and installation practices. To
improve noise immunity, the I/O terminal block Common may be connected to
ground terminal/protective earth.
Control I/O Terminal Block
Recommended Signal Wire
Signal Type/
Where Used
Belden Wire Type(s)
(1)
(or equivalent)
(1) Stranded or solid wire.
Description Min. Insulation
Rating
Analog I/O & PTC 8760/9460 0.750 mm
2
(18 AWG), twisted pair,
100% shield with drain
(2)
(2) If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits, the use of shielded wire may not be necessary,
but is always recommended.
300V,
60 C (140 F)
Remote Pot 8770 0.750 mm
2
(18 AWG), 3 conductor, shielded
Encoder/Pulse I/O 9728/9730 0.196 mm
2
(24 AWG), individually shielded pairs
Recommended Control Wire for Digital I/O
Type Wire Type(s) Description Min. Insulation
Rating
Unshielded Per US NEC or applicable
national or local code
300V,
60 C (140 F)
Shielded Multi-conductor shielded
cable such as Belden 8770
(or equivalent)
0.750 mm
2
(18 AWG), 3 conductor, shielded.
Control I/O Terminal Block Wire Specifications
Frame Maximum Wire Size
(1)
(1) Maximum/minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept these are not recommendations.
Minimum Wire Size
(1)
Torque
A...E 1.3 mm
2
(16 AWG) 0.13 mm
2
(26 AWG) 0.71...0.86 Nm (6.2...7.6 lb-in.)
PowerFlex 523 Control I/O Terminal Block
PowerFlex 523 Control I/O Wiring Block Diagram
Control I/O Wiring Block Diagram Notes
(1) See Digital Input Selection for Start Source on page 47 for more information on configuring the digital inputs.
IMPORTANT I/O Terminal 01 is always a stop input. The stopping mode is determined by the
drive setting. See the tables below for more information.
Start Method Stop Method
P046, P048, P050 [Start Source x] I/O Terminal 01 Stop Normal Stop
1 Keypad Coast Per P045
[Stop Mode]
2 DigIn TrmBlk See t062, t063 [DigIn TermBlk xx] below
3 Serial/DSI Coast
4 Network Opt Coast
5 Ethernet/IP
(1)
(1) Setting is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
Coast
04
05
06
01
02
03
11
12
13
14
15
C1
C2
Digital Common
DigIn TermBlk 05/Pulse
DigIn TermBlk 06
Stop
(1)
DigIn TermBlk 02/
Start/Run FWD
(2)
DigIn TermBlk 03/
Direction/Run REV
R1
R2
Relay N.O.
Relay Common
+24V DC
+10V DC
0-10V Input
Analog Common
4-20mA Input
RJ45 Shield
Comm Common
+24V
+10V
Typical
SNK wiring
Typical
SRC wiring
R1
11 12 13 14 15 C1 C2
R2
R3
01 02 03 04 05 06
Pot must be
1...10 k ohm
2 W min.
SNK
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

I
n
D
i
g
I
n
T
e
r
m
B
l
k

0
5

S
e
l
J7 J8
Pulse In
SRC Digital
Input
SRC SNK
R3
Relay N.C.
81
RS485
(DSI)
(2) Two wire control shown. For three wire control use a momentary input on I/O Terminal 02 to command a start. Use a
maintained input for I/O Terminal 03 to change direction.
t062, t063 [DigIn TermBlk xx] I/O Terminal 01 Stop Normal Stop
48 2-Wire FWD t064 [2-Wire Mode] is set to:
0, 1, or 2 = Coast
3 = per P045 [Stop Mode]
Per P045
[Stop Mode]
49 3-Wire Start Per P045 [Stop Mode]
50 2-Wire REV t064 [2-Wire Mode] is set to:
0, 1, or 2 = Coast
51 3-Wire Dir Per P045 [Stop Mode]
IMPORTANT The drive is shipped with a jumper installed between I/O Terminals 01 and 11.
Remove this jumper when using I/O Terminal 01 as a stop or enable input.
Control I/O Terminal Designations
No. Signal Default Description Parameter
R1 Relay N.O. Fault Normally open contact for output relay.
t076
R2 Relay Common Fault Common for output relay.
R3 Relay N.C. Motor Running Normally closed contact for output relay. t081
01 Stop Coast Three wire stop. However, it functions as a stop under all input
modes and cannot be disabled.
P045
(2)
02 DigIn TermBlk 02/
Start/Run FWD
Run FWD Used to initiate motion and also can be used as a programmable
digital input. It can be programmed with t062 [DigIn TermBlk
02] as three wire (Start/Dir with Stop) or two wire (Run FWD/
Run REV) control. Current consumption is 6 mA.
P045, P046,
P048, P050,
A544, t062
Dir/Run REV
Run REV Used to initiate motion and also can be used as a programmable
t063
04 Digital Common Return for digital I/O. Electrically isolated (along with the digital
I/O) from the rest of the drive.

Pulse In
Preset Freq Program with t065 [DigIn TermBlk 05]. Also functions as a Pulse
Train input for reference or speed feedback. The maximum
frequency is 100 kHz. Current consumption is 6 mA.
t065
06 DigIn TermBlk 06 Preset Freq Program with t066 [DigIn TermBlk 06].
Current consumption is 6 mA.
t066
11 +24V DC Referenced to Digital Common.
Drive supplied power for digital inputs.
Maximum output current is 100 mA.
12 +10V DC Referenced to Analog Common.

Drive supplied power for 0...10V external potentiometer.
P047, P049
13 0-10V In
(1)
Not Active For external 0-10V (unipolar) input supply or potentiometer
wiper.
Input impedance:
Voltage source = 100 k
Allowable potentiometer resistance range = 1...10 k
P047, P049,
t062, t063,
t065, t066,
t093, A459,
A471
14 Analog Common Return for the analog I/O. Electrically isolated (along with the
analog I/O) from the rest of the drive.

PowerFlex 525 Control I/O Terminal Block
PowerFlex 525 Control I/O Wiring Block Diagram
15 4-20mA In
(1)
Not Active For external 4-20 mA input supply.
Input impedance = 250
P047, P049,
t062, t063,
t065, t066,
A459, A471
C1 C1 This terminal is tied to the RJ-45 port shield. Tie this terminal to
a clean ground in order to improve noise immunity when using
external communication peripherals.
C2 C2 This is the signal common for the communication signals.

(1) Only one analog frequency source may be connected at a time. If more than one reference is connected at the same time, an
undetermined frequency reference will result.
(2) See Footnote (1) on page 37.
04
05
06
07
01
02
03
08
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Digital Common
DigIn TermBlk 05
DigIn TermBlk 06
DigIn TermBlk 07/Pulse
Stop
(1)
DigIn TermBlk 02/
Start/Run FWD
(2)
DigIn TermBlk 03/
Direction/Run REV
DigIn TermBlk 08
R1
R2
S1
S2
S+
Relay 1 N.O.
Relay 1 Common
+24V DC
+10V DC
0-10V (or 10V) Input
Analog Common
4-20mA Input
Analog Output
Opto Output 1
Opto Output 2
RJ45 Shield
Comm Common
Opto Common
+24V
+10V
Safety 1
Safety 2
Safety +24V
Typical
SNK wiring
Typical
SRC wiring
R1
S1 S2 S+ 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
R2 R5 R6 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 C1 C2
30V DC
50 mA
Non-inductive
Common
24V
(3)
Pot must be
1...10 k ohm
2 W min.
0-10V
0/4-20 mA
SNK
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

I
n
D
i
g
I
n
T
e
r
m
B
l
k

0
7

S
e
l
A
n
a
l
o
g

O
u
t
J10 J9 J5
Pulse In
SRC Digital
Input
0/4-20mA
0-10V
SRC SNK
R5
R6
Relay 2 Common
Relay 2 N.C.
C1
C2
Safe-Torque-Of
Control I/O Wiring Block Diagram Notes
(1) See Digital Input Selection for Start Source on page 47 for more information on configuring the digital inputs.
(2) Two wire control shown. For three wire control use a momentary input on I/O Terminal 02 to command a start. Use a
maintained input for I/O Terminal 03 to change direction.
(3) When using an opto output with an inductive load such as a relay, install a recovery diode parallel to the relay as shown, to prevent
damage to the output.
IMPORTANT I/O Terminal 01 is always a stop input. The stopping mode is determined by the
drive setting. See the tables below for more information.
P046, P048, P050 [Start Source x] I/O Terminal 01 Stop Normal Stop
1 Keypad Coast Per P045
[Stop Mode]
2 DigIn TrmBlk See t062, t063 [DigIn TermBlk xx] below
3 Serial/DSI Coast
4 Network Opt Coast
5 EtherNet/IP Coast
t062, t063 [DigIn TermBlk xx] I/O Terminal 01 Stop Normal Stop
48 2-Wire FWD t064 [2-Wire Mode] is set to:
0, 1, or 2 = Coast
Per P045
[Stop Mode]
49 3-Wire Start Per P045 [Stop Mode]
50 2-Wire REV t064 [2-Wire Mode] is set to:
0, 1, or 2 = Coast
51 3-Wire Dir Per P045 [Stop Mode]
IMPORTANT The drive is shipped with a jumper installed between I/O Terminals 01 and 11.
Remove this jumper when using I/O Terminal 01 as a stop or enable input.
R1 Relay 1 N.O. Fault Normally open contact for output relay.
t076
R2 Relay 1 Common Fault Common for output relay.
R5 Relay 2 Common Motor Running Common for output relay.
t081
R6 Relay 2 N.C. Motor Running Normally closed contact for output relay.
01 Stop Coast Three wire stop. However, it functions as a stop under all input
modes and cannot be disabled.
P045
(1)
Start/Run FWD
Run FWD Used to initiate motion and also can be used as a programmable
P045, P046,
P048, P050,
A544, t062
Dir/Run REV
Run REV Used to initiate motion and also can be used as a programmable
t063
04 Digital Common Return for digital I/O. Electrically isolated (along with the digital
I/O) from the rest of the drive.
t065
t066
Pulse In
Start Source 2
+ Speed
Reference2
Program with t067 [DigIn TermBlk 07]. Also functions as a Pulse
Train input for reference or speed feedback. The maximum
frequency is 100 kHz. Current consumption is 6 mA.
t067
08 DigIn TermBlk 08 Jog Forward Program with t068 [DigIn TermBlk 08].
t068
C1 C1 This terminal is tied to the RJ-45 port shield. Tie this terminal to
a clean ground in order to improve noise immunity when using
external communication peripherals.
C2 C2 This is the signal common for the communication signals.

S1 Safety 1 Safety input 1. Current consumption is 6 mA.
S2 Safety 2 Safety input 2. Current consumption is 6 mA.
S+ Safety +24V +24V supply for safety circuit. Internally tied to the +24V DC
source (Pin 11).
11 +24V DC Referenced to Digital Common.

Drive supplied power for digital inputs.
12 +10V DC Referenced to Analog Common.

Drive supplied power for 0...10V external potentiometer.
P047, P049
13 10V In Not Active For external 0-10V (unipolar) or 10V (bipolar) input supply or
potentiometer wiper.
Input impedance:
Voltage source = 100 k
Allowable potentiometer resistance range = 1...10 k
P047, P049,
t062, t063,
t065, t066,
t093, A459,
A471
14 Analog Common Return for the analog I/O. Electrically isolated (along with the
analog I/O) from the rest of the drive.
15 4-20mA In Not Active For external 4-20 mA input supply.

Input impedance = 250
P047, P049,
t062, t063,
t065, t066,
A459, A471
16 Analog Output OutFreq 0-10 The default analog output is 0-10V. To convert a current value,
change the Analog Output jumper to 0-20 mA. Program with
t088 [Analog Out Sel]. Maximum analog value can be scaled
with t089 [Analog Out High].
Maximum Load: 4-20 mA = 525 (10.5V)
0-10V = 1 k (10 mA)
t088, t089
17 Opto Output 1 Motor Running Program with t069 [Opto Out1 Sel].
Each Opto-Output is rated 30V DC 50 mA (Non-inductive).
t069, t070,
t075
18 Opto Output 2 At Frequency Program with t072 [Opto Out1 Sel].
t072, t073,
t075
19 Opto Common The emitters of the Optocoupler Outputs (1 and 2) are tied
together at Optocoupler Common. Electrically isolated from the
rest of the drive.
(1) See Footnote (1) on page 37.

I/O Wiring Examples
I/O Connection Example
Potentiometer
1...10k Pot.
Recommended
(2 W minimum)
P047 [Speed Reference1] = 5 0-10V Input
Analog Input
0-10V, 100k impedance
4-20 mA, 250
impedance
Bipolar
P047 [Speed Reference1]
= 5 0-10V Input and
t093 [10V Bipolar Enbl]
= 1 Bi-Polar In
Unipolar (Voltage)
= 5 0-10V Input
Unipolar (Current)
= 6 4-20mA Input
Analog Input, PTC
For Drive Fault
Wire the PTC and External Resistor (typically matched to the PTC Hot Resistance) to I/O
Terminals 12, 13, 14.
Wire R2/R3 Relay Output (SRC) to I/O Terminals 5 & 11.
t065 [DigIn TermBlk 05] = 12 Aux Fault
t081 [Relay Out 2 Sel] = 10 Above Anlg V
t082 [Relay Out 2 Level] = % Voltage Trip
Pulse Train Input
PowerFlex 523
t065 [DigIn TermBlk 05]
= 52
PowerFlex 525
= 52
Use P047, P049 and P051
[Speed Referencex] to
select pulse input.
Jumper for DigIn TermBlk
05 or 07 Sel must be
moved to Pulse In.
12
13
14
13
14
10V
Common
13
14
+
Common
14
15
Common
+
11
12
13
14
R5
R6
05
%V
Trip
= X 100
R
PTC (hot)
R
PTC (hot)
+ R
e
R
e
R
PTC
Common
PowerFlex 523 PowerFlex 525
Pulse In 05
04
D
i
g
I
n
T
e
r
m
B
l
k

0
5

S
e
l
Pulse In
Digital
Input
Common
Pulse In
07
04
D
i
g
I
n
T
e
r
m
B
l
k

0
7

S
e
l
Pulse In
Digital
Input
2 Wire SRC Control -
Non-Reversing
P046 [Start Source 1] = 2
and t062 [DigIn TermBlk
02] = 48
Input must be active for
the drive to run. When
input is opened, the drive
will stop as specified by
P045 [Stop Mode].
If desired, a User Supplied
24V DC power source can
be used. Refer to the
External Supply (SRC)
example.
Internal Supply (SRC) External Supply (SRC)
Each digital input draws 6 mA.
2 Wire SNK Control -
Non-Reversing
Internal Supply (SNK)
Run FWD/Run REV
P046 [Start Source 1] = 2,
= 48 and t063 [DigIn
TermBlk 03] = 50
Input must be active for
the drive to run. When
input is opened, the drive
will stop as specified by
P045 [Stop Mode].
If both Run Forward and
Run Reverse inputs are
closed at the same time,
an undetermined state
could occur.
Run FWD/Run REV
Non-Reversing
TermBlk 03] = 51
A momentary input will
start the drive. A stop
input to I/O Terminal 01
will stop the drive as
specified by P045 [Stop
Mode].
11
01
02
Stop-Run
+24V Common
01
02
04
Stop-Run
Stop-Run
01
02
03
04
11
01
02
03
Stop-Run
Forward
Stop-Run
Reverse
Common
01
02
03
04
Stop-Run
Forward
Stop-Run
Reverse
+24V
Stop-Run
Forward
Stop-Run
Reverse
01
02
03
04
11
01
02
Stop
Start
01
02
04
+24V Common
Stop
Start
Non-Reversing
Reversing
TermBlk 03] = 51
A momentary input will
start the drive. A stop
input to I/O Terminal 01
will stop the drive as
specified by P045 [Stop
Mode]. I/O Terminal 03
determines direction.
Reversing
Opto Output (1 & 2)
(1)
t069 [Opto Out1 Sel]
determines Opto-Output 1
(I/O Terminal 17)
operation.
t072 [Opto Out2 Sel]
determines Opto-Output 2
(I/O Terminal 18)
operation.
When using Opto-Output
with an inductive load
such as a relay, install a
recovery diode parallel to
the relay as shown, to
prevent damage to the
output.
Opto-Output 1
Analog Output
(1)
t088 [Analog Out Sel]
determines analog output
type and drive conditions.
0-10V,
1k minimum
0-20 mA/4-20 mA,
525 maximum
t088 [Analog Out Sel] = 0 through 23
The Analog Output Select jumper must be set to match the analog output signal mode set in
t088 [Analog Out Sel].
(1) Feature is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
Stop
Start
01
02
04
11
01
02
03
Stop
Start
Direction
+24V Common
Stop
Start
Direction
01
02
03
04
Stop
Start
Direction
01
02
03
04
Common +24V
CR
19
17
14
16
Common
+
Typical Multiple Drive Connection Examples
Input/Output Connection Example
Multiple Digital Input
Connections
Customer Inputs can be
wired per External Supply
(SRC).
When connecting a single input such as Run, Stop, Reverse or Preset Speeds to multiple
drives, it is important to connect I/O Terminal 04 common together for all drives. If they are to
be tied into another common (such as earth ground or separate apparatus ground) only one
point of the daisy chain of I/O Terminal 04 should be connected.
Multiple Analog
Connections
When connecting a single potentiometer to multiple drives it is important to connect I/O
Terminal 14 common together for all drives. I/O Terminal 14 common and I/O Terminal 13
(potentiometer wiper) should be daisy-chained to each drive. All drives must be powered up
for the analog signal to be read correctly.
Customer Inputs Optional Ground Connection
04 02 04 02 04 02
ATTENTION: I/O Common terminals should not be tied
together when using SNK (Internal Supply) mode. In
SNK mode, if power is removed from one drive,
inadvertent operation of other drives that share the
same I/O Common connection may occur.
Remote Potentiometer Optional Ground Connection
12 13 14 13 14 13 14
Start and Speed Reference
Control
Start Source and Speed Reference Selection
The start and drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different
sources. By default, start source is determined by P046 [Start Source 1] and drive
speed source is determined by P047 [Speed Reference1]. However, various inputs
can override this selection, See below for the override priority.
(1) [Start Source 2/3] and [Speed Reference2/3] can be selected by the control terminal block or communication commands.
(2) See Digital Input Selection for Start Source on page 47 for information on selecting the correct digital input.
Purge Input Enabled
AND Active
Jog Input Enabled
AND Active
Preset Inputs Active
[Speed Referencex]
= 11 or 12 (PIDx Output)
AND
[PID x Ref Sel]
= 7 (Preset Freq)
[Speed Reference3]
select
(1)
[Start Source 3]
select
(1)
[Start Source 2]
select
(1)
[Speed Reference2]
select
(1)
Drive stopped
(NOT running)
Drive will start and
run at Purge Speed.
Direction is always
FORWARD.
Drive will start and run at
Jog Speed.
Direction is from Terminal
Block REV terminal (03),
Comms,
OR
FWD/REV determined by
Jog FWD/Jog REV command.
Run as specifed by
[PIDx Output].
Start and Direction
commands come from
[Start Source x].
Run as specifed by
[Preset Freq x].
Start and Direction
commands come from
[Start Source x].
Run as specifed by
[Speed Reference3].
Run as specifed by
[Speed Reference2].
Run as specifed by
[Speed Reference1].
Start and Direction
command from
[Start Source 1].
Start and Direction
command from
[Start Source 3].
(2)
No
No
No
No
No
No No
No No
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Start and Direction
command from
[Start Source 2].
(2)
Yes
Digital Input Selection for Start Source
If P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x] has been set to 2, DigIn TermBlk, then
t062 and t063 [DigIn TermBlk xx] must be configured for 2-Wire or 3-Wire
control for the drive to function properly.
[Start Source x]
= 2 (DigIn TrmBlk)
[DigIn TermBlk
02/03] = 48/49/50/51
(2-Wire or
3-Wire)
Drive will not start.
Start and Direction
command from
Terminal Block.
[Start Source x]
Start and Direction
command from
[Start Source x].
No No
Yes Yes
Accel/Decel Selection
The Accel/Decel rate can be obtained by a variety of methods. The default rate is
determined by P041 [Accel Time 1] and P042 [Decel Time 1]. Alternative
Accel/Decel rates can be made through digital inputs, communications and/or
parameters. See below for the override priority.
Purge Input Enabled
AND Active
Terminal Block Jog
Input Enabled AND
Active
Input(s) is
programmed as
Acc/Dec
(2/3/4)
Is speed controlled
by [Preset Freq x]
Active
[Speed Referencex]
= Comms
Active
[Speed Referencex]
=13 (Step Logic)
(1)
Drive stopped
(NOT running)
Accel/Decel always
Accel/Decel 1.
Accel/Decel from
[Jog Acc/Dec].
Accel/Decel 2 is active
when input is selected
by Accel and Decel input.
Drive uses Accel 1
and Decel 1.
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Accel/Decel 1/2/3/4 is
selected by the default
[Preset Freq x] setting.
Accel/Decel 1 or 2 is
selected according
to Comms.
Accel/Decel 1/2/3/4 is
selected according to
Step Logic
Active [DigIn TermBlk xx]
=32 (Sync Enable)
[Sync Time] is used
for Accel/Decel rate
No
Yes
Traverse active if
[Max Traverse] > 0 Hz
Traverse Inc/Dec
is used for
Accel/Decel rate
No
Yes
CE Conformity
Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European Norm (EN)
standards published in the Official Journal of the European Communities.
PowerFlex 520-series drives comply with the EN standards listed below when
installed according to the installation instructions in this manual.
CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at:
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/.
Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)
EN 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-1:
Safety requirements Electrical, thermal and energy.
EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
EN 61800-3:2004 +A1:2012 Adjustable speed electrical power drive
systems - Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods
Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC)
EN ISO 13849-1:2008 Safety of machinery Safety related parts of
control systems -Part 1: General principles for design
EN 62061:2005 Safety of machinery Functional safety of safety-
related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems
EN 60204-1:2006 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of
machines - Part 1: General requirements
EN 61800-5-2:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems -
Part 5-2: Safety requirement Functional
Refer to Appendix G for installation consideration related to Machinery
Directive.
General Considerations
For CE compliance, drives must satisfy installation requirements related to
both EN 61800-5-1 and EN 61800-3 provided in this document.
PowerFlex 520-series drives must be installed in a pollution degree 1 or 2
environment to be compliant with the CE LV Directive. See Pollution
Degree Ratings According to EN 61800-5-1 on page 49 for descriptions of
each pollution degree rating.
Pollution Degree Ratings According to EN 61800-5-1
Pollution
Degree
Description
1 No pollution or only dry, non-conductive pollution occurs. The pollution has no influence.
2 Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary
conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected, when the drive is out of operation.
PowerFlex 520-series drives comply with the EMC requirements of EN
61800-3 when installed according to good EMC practices and the
instructions provided in this document. However, many factors can
influence the EMC compliance of an entire machine or installation, and
compliance of the drive itself does not ensure compliance of all
applications.
PowerFlex 520-series drives are not intended to be used on public low-
voltage networks which supply domestic premises. Without additional
mitigation, radio frequency interference is expected if used on such a
network. The installer is responsible for taking measures such as a
supplementary line filter and enclosure (see Connections and Grounding
on page 52) to prevent interference, in addition to the installation
requirements of this document.
PowerFlex 520-series drives generate harmonic current emissions on the
AC supply system. When operated on a public low-voltage network it is
the responsibility of the installer or user to ensure that applicable
requirements of the distribution network operator have been met.
Consultation with the network operator and Rockwell Automation may
be necessary.
If the optional NEMA 1 kit is not installed, the drive must be installed in
an enclosure with side openings less than 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) and top
openings less than 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) to maintain compliance with the LV
Directive.
The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid
electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents.
Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended.
In CE installations, input power must be a Balanced Wye with Center
Ground configuration for EMC compliance.
Installation Requirements Related to EN 61800-5-1 and the Low Voltage Directive
600V PowerFlex 520-series drives can only be used on a center grounded
supply system for altitudes up to and including 2000 m (6562 ft).
When used at altitudes above 2000 m (6562 ft) up to a maximum of
4800 m (15,748 ft), PowerFlex 520-series drives of voltage classes up to
480V may not be powered from a corner-earthed supply system in order
to maintain compliance with the CE LV Directive. See Derating
Guidelines for High Altitude on page 18.
ATTENTION: NEMA/UL Open Type drives must either be installed in a
supplementary enclosure or equipped with a NEMA Type 1 Kit to be
CE compliant with respect to protection against electrical shock.
PowerFlex 520-series drives produce leakage current in the protective
earthing conductor which exceeds 3.5 mA AC and/or 10 mA DC. The
minimum size of the protective earthing (grounding) conductor used in
the application must comply with local safety regulations for high
protective earthing conductor current equipment.
Installation Requirements Related to EN 61800-3 and the EMC Directive
The drive must be earthed (grounded) as described in Connections and
Grounding on page 52. See General Grounding Requirements on page 20
for additional grounding recommendations.
Output power wiring to the motor must employ cables with a braided
shield providing 75% or greater coverage, or the cables must be housed in
metal conduit, or equivalent shield must be provided. Continuous
shielding must be provided from the drive enclosure to the motor
enclosure. Both ends of the motor cable shield (or conduit) must terminate
with a low-impedance connection to earth.
Drive Frames A...E: At the drive end of the motor, either
a. The cable shield must be clamped to a properly installed EMC Plate
for the drive. Kit number 25-EMC1-Fx.
or
b. The cable shield or conduit must terminate in a shielded connector
installed in an EMC plate, conduit box, or similar.
At the motor end, the motor cable shield or conduit must terminate in a
shielded connector which must be properly installed in an earthed motor
wiring box attached to the motor. The motor wiring box cover must be
installed and earthed.
All control (I/O) and signal wiring to the drive must use cable with a
braided shield providing 75% or greater coverage, or the cables must be
housed in metal conduit, or equivalent shielding must be provided. When
shielded cable is used, the cable shield should be terminated with a low
impedance connection to earth at only one end of the cable, preferably the
end where the receiver is located. When the cable shield is terminated at
the drive end, it may be terminated either by using a shielded connector in
conjunction with a conduit plate or conduit box, or the shield may be
clamped to an EMC plate.
Motor cabling must be separated from control and signal wiring wherever
possible.
ATTENTION: PowerFlex 520-series drives produce DC current in the
protective earthing conductor which may reduce the ability of RCDs
(residual current-operated protective devices) or RCMs (residual
current-operated monitoring devices) of type A or AC to provide
protection for other equipment in the installation. Where an RCD or
RCM is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only an
RCD or RCM of Type B is allowed on the supply side of this product.
Maximum motor cable length must not exceed the maximum length
indicated in PowerFlex 520-Series RF Emission Compliance and
Installation Requirements on page 52 for compliance with radio frequency
emission limits for the specific standard and installation environment.
Connections and Grounding
(1) Some installations require a shielded enclosure. Keep wire length as short as possible between the enclosure entry point and the
EMI filter.
Additional Installation Requirements
This section provides information on additional requirements for Class C1 and
C2 installation, such as enclosures and EMC cores.
PowerFlex 520-Series RF Emission Compliance and Installation Requirements
Filter Type Standard/Limits
EN61800-3 Category C1
EN61000-6-3
CISPR11 Group 1 Class B
EN61000-6-4
CISPR11 Group 1 Class A
(Input power 20 kVA)
(I 100 A)
CISPR11 Group 1 Class A
(Input power > 20 kVA)
Internal 10 m (33 ft) 20 m (66 ft)
External
(1)
(1) See Appendix B for more information on optional external filters.
30 m (16 ft) 100 m (328 ft) 100 m (328 ft)
IMPORTANT EMC cores are included with:
drives that have an internal EMC filter (25x-xxxxN114)
external EMC filter accessory kit (25-RFxxx)
IMPORTANT An enclosure, shielded input cable, and EMC cores are not required to meet
class C3 requirements.
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
EMI fttings and metal conduit
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1
option kit or EMC kit
Shielded enclosure
(1)
Building structure steel
Enclosure ground connection
EMI flter
L1'
L2'
L3'
L1
L2
L3
Shielded motor cable
Additional Installation Requirements
Frame
Size
Class C1 Class C2
Enclosure Conduit or Shielded
Cable @ Input
EMC Cores Required
(Included with product)
Enclosure Conduit or Shielded
Cable @ Input
EMC Cores Required
(Included with product)
100...120V AC (-15%, +10%) 1-Phase Input with External EMC Filter, 0...120V 1-Phase Output
A No No No No No No
B No No No No No No
A Yes Yes No No No Input/Output
B Yes Yes Output only No No Input/Output
200...240V AC (-15%, +10%) 1-Phase Input with Internal EMC Filter, 0...230V 3-Phase Output
(1)
A * * * Yes No No
B * * * Yes No No
A Yes Yes Output only No No Input/Output
B Yes Yes Output only No No Input/Output
C Yes Yes Output only No No Input/Output
D Yes Yes No No No Input only
E Yes Yes Output only No No Input only
B Yes Yes No No No Input/Output
C Yes Yes No No No Input only
D Yes Yes Output only No No Input/Output
E Yes Yes No Yes No Input/Output
380...480V AC (-15%, +10%) 3-Phase Input with Internal EMC Filter, 0...460V 3-Phase Output
(1)
A * * * No No Input/Output
B * * * No No Input/Output
C * * * No No Input/Output
D * * * No No Input/Output
E * * * No No Input/Output
B Yes Yes No No No Input/Output
C Yes Yes No No No Input/Output
D Yes Yes No No No Input/Output
E Yes Yes No Yes No No
(1) An (*) indicates that EMC requirements are not met.
Recommended Placement of EMC Cores
Frame A Frame B Frame C Frame D Frame E
With optional EMC plate (25-EMC-Fx)

Without EMC plate
CORE-xx-A-1
CORE-xx-A-2
CORE-xx-B-1
CORE-xx-B-2
CORE-xx-C-1
CORE-xx-C-2
CORE-xx-D-1
CORE-xx-D-2
CORE-E-1
CORE-E-2
CORE-E-3
CORE-E-4
Ground
cable
CORE-xx-x-1 CORE-xx-x-2
CORE-E-1
CORE-E-2
CORE-E-3
CORE-E-4
Ground
cable
Shows contact to
shielded layer
Secure EMC core by
using cable/zip ties
Output cable from drive (Shielded) Input cable to drive (Shielded or Unshielded)
IMPORTANT The ground cable/shield for both input and output must pass through the EMC core(s), except for the following:
Frame E drives with internal filters where the grounded input cable must not pass through EMC CORE-E-1.
600V drives with external filters where the grounded output cable must not pass through the EMC core(s).
Recommended Placement of EMC Cores Relative to External Filter
Input core Output core
Incoming power
EMC Filter Drive Motor
All Frame sizes
Chapter 2
Start Up
This chapter describes how to start up the PowerFlex 520-series drive. To simplify
drive setup, the most commonly programmed parameters are organized in a
single Basic Program Group.
Prepare for Drive Start-Up
Drive Startup Task List
1. Disconnect and lock out power to the machine.
2. Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value
of the drive.
3. If replacing a drive, verify the current drives catalog number. Verify all
options installed on the drive.
4. Verify that any digital control power is 24 volts.
5. Inspect grounding, wiring, connections, and environmental compatibility.
Prepare for Drive Start-Up 55
Display and Control Keys 58
Viewing and Editing Parameters 59
Drive Programming Tools 60
Smart Start-Up with Basic Program Group Parameters 61
LCD Display with QuickView 63
Using the USB Port 63
IMPORTANT Read the General Precautions section before proceeding.
ATTENTION: Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following
start-up procedures. Some of the voltages present are at incoming line
potential. To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment, only
qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure.
Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning. If an event
does not occur while performing this procedure, Do Not Proceed. Remove All
Power including user supplied control voltages. User supplied voltages may
exist even when main AC power is not applied to the drive. Correct the
malfunction before continuing.
Chapter 2 Start Up
6. Verify that the Sink (SNK)/Source (SRC) jumper is set to match your
control wiring scheme. See the PowerFlex 523 Control I/O Wiring Block
Diagram on page 37 and PowerFlex 525 Control I/O Wiring Block
Diagram on page 39 for location.
7. Wire I/O as required for the application.
8. Wire the power input and output terminals.
9. Confirm that all inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are
secure.
10. Collect and record motor nameplate and encoder or feedback device
information. Verify motor connections.
Is the motor uncoupled?
What direction will the motor need to turn for the application?
11. Verify the input voltage to the drive. Verify if the drive is on a grounded
system. Ensure the MOV jumpers are in the correct position. See AC
Supply Source Considerations on page 19 for more information.
12. Apply power and reset the drive and communication adapters to factory
default settings. To reset the drive, see parameter P053 [Reset to Defalts].
To reset the communication adapters, see the user manual of the adapter
for more information.
13. Configure the basic program parameters related to the motor. See Smart
Start-Up with Basic Program Group Parameters on page 61.
14. Complete the autotune procedure for the drive. See parameter P040
[Autotune] for more information.
15. If you are replacing a drive and have a backup of the parameter settings
obtained using the USB utility application, use the USB utility application
to apply the backup to the new drive. See Using the USB Port on page 63
for more information.
Otherwise, set the necessary parameters for your application using the
LCD keypad interface, Connected Components Workbench, or RSLogix
or Logix Designer if using an Add-on Profile through EtherNet/IP.
Configure the communication parameters needed for the application
(node number, IP address, Datalinks in and out, communication rate,
speed reference, start source, and so on). Record these settings for your
reference.
Configure the other drive parameters needed for the drive analog and
digital I/O to work correctly. Verify the operation. Record these
settings for your reference.
IMPORTANT The default control scheme is Source (SRC). The Stop terminal is jumpered to
allow starting from the keypad or comms. If the control scheme is changed to
Sink (SNK), the jumper must be removed from I/O Terminals 01 and 11 and
installed between I/O Terminals 01 and 04.
Start Up Chapter 2
16. Verify the drive and motor perform as specified.
Verify that the Stop input is present or the drive will not start.
Verify the drive is receiving the speed reference from the correct place
and that the reference is scaled correctly.
Verify the drive is receiving start and stop commands correctly.
Verify input currents are balanced.
Verify motor currents are balanced.
17. Save a backup of the drive settings using the USB utility application. See
Using the USB Port on page 63 for more information.
Start, Stop, Direction and Speed Control
Factory default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the
keypad. No programming is required to start, stop, change direction and control
speed directly from the keypad.
If a fault appears on power up, see Fault Descriptions on page 147 for an
explanation of the fault code.
Variable Torque Fan/Pump Applications
For improved motor tuning performance when using a premium efficient motor
on a variable torque loading SVC mode, set A530 [Boost Select] to 2 35.0, VT.
IMPORTANT If I/O Terminal 01 is used as a stop input, the jumper between I/O
Terminals 01 and 11 must be removed.
IMPORTANT To disable reverse operation, see A544 [Reverse Disable].
Chapter 2 Start Up
Display and Control Keys
Control and Navigation Keys
Display Display State Description
ENET (PowerFlex 525 only) Off Adapter is not connected to the network.
Steady Adapter is connected to the network and drive is controlled
through Ethernet.
Flashing Adapter is connected to the network but drive is not controlled
through Ethernet.
LINK (PowerFlex 525 only) Off Adapter is not connected to the network.
Steady Adapter is connected to the network but not transmitting data.
Flashing Adapter is connected to the network and transmitting data.
LED LED State Description
FAULT Flashing Red Indicates drive is faulted.
Key Name Description
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Scroll through user-selectable display parameters or groups.
Increment values.
Escape Back one step in programming menu.
Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program Mode.
Select Advance one step in programming menu.
Select a digit when viewing parameter value.
Enter Advance one step in programming menu.
Save a change to a parameter value.
FWD
FWD
ENET LINK
EtherNet/IP
Menu Parameter Group and Description
Basic Display
Commonly viewed drive operating conditions.
Basic Program
Commonly used programmable functions.
Terminal Blocks
Programmable terminal functions.
Communications
Programmable communication functions.
Logic (PowerFlex 525 only)
Programmable logic functions.
Advanced Display
Advanced drive operating conditions.
Advanced Program
Remaining programmable functions.
Network
Network functions that are shown only when a comm
card is used.
Modified
Functions from the other groups with values changed
from default.
Fault and Diagnostic
Consists of list of codes for specific fault conditions.
AppView and CustomView
Functions from the other groups organized for specific
applications.
PowerFlex 523
PowerFlex 525
Start Up Chapter 2
Viewing and Editing
Parameters
The following is an example of basic integral keypad and display functions. This
example provides basic navigation instructions and illustrates how to program
a parameter.
Reverse Used to reverse direction of the drive. Default is active.
Controlled by parameters P046, P048 and P050 [Start Source x]
and A544 [Reverse Disable].
Start Used to start the drive. Default is active.
Controlled by parameters P046, P048 and P050 [Start Source x].
Stop Used to stop the drive or clear a fault.
This key is always active.
Controlled by parameter P045 [Stop Mode].
Potentiometer Used to control speed of drive. Default is active.
Controlled by parameters P047, P049 and P051
[Speed Referencex].
Key Name Description
Step Key(s) Example Display
1. When power is applied, the last user-selected
Basic Display Group parameter number is briefly
displayed with flashing characters. The display
then defaults to that parameters current value.
(Example shows the value of b001 [Output
Freq] with the drive stopped.)
2. Press Esc to display the Basic Display Group
parameter number shown on power-up. The
parameter number will flash.
3. Press Esc to enter the parameter group list. The
parameter group letter will flash.
4. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll
through the group list (b, P, t, C, L, d, A, f and
Gx).
5. Press Enter or Sel to enter a group. The right
digit of the last viewed parameter in that group
will flash.
through the parameter list.
7. Press Enter to view the value of the parameter.
Or
Press Esc to return to the parameter list.
8. Press Enter or Sel to enter Program Mode and
edit the value. The right digit will flash and the
word Program on the LCD display will light up.
9. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to change
the parameter value.
HERTZ
FWD
FWD
FWD
or
FWD
or
FWD
or
FWD
VOLTS
FWD
or
PROGRAM
VOLTS
FWD
or
PROGRAM
VOLTS
FWD
Chapter 2 Start Up
Drive Programming Tools
Some features in the PowerFlex 520-series drive are not supported by older
configuration software tools. It is strongly recommended that customers using
such tools migrate to RSLogix 5000 (version 17.0 or greater) or Logix Designer
(version 21.0 or greater) with Add-On-Profile (AOP), or Connected
Components Workbench (version 5.0 or greater) to enjoy a richer, full-featured
configuration experience. For Automatic Device Configuration (ADC) support,
RSLogix 5000 version 20.0 or greater is required.
Language Support
10. If desired, press Sel to move from digit to digit
or bit to bit. The digit or bit that you can change
will flash.
11. Press Esc to cancel a change and exit Program
Mode.
Or
Press Enter to save a change and exit Program
Mode.
The digit will stop flashing and the word
Program on the LCD display will turn off.
12. Press Esc to return to the parameter list.
Continue to press Esc to back out of the
programming menu.
If pressing Esc does not change the display, then
b001 [Output Freq] is displayed. Press Enter or
Sel to enter the group list again.
Step Key(s) Example Display
PROGRAM
VOLTS
FWD
or
VOLTS
FWD
VOLTS
FWD
or
FWD
Description Catalog Number/Release Version
Connected Components Workbench
(1)
(1) Available as a free download at http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/programmable-controllers/connected-components-
workbench-software.
Version 5.0 or greater
Logix Designer Version 21.0 or greater
RSLogix 5000 Version 17.0 or greater
Built-in USB software tool
Serial Converter Module
(2)
(2) Does not support the new dynamic parameter groups (AppView, CustomView), and CopyCat functionality is limited to the linear
parameter list.
22-SCM-232
USB Converter Module
(2)
1203-USB
Remote Panel Mount, LCD Display
(2)
22-HIM-C2S
Remote Handheld, LCD Display
(2)
22-HIM-A3
Language Keypad/LCD Display RSLogix 5000/
Logix Designer
Connected Components
Workbench
English Y Y Y
French Y Y Y
Spanish Y Y Y
Italian Y Y Y
German Y Y Y
Japanese Y
Portuguese Y Y
Chinese Simplified Y Y
Korean Y
Start Up Chapter 2
Smart Start-Up with Basic
Program Group Parameters
The PowerFlex 520-series drive is designed so that start up is simple and efficient.
The Basic Program Group contains the most commonly used parameters. See
Programming and Parameters on page 65 for detailed descriptions of the
parameters listed here, as well as the full list of available parameters.
Polish
(1)
Y
Turkish
(1)
Y
Czech
(1)
Y
(1) Due to a limitation of the LCD Display, some of the characters for Polish, Turkish, and Czech will be modified.
Language Keypad/LCD Display RSLogix 5000/
Logix Designer
Workbench
= Stop drive before changing this parameter.
= Parameter is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
No. Parameter Min/Max Display/Options Default
P030 [Language] 1/15 1 = English
2 = Franais
3 = Espaol
4 = Italiano
5 = Deutsch
6 = Reserved
7 = Portugus
8 = Reserved
9 = Reserved
10 = Reserved
11 = Reserved
12 = Polish
13 = Reserved
14 = Turkish
15 = Czech
1
Selects the language displayed.
Important: The setting takes effect after the drive
is power cycled.
P031 [Motor NP Volts] 10V (for 200V Drives), 20V
(for 400V Drives), 25V (for
600V Drives)/Drive Rated
Volts
1V Based on Drive Rating
Sets the motor nameplate rated volts.
P032 [Motor NP Hertz] 15/500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz
Sets the motor nameplate rated frequency.
P033 [Motor OL Current] 0.0/(Drive Rated Amps x 2) 0.1 A Based on Drive Rating
Sets the motor nameplate overload current.
P034 [Motor NP FLA] 0.0/(Drive Rated Amps x 2) 0.1 A Drive Rated Amps
Sets the motor nameplate FLA.
P035 [Motor NP Poles] 2/40 1 4
Sets the number of poles in the motor.
P036 [Motor NP RPM] 0/24000 rpm 1 rpm 1750 rpm
Sets the rated nameplate rpm of motor.
P037 [Motor NP Power] 0.00/Drive Rated Power 0.01 kW Drive Rated Power
Sets the motor nameplate power. Used in PM
regulator.
P038 [Voltage Class] 2/3 2 = 480V
3 = 600V
3
Sets the voltage class of 600V drives. Only applicable
to 600V drives.
P039 [Torque Perf Mode] 0/3 0 = V/Hz
1 = SVC
2 = Economize
3 = Vector
(1)
1
Selects the motor control mode.
PF 525
PF 525
Chapter 2 Start Up
P040 [Autotune] 0/2 0 = Ready/Idle
1 = Static Tune
2 = Rotate Tune
0
Enables a static (not spinning) or dynamic (motor
spinning) autotune.
P041 [Accel Time 1] 0.00/600.00 s 0.01 s 10.00 s
Sets the time for the drive to accel from 0 Hz to
[Maximum Freq].
P042 [Decel Time 1] 0.00/600.00 s 0.01 s 10.00 s
Sets the time for the drive to decel from [Maximum
Freq] to 0 Hz.
P043 [Minimum Freq] 0.00/500.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz
Sets the lowest frequency the drive outputs.
P044 [Maximum Freq] 0.00/500.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 60.00 Hz
Sets the highest frequency the drive outputs.
P045 [Stop Mode] 0/11 0 = Ramp, CF
(1)
1 = Coast, CF
(1)
2 = DC Brake, CF
(1)
3 = DCBrkAuto,CF
(1)
4 = Ramp
5 = Coast
6 = DC Brake
7 = DC BrakeAuto
8 = Ramp+EM B,CF
(1)
9 = Ramp+EM Brk
10 = PointStp,CF
(1)
11 = PointStop
0
Stop command for normal stop.
Important: I/O Terminal 01 is always a stop input.
The stopping mode is determined by the drive
setting.
Important: The drive is shipped with a jumper
installed between I/O Terminals 01 and 11. Remove
this jumper when using I/O Terminal 01 as a stop or
enable input.
(1) Stop input also clears active fault.
P046,
P048,
P050
[Start Source 1] 1/5 1 = Keypad
(1)
2 = DigIn TrmBlk
(2)
3 = Serial/DSI
4 = Network Opt
5 = Ethernet/IP
(3)
P046 = 1
P048 = 2
P050 = 3 (PowerFlex 523)
5 (PowerFlex 525)
Sets the default control scheme used to start the
drive unless overriden by P048 [Start Source 2] or
P050 [Start Source 3].
(1) When active, the Reverse key is also active unless
disabled by A544 [Reverse Disable].
(2) If DigIn TrmBlk is selected, ensure that the digital
inputs are properly configured.
P047,
P049,
P051
[Speed Reference1] 1/16 1 = Drive Pot
2 = Keypad Freq
3 = Serial/DSI
4 = Network Opt
5 = 0-10V Input
6 = 4-20mA Input
7 = Preset Freq
8 = Anlg In Mult
(1)
9 = MOP
10 = Pulse Input
11 = PID1 Output
12 = PID2 Output
(1)
13 = Step Logic
(1)
14 = Encoder
(1)
15 = Ethernet/IP
(1)
16 = Positioning
(1)
P047 = 1
P049 = 5
P051 = 3 (PowerFlex 523)
15 (PowerFlex 525)
Sets the default speed command of the drive unless
overridden by P049 [Speed Reference2] or P051
[Speed Reference3].
P052 [Average kWh Cost] 0.00/655.35 0.01 0.00
Sets the average cost per kWh.
P053 [Reset To Defalts] 0/3 0 = Ready/Idle
1 = Param Reset
2 = Factory Rset
3 = Power Reset
0
Resets parameters to their factory defaults values.
After a Reset command, the value of this parameter
returns to zero.
= Stop drive before changing this parameter.
= Parameter is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
No. Parameter Min/Max Display/Options Default
PF 525
Start Up Chapter 2
LCD Display with QuickView
QuickView enables text to scroll across the LCD display of the PowerFlex 520-
series drive. This allows you to easily configure parameters, troubleshoot faults
and view diagnostic items without using a separate device.
Use parameter A556 [Text Scroll] to set the speed at which the text scrolls across
the display. Select 0 Off to turn off text scrolling. See Language Support on
page 60 for the languages supported by the PowerFlex 520-series drive.
Using the USB Port
The PowerFlex 520-series drive has a USB port that connects to a PC for the
purpose of upgrading drive firmware or uploading/downloading a parameter
configuration.
MainsFree Programming
The MainsFree programming feature allows you to quickly configure your
PowerFlex 520-series drive without having to power up the control module or
install additional software. Simply connect the control module to your PC with a
USB Type B cable and you can download a parameter configuration to your
drive. You can also easily upgrade your drive with the latest firmware.
Connecting a PowerFlex 520-series drive to a PC
When connected, the drive appears on the PC and contains two files:
GUIDE.PDF
This file contains links to relevant product documentation and software
downloads.
PF52XUSB.EXE
This file is an application to flash upgrade firmware or upload/download a
parameter configuration.
It is not possible to delete these files or add more to the drive.
IMPORTANT To use the USB feature of the PowerFlex 520-series drive, Microsoft .Net
Framework 2.0 and Windows XP or later is required.
USB port
Control Module
USB Type B cable
Connect to Control Module Connect to PC
Chapter 2 Start Up
Double-click on the PF52XUSB.EXE file to launch the USB utility application.
The main menu is displayed. Follow the program instructions to upgrade the
firmware or upload/download configuration data.
Limitation in Downloading .pf5 Configuration Files with the USB
Utility Application
Before downloading a .pf5 configuration file using the USB utility application,
parameter C169 [MultiDrv Sel] in the destination drive must match the
incoming configuration file. If it does not, set the parameter manually to match
and then cycle drive power.
This means you cannot apply a multi-drive configuration using the USB utility
application to a drive in single mode (parameter C169 [MultiDrv Sel] set to 0
Disabled), or apply a single mode configuration to a drive in multi-drive mode.
IMPORTANT Make sure your PC is powered by an AC power outlet or has a fully charged
battery before starting any operation. This prevents the operation from
terminating before completion due to insufficient power.
Chapter 3
Programming and Parameters
This chapter provides a complete listing and description of the PowerFlex 520-
series drive parameters. Parameters are programmed (viewed/edited) using either
the drives built-in keypad, RSLogix 5000 version 17.0 or greater, Logix Designer
version 21.0 or greater, or Connected Components Workbench version 5.0 or
greater software. The Connected Components Workbench software can be used
offline (through USB) to upload parameter configurations to the drive or online
(through Ethernet connection).
Limited functionality is also available when using the Connected Components
Workbench software online (through DSI and serial converter module), a legacy
external HIM, or legacy software online (DriveTools SP). When using these
methods, the parameter list can only be displayed linearly, and there is no access
to communications option card programming.
About Parameters
To configure a drive to operate in a specific way, drive parameters may have to be
set. Three types of parameters exist:
ENUM
ENUM parameters allow a selection from 2 or more items. Each item is
represented by a number.
Numeric Parameters
These parameters have a single numerical value (0.1V).
About Parameters 65
Parameter Groups 66
Basic Display Group 71
Basic Program Group 76
Terminal Block Group 82
Communications Group 94
Logic Group 100
Advanced Display Group 103
Advanced Program Group 107
Network Parameter Group 130
Modified Parameter Group 130
Fault and Diagnostic Group 130
AppView Parameter Groups 138
CustomView Parameter Group 139
Parameter Cross Reference by Name 140
Chapter 3 Programming and Parameters
Bit Parameters
Bit parameters have five individual digits associated with features or
conditions. If the digit is 0, the feature is off or the condition is false. If the
digit is 1, the feature is on or the condition is true.
Some parameters are marked as follows.
Parameter Groups
For an alphabetical listing of parameters, see Parameter Cross Reference by Name
on page 140.
=Stop drive before changing this parameter.
=32 bit parameter. Parameters marked 32 bit will have two parameter numbers ([Step Units x] and
[Step Units F x]) when using RS485 communications and programming software. The second parameter
number is shown only in the Parameter Groups and Parameter Cross Reference by Name tables for reference.
=Parameter is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
32
PF 525
Basic Display
Output Freq b001
Commanded Freq b002
Output Current b003
Output Voltage b004
DC Bus Voltage b005
Drive Status b006
Fault 1 Code b007
Fault 2 Code b008
Fault 3 Code b009
Process Display b010
Control Source b012
Contrl In Status b013
Dig In Status b014
Output RPM b015
Output Speed b016
Output Power b017
Power Saved b018
Elapsed Run Time b019
Average Power b020
Elapsed kWh b021
Elapsed MWh b022
Energy Saved b023
Accum kWh Sav b024
Accum Cost Sav b025
Accum CO2 Sav b026
Drive Temp b027
Control Temp b028
Control SW Ver b029
Basic Program
Language P030
Motor NP Volts P031
Motor NP Hertz P032
Motor OL Current P033
Motor NP FLA P034
Motor NP Poles P035
Motor NP RPM P036
Motor NP Power P037
Voltage Class P038
Torque Perf Mode P039
Autotune P040
Accel Time 1 P041
Decel Time 1 P042
Minimum Freq P043
Maximum Freq P044
Stop Mode P045
Start Source 1 P046
Speed Reference1 P047
Start Source 2 P048
Start Source 3 P050
Average kWh Cost P052
Reset To Defalts P053
Terminal Blocks
DigIn TermBlk 02 t062
2-Wire Mode t064
DigIn TermBlk 07
(1)
t067
DigIn TermBlk 08
(1)
t068
Opto Out1 Sel
(1)
t069
Opto Out1 Level
(1)
t070
Opto Out2 Sel
(1)
t072
Opto Out2 Level
(1)
t073
Opto Out Logic
(1)
t075
Relay Out1 Sel t076
Relay Out1 Level t077
Relay 1 On Time t079
Relay 1 Off Time t080
Relay Out2 Sel
(1)
t081
Relay Out2 Level
(1)
t082
Relay 2 On Time
(1)
t084
Relay 2 Off Time
(1)
t085
EM Brk Off Delay t086
EM Brk On Delay t087
Analog Out Sel
(1)
t088
Analog Out High
(1)
t089
Anlg Out Setpt
(1)
t090
Anlg In 0-10V Lo t091
Anlg In 0-10V Hi t092
10V Bipolar Enbl
(1)
t093
Anlg In V Loss t094
Anlg In4-20mA Lo t095
Anlg In4-20mA Hi t096
Anlg In mA Loss t097
Anlg Loss Delay t098
Analog In Filter t099
Sleep-Wake Sel t100
Sleep Level t101
Sleep Time t102
Wake Level t103
Wake Time t104
Safety Open En
(1)
t105
Communications
Comm Write Mode C121
Cmd Stat Select
(1)
C122
RS485 Data Rate C123
RS485 Node Addr C124
Comm Loss Action C125
Comm Loss Time C126
RS485 Format C127
EN Addr Sel
(1)
C128
EN IP Addr Cfg 1
(1)
C129
EN IP Addr Cfg 2
(1)
C130
EN IP Addr Cfg 3
(1)
C131
EN IP Addr Cfg 4
(1)
C132
EN Subnet Cfg 1
(1)
C133
EN Subnet Cfg 2
(1)
C134
EN Subnet Cfg 3
(1)
C135
EN Subnet Cfg 4
(1)
C136
EN Gateway Cfg 1
(1)
C137
EN Gateway Cfg 2
(1)
C138
EN Gateway Cfg 3
(1)
C139
EN Gateway Cfg 4
(1)
C140
EN Rate Cfg
(1)
C141
EN Comm Flt Actn
(1)
C143
EN Idle Flt Actn
(1)
C144
EN Flt Cfg Logic
(1)
C145
EN Flt Cfg Ref
(1)
C146
EN Flt Cfg DL 1
(1)
C147
EN Flt Cfg DL 2
(1)
C148
EN Flt Cfg DL 3
(1)
C149
EN Flt Cfg DL 4
(1)
C150
EN Data In 1
(1)
C153
EN Data In 2
(1)
C154
EN Data In 3
(1)
C155
EN Data In 4
(1)
C156
EN Data Out 1
(1)
C157
EN Data Out 2
(1)
C158
EN Data Out 3
(1)
C159
EN Data Out 4
(1)
C160
Opt Data In 1 C161
Opt Data In 2 C162
Opt Data In 3 C163
Opt Data In 4 C164
Opt Data Out 1 C165
Opt Data Out 2 C166
Opt Data Out 3 C167
Opt Data Out 4 C168
MultiDrv Sel C169
Drv 1 Addr C171
Drv 2 Addr C172
Drv 3 Addr C173
Drv 4 Addr C174
DSI I/O Cfg C175
(1) Parameter is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
Programming and Parameters Chapter 3
Logic
(1)
Stp Logic 0 L180
Stp Logic 1 L181
Stp Logic 2 L182
Stp Logic 3 L183
Stp Logic 4 L184
Stp Logic 5 L185
Stp Logic 6 L186
Stp Logic 7 L187
Stp Logic Time 0 L190
Step Units 0 L200
Step Units 1 L202
Step Units 2 L204
Step Units 3 L206
Step Units 4 L208
Step Units 5 L210
Step Units 6 L212
Step Units 7 L214
Advanced Display
Analog In 0-10V d360
Analog In 4-20mA d361
Elapsed Time-hr d362
Elapsed Time-min d363
Counter Status d364
Timer Status d365
Drive Type d367
Testpoint Data d368
Motor OL Level d369
Slip Hz Meter d375
Speed Feedback d376
Encoder Speed
(1)
d378
DC Bus Ripple d380
Output Powr Fctr d381
Torque Current d382
PID1 Fdbk Displ d383
PID1 Setpnt Disp d384
PID2 Fdbk Displ d385
PID2 Setpnt Disp d386
Position Status d387
Units Traveled H
(1)
d388
Units Traveled L
(1)
d389
Fiber Status d390
Stp Logic Status
(1)
d391
RdyBit Mode Act
(1)
d392
Advanced Program
Preset Freq 0 A410
Preset Freq 1 A411
Preset Freq 2 A412
Preset Freq 3 A413
Preset Freq 4 A414
Preset Freq 5 A415
Preset Freq 6 A416
Preset Freq 7 A417
Preset Freq 8
(1)
A418
Preset Freq 9
(1)
A419
Preset Freq 10
(1)
A420
Preset Freq 11
(1)
A421
Preset Freq 12
(1)
A422
Preset Freq 13
(1)
A423
Preset Freq 14
(1)
A424
Preset Freq 15
(1)
A425
Keypad Freq A426
MOP Freq A427
MOP Reset Sel A428
MOP Preload A429
MOP Time A430
Jog Frequency A431
Jog Accel/Decel A432
Purge Frequency A433
DC Brake Time A434
DC Brake Level A435
DC Brk Time@Strt A436
DB Resistor Sel A437
DB Threshold A438
S Curve % A439
PWM Frequency A440
Droop Hertz@ FLA
(1)
A441
Accel Time 2 A442
Decel Time 2 A443
Accel Time 3 A444
Decel Time 3 A445
Accel Time 4 A446
Decel Time 4 A447
Skip Frequency 1 A448
Skip Freq Band 1 A449
Skip Frequency 2 A450
Skip Freq Band 2 A451
Skip Frequency 3
(1)
A452
Skip Freq Band 3
(1)
A453
Skip Frequency 4
(1)
A454
Skip Freq Band 4
(1)
A455
PID 1 Trim Hi A456
PID 1 Trim Lo A457
PID 1 Trim Sel A458
PID 1 Ref Sel A459
PID 1 Fdback Sel A460
PID 1 Prop Gain A461
PID 1 Integ Time A462
PID 1 Diff Rate A463
PID 1 Setpoint A464
PID 1 Deadband A465
PID 1 Preload A466
PID 1 Invert Err A467
PID 2 Trim Hi
(1)
A468
PID 2 Trim Lo
(1)
A469
PID 2 Trim Sel
(1)
A470
PID 2 Ref Sel
(1)
A471
PID 2 Fdback Sel
(1)
A472
PID 2 Prop Gain
(1)
A473
PID 2 Integ Time
(1)
A474
PID 2 Diff Rate
(1)
A475
PID 2 Setpoint
(1)
A476
PID 2 Deadband
(1)
A477
PID 2 Preload
(1)
A478
PID 2 Invert Err
(1)
A479
Process Disp Lo A481
Process Disp Hi A482
Testpoint Sel A483
Current Limit 1 A484
Current Limit 2
(1)
A485
Shear Pin1 Level A486
Shear Pin 1 Time A487
Shear Pin2 Level
(1)
A488
Shear Pin 2 Time
(1)
A489
Load Loss Level
(1)
A490
Load Loss Time
(1)
A491
Stall Fault Time A492
Motor OL Select A493
Motor OL Ret A494
Drive OL Mode A495
IR Voltage Drop A496
Flux Current Ref A497
Motor Rr
(1)
A498
Motor Lm
(1)
A499
Motor Lx
(1)
A500
Speed Reg Sel A509
Freq 1 A510
Freq 1 BW A511
Freq 2 A512
Freq 2 BW A513
Freq 3 A514
Freq 3 BW A515
Freq 1 Kp A521
Freq 1 Ki A522
Freq 2 Kp A523
Freq 2 Ki A524
Freq 3 Kp A525
Freq 3 Ki A526
Boost Select A530
Start Boost A531
Break Voltage A532
Break Frequency A533
Maximum Voltage A534
Motor Fdbk Type
(1)
A535
Encoder PPR
(1)
A536
Pulse In Scale A537
Ki Speed Loop
(1)
A538
Kp Speed Loop
(1)
A539
Var PWM Disable A540
Auto Rstrt Tries A541
Auto Rstrt Delay A542
Start At PowerUp A543
Reverse Disable A544
Flying Start En A545
FlyStrt CurLimit A546
Compensation A547
Power Loss Mode A548
Half Bus Enable A549
Bus Reg Enable A550
Fault Clear A551
Program Lock A552
Program Lock Mod A553
Drv Ambient Sel A554
Reset Meters A555
Text Scroll A556
Out Phas Loss En A557
Positioning Mode
(1)
A558
Counts Per Unit
(1)
A559
Enh Control Word
(1)
A560
Home Save
(1)
A561
Find Home Freq
(1)
A562
Find Home Dir
(1)
A563
Encoder Pos Tol
(1)
A564
Pos Reg Filter
(1)
A565
Pos Reg Gain
(1)
A566
Max Traverse A567
Traverse Inc A568
Traverse Dec A569
P Jump A570
Sync Time A571
Speed Ratio A572
Mtr Options Cfg A573
RdyBit Mode Cfg
(1)
A574
Network
This group contains parameters for the network option card that is installed.
See the network option cards user manual for more information on the available parameters.
Modified
This group contains parameters that have their values changed from the factory default.
When a parameter has its default value changed, it is automatically added to this group. When a parameter has its value changed back to the
factory default, it is automatically removed from this group.
AppView Parameter Groups
PowerFlex 520-series drives include various AppView parameter groups that
groups certain parameters together for quick and easy access based on different
types of applications. See AppView Parameter Groups on page 138 for more
information.
Fault and Diagnostic
Fault 4 Code F604
Fault 5 Code F605
Fault 6 Code F606
Fault 7 Code F607
Fault 8 Code F608
Fault 9 Code F609
Fault10 Code F610
Fault 1 Time-hr F611
Fault 6 Time-hr
(1)
F616
Fault 7 Time-hr
(1)
F617
Fault 8 Time-hr
(1)
F618
Fault 9 Time-hr
(1)
F619
Fault10 Time-hr
(1)
F620
Fault 1 Time-min F621
Fault 6 Time-min
(1)
F626
Fault 7 Time-min
(1)
F627
Fault 8 Time-min
(1)
F628
Fault 9 Time-min
(1)
F629
Fault10 Time-min
(1)
F630
Fault 1 Freq F631
Fault 2 Freq F632
Fault 3 Freq F633
Fault 4 Freq F634
Fault 5 Freq F635
Fault 6 Freq
(1)
F636
Fault 7 Freq
(1)
F637
Fault 8 Freq
(1)
F638
Fault 9 Freq
(1)
F639
Fault10 Freq
(1)
F640
Fault 1 Current F641
Fault 6 Current
(1)
F646
Fault 7 Current
(1)
F647
Fault 8 Current
(1)
F648
Fault 9 Current
(1)
F649
Fault10 Current
(1)
F650
Fault 1 BusVolts F651
Fault 6 BusVolts
(1)
F656
Fault 7 BusVolts
(1)
F657
Fault 8 BusVolts
(1)
F658
Fault 9 BusVolts
(1)
F659
Fault10 BusVolts
(1)
F660
Status @ Fault 1 F661
Status @ Fault 6
(1)
F666
Status @ Fault 7
(1)
F667
Status @ Fault 8
(1)
F668
Status @ Fault 9
(1)
F669
Status @ Fault10
(1)
F670
Comm Sts - DSI F681
Comm Sts - Opt F682
Com Sts-Emb Enet
(1)
F683
EN Addr Src
(1)
F684
EN Rate Act
(1)
F685
DSI I/O Act F686
HW Addr 1
(1)
F687
HW Addr 2
(1)
F688
HW Addr 3
(1)
F689
HW Addr 4
(1)
F690
HW Addr 5
(1)
F691
HW Addr 6
(1)
F692
EN IP Addr Act 1
(1)
F693
EN IP Addr Act 2
(1)
F694
EN IP Addr Act 3
(1)
F695
EN IP Addr Act 4
(1)
F696
EN Subnet Act 1
(1)
F697
EN Subnet Act 2
(1)
F698
EN Subnet Act 3
(1)
F699
EN Subnet Act 4
(1)
F700
EN Gateway Act 1
(1)
F701
EN Gateway Act 2
(1)
F702
EN Gateway Act 3
(1)
F703
EN Gateway Act 4
(1)
F704
Drv 0 Logic Cmd F705
Drv 0 Reference F706
Drv 0 Logic Sts F707
Drv 0 Feedback F708
Drv 1 Feedback F712
Drv 2 Feedback F716
Drv 3 Feedback F720
Drv 4 Feedback F724
EN Rx Overruns
(1)
F725
EN Rx Packets
(1)
F726
EN Rx Errors
(1)
F727
EN Tx Packets
(1)
F728
EN Tx Errors
(1)
F729
EN Missed IO Pkt
(1)
F730
DSI Errors F731
Conveyor
Language P030
Output Freq b001
Commanded Freq b002
Motor NP Volts P031
Motor NP Hertz P032
Motor NP FLA P034
Motor NP Poles P035
Autotune P040
Accel Time 1 P041
Decel Time 1 P042
Minimum Freq P043
Maximum Freq P044
Stop Mode P045
Start Source 1 P046
Opto Out1 Sel t069
Relay Out1 Sel t076
Slip Hz Meter d375
Preset Freq 0 A410
Jog Frequency A431
S Curve % A439
Mixer
Language P030
Output Freq b001
Commanded Freq b002
Output Current b003
Motor NP Volts P031
Motor NP Hertz P032
Motor NP FLA P034
Motor NP Poles P035
Autotune P040
Accel Time 1 P041
Decel Time 1 P042
Minimum Freq P043
Maximum Freq P044
Stop Mode P045
Start Source 1 P046
Relay Out1 Sel t076
Preset Freq 0 A410
Compressor
Language P030
Output Freq b001
Commanded Freq b002
Motor NP Volts P031
Motor NP Hertz P032
Motor NP FLA P034
Motor NP Poles P035
Autotune P040
Accel Time 1 P041
Decel Time 1 P042
Minimum Freq P043
Maximum Freq P044
Stop Mode P045
Start Source 1 P046
Relay Out1 Sel t076
Analog Out Sel t088
Analog Out High t089
Anlg Out Setpt t090
Preset Freq 0 A410
Centrifugal Pump
Language P030
Output Freq b001
Commanded Freq b002
Motor NP Volts P031
Motor NP Hertz P032
Motor NP FLA P034
Motor NP Poles P035
Autotune P040
Accel Time 1 P041
Decel Time 1 P042
Minimum Freq P043
Maximum Freq P044
Stop Mode P045
Start Source 1 P046
Relay Out1 Sel t076
Analog Out Sel t088
Anlg Out Setpt t090
Preset Freq 0 A410
PID 1 Trim Hi A456
PID 1 Trim Lo A457
PID 1 Ref Sel A459
PID 1 Setpoint A464
PID 1 Deadband A465
PID 1 Preload A466
Blower/Fan
Language P030
Output Freq b001
Commanded Freq b002
Motor NP Volts P031
Motor NP Hertz P032
Motor NP FLA P034
Motor NP Poles P035
Autotune P040
Accel Time 1 P041
Decel Time 1 P042
Minimum Freq P043
Maximum Freq P044
Stop Mode P045
Start Source 1 P046
Relay Out1 Sel t076
Analog Out Sel t088
Anlg Out Setpt t090
Preset Freq 0 A410
PID 1 Trim Hi A456
PID 1 Trim Lo A457
PID 1 Ref Sel A459
PID 1 Setpoint A464
PID 1 Deadband A465
PID 1 Preload A466
Flying Start En A545
Extruder
Language P030
Output Freq b001
Commanded Freq b002
Output Current b003
Motor NP Volts P031
Motor NP Hertz P032
Motor NP FLA P034
Motor NP Poles P035
Autotune P040
Accel Time 1 P041
Decel Time 1 P042
Minimum Freq P043
Maximum Freq P044
Stop Mode P045
Start Source 1 P046
Relay Out1 Sel t076
Analog Out Sel t088
Anlg Out Setpt t090
Slip Hz Meter d375
Speed Feedback d376
Encoder Speed d378
Preset Freq 0 A410
Motor Fdbk Type A535
Encoder PPR A536
Pulse In Scale A537
Ki Speed Loop A538
Kp Speed Loop A539
Positioning
(1)
Language P030
Output Freq b001
Commanded Freq b002
Motor NP Volts P031
Motor NP Hertz P032
Motor NP FLA P034
Motor NP Poles P035
Autotune P040
Accel Time 1 P041
Decel Time 1 P042
Minimum Freq P043
Maximum Freq P044
Stop Mode P045
Start Source 1 P046
Opto Out1 Sel t069
Opto Out2 Sel t072
Relay Out1 Sel t076
EM Brk Off Delay t086
EM Brk On Delay t087
Stp Logic 0 L180
Stp Logic 1 L181
Stp Logic 2 L182
Stp Logic 3 L183
Stp Logic 4 L184
Stp Logic 5 L185
Stp Logic 6 L186
Stp Logic 7 L187
Step Units 0 L200
Step Units 1 L202
Step Units 2 L204
Step Units 3 L206
Step Units 4 L208
Step Units 5 L210
Step Units 6 L212
Step Units 7 L214
Slip Hz Meter d375
Speed Feedback d376
Encoder Speed d378
Units Traveled H d388
Units Traveled L d389
Preset Freq 0 A410
Preset Freq 1 A411
Preset Freq 2 A412
Preset Freq 3 A413
Preset Freq 4 A414
Preset Freq 5 A415
Preset Freq 6 A416
Preset Freq 7 A417
Preset Freq 8 A418
Jog Frequency A431
DB Threshold A438
S Curve % A439
Motor Fdbk Type A535
Encoder PPR A536
Pulse In Scale A537
Ki Speed Loop A538
Kp Speed Loop A539
Bus Reg Enable A550
Positioning Mode A558
Counts Per Unit A559
Enh Control Word A560
Find Home Freq A562
Find Home Dir A563
Encoder Pos Tol A564
Pos Reg Filter A565
Pos Reg Gain A566
Textile/Fiber
Language P030
Output Freq b001
Commanded Freq b002
Motor NP Volts P031
Motor NP Hertz P032
Motor NP FLA P034
Motor NP Poles P035
Autotune P040
Accel Time 1 P041
Decel Time 1 P042
Minimum Freq P043
Maximum Freq P044
Stop Mode P045
Start Source 1 P046
Opto Out1 Sel t069
Opto Out2 Sel t072
Relay Out1 Sel t076
Slip Hz Meter d375
Fiber Status d390
Preset Freq 0 A410
Jog Frequency A431
S Curve % A439
Bus Reg Enable A550
Max Traverse A567
Traverse Inc A568
Traverse Dec A569
P Jump A570
Sync Time A571
Speed Ratio A572
(1) This AppView parameter group is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
CustomView Parameter Group
PowerFlex 520-series drives include a CustomView parameter group for you to
store frequently used parameters for your application. See CustomView
Parameter Group on page 139 for more information.
Custom Group
This group can store up to 100 parameters.
Basic Display Group
b001 [Output Freq] Related Parameter(s): b002, b010, P043, P044, P048, P050, P052
Output frequency present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W). Does not include slip frequency.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0.00/[Maximum Freq]
Display: 0.01 Hz
b002 [Commanded Freq] Related Parameter(s): b001, b013, P043, P044, P048, P050, P052
Value of the active frequency command even if the drive is not running.
Display: 0.01 Hz
IMPORTANT The frequency command can come from a number of sources. See Start and Speed Reference Control on page 46 for more information.
b003 [Output Current]
Output current present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
Min/Max: 0.00/(Drive Rated Amps x 2)
Display: 0.01 A
b004 [Output Voltage] Related Parameter(s): P031, A530, A534
Output voltage present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
Min/Max: 0.0/Drive Rated Volts
Display: 0.1V
b005 [DC Bus Voltage]
Filtered DC bus voltage level of the drive.
Min/Max: 0/1200VDC
Display: 1VDC
b006 [Drive Status] Related Parameter(s): A544
Present operating condition of the drive.
Min/Max: 00000/11111
Display: 00000

1 = True/Active, 0 = False/Inactive
Running Digit 1
Forward Digit 2
Accelerating Digit 3
Decelerating Digit 4
SafetyActive
(1)
Digit 5
Basic Display Group (continued)
b007 [Fault 1 Code] Related Parameter(s): F604-F610
b008 [Fault 2 Code]
b009 [Fault 3 Code]
A code that represents a drive fault. Codes appear in these parameters in the order they occur (b007 [Fault 1 Code] = the most recent fault). Repetitive faults are only recorded once.
See Fault and Diagnostic Group for more information.
Min/Max: F0/F127
Display: F0
b010 [Process Display] Related Parameter(s): b001, A481, A482
32 bit parameter.
Output frequency scaled by [Process Disp Hi] and [Process Disp Lo].
Min/Max: 0/9999
Display: 1
32
b012 [Control Source] Related Parameter(s): P046, P047, P048, P049, P050, P051,
t062, t063, t065-t068, L180-L187, A410-A425
Active source of the Start Command and Frequency Command. Normally defined by the settings of P046, P048, P050 [Start Source x] and P047, P049, P051 [Speed Referencex].
See Start and Speed Reference Control on page 46 for more information.
Min/Max: 0000/2165
Display: 0000

Start Command Source Digit 1
1 = Keypad
2 = DigIn TrmBlk (Parameters t062,t063,t065-t068)
3 = Serial/DSI
4 = Network Opt
(1)
5 = EtherNet/IP
(2)
(1) Select this setting if using the optional PowerFlex 25-COMM-E2P, 25-COMM-D, or
25-COMM-P adapters as the Start source and/or Frequency source.
Frequency Command Source Digit 2 & 3
00 = Other
01 = Drive Pot
02 = Keypad
03 = Serial/DSI
04 = Network Opt
(1)
05 = 0-10V Input
06 = 4-20mA Input
07 = Preset Freq (Parameters A410-A425)
08 = Anlg In Mult
(2)
09 = MOP
10 = Pulse Input
11 = PID1 Output
12 = PID2 Output
(2)
13 = Step Logic (Parameters L180-L187)
(1)
14 = Encoder
(2)
15 = EtherNet/IP
(2)
16 = Positioning
(2)
Frequency Command Source Digit 4
0 = Other (Digit 2 & 3 are used. Digit 4 is not shown.)
1 = Jog
2 = Purge
Not Used
Display reads... Description
2004 Start source comes from Network Opt and Frequency source is Purge.
113 Start source comes from Serial/DSI and Frequency source comes from PID1 Output.
155 Start source and Frequency source comes from EtherNet/IP.
052 Start source comes from DigIn TrmBlk and Frequency source from 0-10V Input.
011 Start source comes from Keypad and Frequency source comes from Drive Pot.
Example
b013 [Contrl In Status] Related Parameter(s): b002, P044, P045
State of the digital terminal blocks 1...3 and DB transistor.
Min/Max: 0000/1111
Display: 0000
IMPORTANT Actual control commands may come from a source other than the control terminal block.

1 = Closed State, 0 = Open State
DigIn TBlk 1 Digit 1
DB Trans On
(1)
Digit 4
(1) The DB Transistor on indication must have a 0.5 s hysteresis. It will turn on and stay
on for at least 0.5 s every time the DB transistor is turned on.
Not Used
b014 [Dig In Status] Related Parameter(s): t065-t068
State of the programmable digital inputs.
Min/Max: 0000/1111
Display: 0000

1 = Closed State, 0 = Open State
DigIn TBlk 7
(1)
Digit 3
DigIn TBlk 8
(1)
Digit 4
Not Used
b015 [Output RPM] Related Parameter(s): P035
Current output frequency in rpm. Scale is based on P035 [Motor NP Poles].
Min/Max: 0/24000 rpm
Display: 1 rpm
b016 [Output Speed] Related Parameter(s): P044
Current output frequency in %. Scale is 0% at 0.00 Hz to 100% at P044 [Maximum Freq].
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
b017 [Output Power] Related Parameter(s): b018
Output power present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
Min/Max: 0.00/(Drive Rated Power x 2)
Display: 0.01 kW
b018 [Power Saved] Related Parameter(s): b017
Instantaneous power savings of using this drive compared to an across the line starter.
Min/Max: 0.00/655.35 kW
Display: 0.01 kW
b019 [Elapsed Run time] Related Parameter(s): A555
Accumulated time drive is outputting power. Time is displayed in 10 hour increments.
Min/Max: 0/65535 x 10 hr
Display: 1 = 10 hr
b020 [Average Power] Related Parameter(s): A555
Average power used by the motor since the last reset of the meters.
Min/Max: 0.00/(Drive Rated Power x 2)
Display: 0.01 kW
b021 [Elapsed kWh] Related Parameter(s): b022
Accumulated output energy of the drive. When the maximum value of this parameter is reached, it resets to zero and b022 [Elapsed MWh] is incremented.
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0 kWh
Display: 0.1 kWh
b022 [Elapsed MWh] Related Parameter(s): b021
Accumulated output energy of the drive.
Min/Max: 0.0/6553.5 MWh
Display: 0.1 MWh
b023 [Energy Saved] Related Parameter(s): A555
Total energy savings of using this drive compared to an across the line starter since the last reset of the meters.
Min/Max: 0.0/6553.5 kWh
Display: 0.1 kWh
b024 [Accum kWh Sav] Related Parameter(s): b025
Total approximate accumulated energy savings of the drive compared to using an across the line starter.
Min/Max: 0.0/6553.5 kWh
Display: 0.1 = 10 kWh
b025 [Accum Cost Sav] Related Parameter(s): b024, P052, A555
Total approximate accumulated cost savings of the drive compared to using an across the line starter.
[Accum Cost Sav] = [Average kWh cost] x [Accum kWh Sav]
Min/Max: 0.0/6553.5
Display: 0.1
b026 [Accum CO2 Sav] Related Parameter(s): A555
Total approximate accumulated CO2 savings of the drive compared to using an across the line starter.
Min/Max: 0.0/6553.5 kg
Display: 0.1 kg
b027 [Drive Temp]
Present operating temperature of the drive heatsink (inside module).
Min/Max: 0/120 C
Display: 1 C
b028 [Control Temp]
Present operating temperature of the drive control.
Min/Max: 0/120 C
Display: 1 C
b029 [Control SW Ver]
Current drive firmware version.
Min/Max: 0.000/65.535
Display: 0.001
Basic Program Group
P030 [Language] Language Support
Selects the language displayed. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made. Keypad/
LCD Display
RSLogix 5000/
Logix Designer
Connected
Components
Workbench
Options 1 English (Default) Y Y Y
2 Franais Y Y Y
3 Espaol Y Y Y
4 Italiano Y Y Y
5 Deutsch Y Y Y
6 Japanese Y
7 Portugus Y Y
8 Chinese Chinese Simplified Y Y
9 Reserved
10 Reserved
11 Korean Y
12 Polish
(1)
Y
13 Reserved
14 Turkish
(1)
Y
15 Czech
(1)
Y
(1) Due to a limitation of the LCD Display, some of the characters for Polish, Turkish, and Czech will be modified.
P031 [Motor NP Volts] Related Parameter(s): b004, A530, A531, A532, A533
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Sets the motor nameplate rated volts.
Values Default: Drive Rated Volts
Min/Max: 10V (for 230V Drives), 20V (for 460V Drives), 25V (for 600V Drives)/Drive Rated Volts
Display: 1V
P032 [Motor NP Hertz] Related Parameter(s): A493, A530, A531, A532, A533
Sets the motor nameplate rated frequency.
Values Default: 60 Hz
Min/Max: 15/500 Hz
Display: 1 Hz
P033 [Motor OL Current] Related Parameter(s): t069, t072, t076, t081, A484, A485, A493
Sets the motor nameplate overload current. Used to determine motor overload conditions and can be set from 0.1 A to 200% of drive rated current.
Values Default: Drive Rated Amps
Display: 0.1 A
IMPORTANT The drive will fault on an F007 Motor Overload if the value of this parameter is exceeded by 150% for 60 s.
Basic Program Group (continued)
P034 [Motor NP FLA] Related Parameter(s): P040
Sets the motor nameplate FLA. Used to assist the Autotune routine and motor control.
Values Default: Based on Drive Rating
Display: 0.1 A
P035 [Motor NP Poles] Related Parameter(s): b015
Sets the number of poles in the motor.
Values Default: 4
Min/Max: 2/40
Display: 1
P036 [Motor NP RPM]
Sets the rated nameplate rpm of the motor. Used to calculate the rated slip of the motor. To reduce the slip frequency, set this parameter closer to the motor synchronous speed.
Values Default: 1750 rpm
Display: 1 rpm
P037 [Motor NP Power]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the motor nameplate power. Used in PM regulator.
Values Default: Drive Rated Power
Min/Max: 0.00/Drive Rated Power
Display: 0.01 kW
PF 525
P038 [Voltage Class]
Sets the voltage class of 600V drives. Only applicable to 600V drives.
Options 2 480V
3 600V (Default)
P039 [Torque Perf Mode] Related Parameter(s): P040, A530, A531, A532, A533
Selects the motor control mode.
Options 0 V/Hz
1 SVC (Default)
2 Economize
3 Vector
(1)
P040 [Autotune] Related Parameter(s): P034, P039, A496, A497
Enables a static (not spinning) or dynamic (motor spinning) autotune to automatically set the motor parameters. Start must be pressed to begin the routine. After the routine is
complete the parameter resets to a zero. A failure (such as if a motor is not connected) results in an Autotune Fault.
Options 0 Ready/Idle (Default)
1 Static Tune A temporary command that initiates a non-rotational motor stator resistance test for the best possible automatic setting of A496
[IR Voltage Drop]. A start command is required following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to 0 Ready/Idle
following the test, at which time another start transition is required operate the drive in normal mode. Used when motor cannot
be uncoupled from the load.
2 Rotate Tune A temporary command that initiates a Static Tune followed by a rotational test for the best possible automatic setting of A497
[Flux Current Ref ]. A start command is required following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to 0 Ready/Idle
following the test, at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode. Important: Used when
motor is uncoupled from the load. Results may not be valid if a load is coupled to the motor during this procedure.
IMPORTANT
All motor parameters in the Basic Program group must be set before running the routine. If a start command is not given (or a stop command is given) within
30 s, the parameter automatically returns to a zero and an Autotune Fault occurs.
ATTENTION: Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this procedure. To guard against possible injury and/or equipment damage, it is
recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding.
P041 [Accel Time 1] Related Parameter(s): P044, A439
Sets the time for the drive to accelerate from 0 Hz to P044 [Maximum Freq].
Accel Rate = [Maximum Freq] / [Accel Time x]
Values Default: 10.00 s
Min/Max: 0.00/600.00 s
Display: 0.01 s
Speed
0
Time
[Maximum Freq]
[Accel Time x] [Decel Time x]
0
A
c
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
D
e
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
P042 [Decel Time 1] Related Parameter(s): P044, A439
Sets the time for the drive to decelerate from P044 [Maximum Freq] to 0 Hz.
Decel Rate = [Maximum Freq] / Decel Time x]
Min/Max: 0.00/600.00 s
Display: 0.01 s
Speed
0
Time
[Maximum Freq]
0
A
c
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
D
e
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
P043 [Minimum Freq] Related Parameter(s): b001, b002, b013, P044, A530, A531
Sets the lowest frequency the drive outputs.
Values Default: 0.00 Hz
Min/Max: 0.00/500.00 Hz
Display: 0.01 Hz
P044 [Maximum Freq] Related Parameter(s): b001, b002, b013, b016, P043, A530, A531
Sets the highest frequency the drive outputs.
Min/Max: 0.00/500.00 Hz
Display: 0.01 Hz
IMPORTANT This value must be greater than the value set in P043 [Minimum Freq].
P045 [Stop Mode] Related Parameter(s): t086, t087, A434, A435, A550
Determines the stopping mode used by the drive when a stop is initiated.
Options 0 Ramp, CF (Default) Ramp to Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
1 Coast, CF Coast to Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
2 DC Brake, CF DC Injection Braking Stop. Stop command clears active fault.
3 DC BrkAuto,CF DC Injection Braking Stop with Auto Shutoff.
Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in A434 [DC Brake Time].
OR
Drive shuts off if the drive detects that the motor is stopped.
Stop command clears active fault.
4 Ramp Ramp to Stop.
5 Coast Coast to Stop.
6 DC Brake DC Injection Braking Stop.
7 DC BrakeAuto DC Injection Braking Stop with Auto Shutoff.
Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in A434 [DC Brake Time].
OR
Drive shuts off if the drive detects that the motor is stopped.
8 Ramp+EM B,CF Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control. Stop command clears active fault.
9 Ramp+EM Brk Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control.
10 PointStp,CF PointStop. Stop command clears
active fault.
Provides a method to stop at a constant distance instead of a fixed rate.
When a Stop command is given, the distance required for the machine to travel to
standstill based on the programmed maximum speed and deceleration time is calculated.
If the drive is running slower than the maximum speed, the function will apply a calculated
deceleration time that allows the machine to travel to standstill in the same distance based
on the current speed.
It is recommended to use braking resistors or set A550 [Bus Reg Enable] to 0 Disabled for
better performance.
11 PointStop PointStop.
Speed
Time
[Maximum Freq]
Stop
Calculated Stop Time
[Decel Time x]
P046 [Start Source 1] Related Parameter(s): b012, t064, C125
P048 [Start Source 2]
P050 [Start Source 3]
Configures the start source of the drive. Changes to these inputs take effect as soon as they are entered. P046 [Start Source 1] is the factory default start source unless overridden.
Options 1 Keypad [Start Source 1] default
2 DigIn TrmBlk [Start Source 2] default
3 Serial/DSI [Start Source 3] default for PowerFlex 523
4 Network Opt
(1)
5 EtherNet/IP
(2)
[Start Source 3] default for PowerFlex 525
(1) Select this setting if using the optional PowerFlex 25-COMM-E2P, 25-COMM-D, or 25-COMM-P adapters as the start source.
IMPORTANT
For all settings except when t064 [2-Wire Mode] is set to 1 Level Sense, the drive must receive a leading edge from the start input for the drive to start after a
stop input, loss of power, or fault condition.
P047 [Speed Reference1] Related Parameter(s): C125
Selects the source of speed command for the drive. Changes to these inputs take effect as soon as they are entered. P047 [Speed Reference1] is the factory default speed reference
unless overridden.
Options 1 Drive Pot [Speed Reference1] default
2 Keypad Freq
3 Serial/DSI [Speed Reference3] default for PowerFlex 523
4 Network Opt
(1)
5 0-10V Input [Speed Reference2] default
6 4-20mA Input
7 Preset Freq
8 Anlg In Mult
(2)
9 MOP
10 Pulse Input
11 PID1 Output
12 PID2 Output
(2)
13 Step Logic
(2)
14 Encoder
(2)
15 EtherNet/IP
(2)
[Speed Reference3] default for PowerFlex 525
16 Positioning
(2)
Referencing from A558 [Positioning Mode]
(1) Select this setting if using the optional PowerFlex 25-COMM-E2P, 25-COMM-D, or 25-COMM-P adapters as the speed reference.
P052 [Average kWh Cost] Related Parameter(s): b025
Sets the average cost per kWh.
Values Default: 0.00
Min/Max: 0.00/655.35
Display: 0.01
P053 [Reset To Defalts]
Resets all parameters to their factory default values. After a Reset command, the value of this parameter returns to zero.
1 Param Reset Does not reset custom groups, parameter P030 [Language], and communication parameters.
2 Factory Rset Restore drive to factory condition.
3 Power Reset Resets only power parameters. Can be used when swapping power modules.
Parameters that are Reset when P053 = 3
Parameter Name
P031 [Motor NP Volts]
P033 [Motor OL] Current
P034 [Motor NP FLA]
P035 [Motor NP Poles]
P038 [Voltage Class]
A435 [DC Brake Level]
A484 [Current Limit 1]
A485 [Current Limit 2]
A486 [Shear Pin1 Level]
A490 [Load Loss Level]
A496 [IR Voltage Drop]
A497 [Flux Current Ref ]
A530 [Boost Select]
A531 [Start Boost]
A532 [Break Voltage]
A533 [Break Frequency]
A534 [Maximum] Voltage
Parameters that are NOT Reset when P053 = 1
Parameter Parameter Parameter
P030 [Language] C138 [EN Gateway Cfg 2] C159 [EN Data Out 3]
C121 [Comm Write Mode] C139 [EN Gateway Cfg 3] C160 [EN Data Out 4]
C122 [Cmd Stat Select] C140 [EN Gateway Cfg 4] C161 [Opt Data In 1]
C123 [RS485 Data Rate] C141 [EN Rate Cfg] C162 [Opt Data In 2]
C124 [RS485 Node Addr] C143 [EN Comm Flt Actn] C163 [Opt Data In 3]
C124 [Comm Loss Action] C144 [EN Idle Flt Actn] C164 [Opt Data In 4]
C126 [Comm Loss Time] C145 [EN Flt Cfg Logic] C165 [Opt Data Out 1]
C127 [RS485 Format] C146 [EN Flt Cfg Ref] C166 [Opt Data Out 2]
C128 [EN Addr Sel] C147 [EN Flt Cfg DL 1] C167 [Opt Data Out 3]
C129 [EN IP Addr Cfg 1] C148 [EN Flt Cfg DL 2] C168 [Opt Data Out 4]
C130 [EN IP Addr Cfg 2] C149 [EN Flt Cfg DL 3] C169 [MultiDrv Sel]
C131 [EN IP Addr Cfg 3] C150 [EN Flt Cfg DL 4] C171 [Drv 1 Addr]
C132 [EN IP Addr Cfg 4] C153 [EN Data In 1] C172 [Drv 2 Addr]
C133 [EN Subnet Cfg 1] C154 [EN Data In 2] C173 [Drv 3 Addr]
C134 [EN Subnet Cfg 2] C155 [EN Data In 3] C174 [Drv 4 Addr]
C135 [EN Subnet Cfg 3] C156 [EN Data In 4] C175 [DSI I/O Cfg]
C136 [EN Subnet Cfg 4] C157 [EN Data Out 1] GC [Parameters in Custom Group]
C137 [EN Gateway Cfg 1] C158 [EN Data Out 2]
Terminal Block Group
Related Parameter(s): b012, b013, b014, P045, P046, P048, P049, P050, P051, t064,
t086, A410-A425, A427, A431, A432, A433, A434, A435,
A442, A443, A488, A535, A560, A562, A563, A567, A571
PowerFlex 525 only.
Programmable digital input. Changes to these inputs takes effect as soon as they are entered. If a digital input is set for a selection that is only usable on one input, no other input can
be set for the same selection.
Options 0 Not Used Terminal has no function but can be read over network communications with b013 [Contrl In Status] and b014 [Dig In Status].
1 Speed Ref 2 Selects P049 [Speed Reference2] as drive's speed command.
2 Speed Ref 3 Selects P051 [Speed Reference3] as drive's speed command.
3 Start Src 2 Selects P048 [Start Source 2] as control source to start the drive.
4 Start Src 3 Selects P050 [Start Source 3] as control source to start the drive.
5 Spd + Strt 2 [DigIn TermBlk 07] default.
Selects combination of P049 [Speed Reference2] and P048 [Start Source 2] as speed command with control source to start the
drive.
6 Spd + Strt 3 Selects combination of P051 [Speed Reference3] and P050 [Start Source 3] as speed command with control source to start the
drive.
7 Preset Freq
(PF523: only for DigIn TermBlk 03, 05,
and 06)
(PF525: only for DigIn TermBlk
05...08)
[DigIn TermBlk 05] and [DigIn TermBlk 06] default.
Selects a preset frequency in Velocity mode (P047, P049, P051 [Speed Referencex] = 1...15). See A410...A425 [Preset Freq x].
Selects a preset frequency and position in Positioning mode (P047, P049, P051 [Speed Referencex] = 16). See L200...L214
[Step Units x] (only for PowerFlex 525 drives).
8 Jog When input is present, drive accelerates according to the value set in A432 [Jog Accel/Decel] and ramps to the value set in A431
[Jog Frequency].
When input is removed, drive ramps to a stop according to the value set in A432 [Jog Accel/Decel].
A valid Start command will override this input.
9 Jog Forward [DigIn TermBlk 08] default.
Drive accelerates to A431 [Jog Frequency] according to A432 [Jog Accel/Decel] and ramps to a stop when input becomes inactive. A
valid Start command will override this input.
10 Jog Reverse Drive accelerates to A431 [Jog Frequency] according to A432 [Jog Accel/Decel] and ramps to a stop when input becomes inactive. A
valid Start command will override this input.
11 Acc/Dec Sel2
(1)
If active, determines which Accel/Decel time will be used for all ramp rates except jog. Can be used with option 29 Acc/Dec Sel3
for additional Accel/Decel times. See A442 [Accel Time 2] for more information.
12 Aux Fault When enabled, an F002 Auxiliary Input fault will occur when the input is removed.
13 Clear Fault When active, clears an active fault.
14 RampStop,CF Causes drive to immediately ramp to a stop regardless of how P045 [Stop Mode] is set.
15 CoastStop,CF Causes drive to immediately coast to a stop regardless of how P045 [Stop Mode] is set.
16 DCInjStop,CF Causes drive to immediately begin a DC Injection stop regardless of how P045 [Stop Mode] is set.
17 MOP Up Increases the value of A427 [MOP Freq] at the rate set in A430 [MOP Time].
18 MOP Down Decreases the value of A427 [MOP Freq] at the rate set in A430 [MOP Time].
19 Timer Start
(1)
Clears and starts the timer function. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs.
20 Counter In
(1)
Starts the counter function. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs.
21 Reset Timer Clears the active timer.
22 Reset Countr Clears the active counter.
23 Rset Tim&Cnt Clear the active timer and counter.
24 Logic In 1
(1)(2)
Logic function input number 1. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs (t076, t081 [Relay Outx Sel] and t069, t072 [Opto
Outx Sel], options 11...14). May be used in conjunction with StepLogic parameters L180...L187 [Stp Logic x].
25 Logic In 2
(1)(2)
Logic function input number 2. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs (t076, t081 [Relay Outx Sel] and t069, t072 [Opto
Outx Sel], options 11...14). May be used in conjunction with StepLogic parameters L180...L187 [Stp Logic x].
PF 525
IMPORTANT
Digital Inputs have priority for frequency control when programmed as Preset Speed and are active. See
Start Source and Speed Reference Selection on page 46 for more information.
Options 26 Current Lmt2
(2)
When active, A485 [Current Limit 2] determines the drive current limit level.
27 Anlg Invert Inverts the scaling of the analog input levels set in
t091 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] and t092 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] or
t095 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo] and t096 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi].
28 EM Brk Rlse If EM brake function is enabled, this input releases the brake. See t086 [EM Brk Off Delay] for more information.
29 Acc/Dec Sel3
(1)
If active, determines which Accel/Decel time is used for all ramp rates except jog.
Used with option 11 Acc/Dec Sel2 for the Accel/Decel times listed in this table.
30 Precharge En Forces drive into precharge state. Typically controlled by auxiliary contact on the disconnect at the DC input to the drive. If this
input is assigned, it must be energized for the pre-charge relay to close and for the drive to run. If it is de-energized, the pre-charge
relay opens and the drive coasts to a stop.
31 Inertia Dcel Forces drive into Inertia Ride-Through state. The drive attempts to regulate the DC bus at the current level.
32 Sync Enable Must be used in order to hold the existing frequency when Sync Time is set to enable speed synchronization. When this input is
released the drive accelerates to the commanded frequency in A571 [Sync Time].
33 Traverse Dis When an input is programmed the traverse function is disabled while this input is active. See A567 [Max Traverse].
34 Home Limit
(2)
In Positioning mode, indicates the drive is at the home position. See Appendix E for more information on Positioning.
35 Find Home
(2)
In Positioning mode, causes the drive to return to the Home position when a Start command is issued.
Uses A562 [Find Home Freq] and A563 [Find Home Dir] until the Home Limit input is activated. If it passes this point, it then runs
in the reverse direction at 1/10th the frequency of [Find Home Freq] until the Home Limit is activated again. As long as this input
is active, any start command causes the drive to enter the homing routine. Only functions if in Positioning mode. Once the Find
Home routine has finished, the drive stops. See Appendix E for more information on Positioning.
36 Hold Step
(2)
In Positioning mode, overrides other inputs and causes the drive to remain at its current step (running at zero speed once it reaches
its position) until released.
While in Hold, the drive ignores any input command which would normally result in a move to a new step. Timers continue to
run. Therefore, when the Hold is removed, the drive must see any required digital inputs transition (even if they already
transitioned during the hold), but it does not reset any timer. See Appendix E for more information on Positioning.
37 Pos Redefine
(2)
In Positioning mode, resets the home position to the current position of the machine. See Appendix E for more information on
Positioning.
38 Force DC If the drive is not running, causes the drive to apply a DC Holding current (A435 [DC Brake Level], ignoring A434 [DC Brake Time])
while the input is applied.
39 Damper Input When active, drive is allowed to run normally.
When inactive, drive is forced into sleep mode and is prevented from accelerating to command speed.
40 Purge
(1)
Starts the drive at A433 [Purge Frequency] regardless of the selected control source. Supersedes the keypad Control function as
well as any other control command to take control of the drive. Purge can occur, and is operational, at any time whether the drive is
running or stopped regardless of the selected logic source selection. If a valid stop (other than from comms or SW enable) is
present, the drive will not start on the purge input transition.
41 Freeze-Fire When inactive, will cause an immediate F094 Function Loss fault. Use to safely bypass the drive with an external switching
device.
42 SW Enable Works like an interlock that has to be active for the drive to run.
43 SherPin1 Dis Disables shear pin 1 but leaves shear pin 2 active. If A488 [Shear Pin 2 Level] is greater than 0.0 A, shear pin 2 is enabled.
44 Reserved
45 Reserved
46 Reserved
47 Reserved
ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary
mechanical braking device must be used.
Option Description
29 11
0 0 Acc/Dec 1
0 1 Acc/Dec 2
1 0 Acc/Dec 3
1 1 Acc/Dec 4
ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary
mechanical braking device must be used.
Options 48 2-Wire FWD
(only for DigIn TermBlk 02)
[DigIn TermBlk 02] default. Select 2-Wire FWD for this input.
Select this option and set P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x] to 2 DigIn TrmBlk to configure [Start Source x] to a 2-wire run
forward mode. Also see t064 [2-Wire Mode] for level trigger settings.
49 3-Wire Start
Select 3-Wire Start for this input.
Select this option and set P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x] to 2 DigIn TrmBlk to configure [Start Source x] to a 3-wire start
mode.
50 2-Wire REV
[DigIn TermBlk 03] default. Select 2-Wire REV for this input.
Select this option and set P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x] to 2 DigIn TrmBlk to configure [Start Source x] to a 2-wire run
reverse mode. Also see t064 [2-Wire Mode] for level trigger settings.
For PowerFlex 523 drives, this setting will be disabled If [DigIn TermBlk 03] is set to 7 Preset Freq.
51 3-Wire Dir
Select 3-Wire Dir for this input.
Select this option and set P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x] to 2 DigIn TrmBlk to change the direction of [Start Source x].
For PowerFlex 523 drives, this setting will be disabled If [DigIn TermBlk 03] is set to 7 Preset Freq.
52 Pulse Train
(PF523: only for DigIn TermBlk 05)
(PF525: only for DigIn TermBlk 07)
Select pulse train for this input.
Use P047, P049 and P051 [Speed Referencex] to select pulse input.
Jumper for DigIn TermBlk 05 or 07 Sel must be moved to Pulse In.
(1) This function may be tied to one input only.
t064 [2-Wire Mode] Related Parameter(s): P045, P046, P048, P050, t062, t063
Programs the mode of trigger only for t062 [DigIn TermBlk 02] and t063 [DigIn TermBlk 03] when 2-wire option is being selected as P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x].
Options 0 Edge Trigger (Default) Standard 2-Wire operation.
1 Level Sense I/O Terminal 01 Stop = Coast to stop. Drive will restart after a Stop command when:
Stop is removed
and
Start is held active
I/O Terminal 03 Run REV
2 Hi-Spd Edge
Outputs are kept in a ready-to-run state. The drive will respond to a Start command within 10 ms.
I/O Terminal 01 Stop = Coast to stop.
I/O Terminal 03 Run REV
3 Momentary Drive will start after a momentary input from either the Run FWD input (I/O Terminal 02) or the Run REV input (I/O Terminal
03).
I/O Terminal 01 Stop = Stop according to the value set in P045 [Stop Mode].
ATTENTION: Hazard of injury exists due to unintended operation. When t064 [2-Wire Mode] is set to
option 1, and the Run input is maintained, the Run inputs do not need to be toggled after a Stop input for
the drive to run again. A Stop function is provided only when the Stop input is active (open).
IMPORTANT There is greater potential voltage on the output terminals when using this option.
Terminal Block Group (continued)
t069 [Opto Out1 Sel] Related Parameter(s): P046, P048, P050, t070, t073, t077, t082,
t072 [Opto Out2 Sel] t086, t087, t093, t094, t097, A541, A564
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines the operation of the programmable digital outputs.
Values Default:
Opto Out1 Sel:
Opto Out2 Sel:
2
1
Min/Max: 0/29
Display: 1
PF 525
Options Setting Output Changes State When... Hysteresis
0 Ready/Fault Opto outputs are active when power is applied. Indicates that the drive is ready for operation. Opto outputs are
inactive when power is removed or a fault occurs.
None
1 At Frequency Drive reaches commanded frequency. 0.5 Hz above; 1.0 Hz below
2 MotorRunning Motor is receiving power from the drive. None
3 Reverse Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction. None
4 Motor Overld Motor overload condition exists. 100 ms time delay on or off
5 Ramp Reg Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel/decel times to avoid an overcurrent or overvoltage fault from
occurring.
100 ms time delay on or off
6 Above Freq Drive exceeds the frequency (Hz) value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level]. 100 ms time delay on or off
7 Above Cur Drive exceeds the current (% Amps) value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level]. 100 ms time delay on or off
8 Above DCVolt Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level]. 100 ms time delay on or off
9 Retries Exst Value set in A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded. None
10 Above Anlg V Analog input voltage (0-10V input) exceeds the value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level]. 100 ms time delay on or off
11 Above PF Ang Power Factor angle exceeds the value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level]. 100 ms time delay on or off
12 Anlg In Loss Analog input loss has occurred. Program t094 [Anlg In V Loss] or t097 [Anlg In mA Loss] for desired action when
input loss occurs.
On, 2 mA / 1V
Off, 3 mA / 1.5V
13 ParamControl Output is directly controlled by the state of the t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level]. A value of 0 causes the output to
turn off. A value of 1 or greater in this parameter causes the output to turn on.
None
14 NonRec Fault Value set in A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded or
A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is not enabled or
A non-resettable fault has occurred.
None
15 EM Brk Cntrl EM Brake is energized. Program t087 [EM Brk On Delay] and t086 [EM Brk Off Delay] for desired action. None
16 Thermal OL Relay energizes when thermal Motor overload counter is above the value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level]. It
also energizes if the drive is within 5 C of the drive overheat trip point.
None
17 Amb OverTemp Relay energizes when control module over temperature occurs. None
18 Local Active Active when drive P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x] is in local keypad control. None
19 Comm Loss Active when communication is lost from any comm source with reference or control. None
20 Logic In 1 An input is programmed as Logic Input 1 and is active. None
21 Logic In 2 An input is programmed as Logic Input 2 and is active. None
22 Logic 1 & 2 Both Logic inputs are programmed and active. None
23 Logic 1 or 2 One or both Logic inputs are programmed and one or both is active. None
24 StpLogic Out Drive enters StepLogic step with Command Word set to enable Logic output. None
25 Timer Out Timer has reached the value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level] or not timing. None
26 Counter Out Counter has reached the value set in t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level] or not counting. None
27 At Position Drive is in Positioning mode and has reached the commanded position. Tolerance is adjusted with A564 [Encoder
Pos Tol].
28 At Home Drive is in Positioning mode and has reached the home position. Tolerance is adjusted with A564 [Encoder Pos Tol].
29 Safe-Off Both safe-off inputs are active.
IMPORTANT
Value for t070 or t073 [Opto Outx Level] must be entered in percent of drive rated output
current.
IMPORTANT Do not use if t093 [10V Bipolar Enbl] is set to 1 Bi-Polar In.
t070 [Opto Out1 Level] Related Parameter(s): t069, t072
t073 [Opto Out2 Level]
32 bit parameter.
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines the on/off point for the digital outputs when t069 or t072 [Opto Outx Sel] is set to the values shown below.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/9999
Display: 1
32
PF 525
Min/Max Value Range Based On [Opto Outx Sel] Setting
6: 0...500 Hz 10: 0...100% 16: 0.1...9999 s 20: 0/1
7: 0...180% 11 0/1 17: 1...9999 counts 26: 0...150%
8: 0...815V 13 0...800 18: 0...180
t075 [Opto Out Logic]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines the logic (Normally Open/NO or Normally Closed/NC) of the digital outputs only.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/3
Display: 1
PF 525
Setting Digital Out 1 Logic Digital Out 2 Logic
0 NO NO
1 NC NO
2 NO NC
3 NC NC
t076 [Relay Out1 Sel] Related Parameter(s): P046, P048, P050, t070, t073, t077, t082, t086, t087, t093, t094, t097, A541, A564
t081 [Relay Out2 Sel]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines the operation of the programmable output relay.
Values Default:
Relay Out1 Sel:
Relay Out2 Sel:
0
2
Min/Max: 0/29
Display: 1
PF 525
Options Output Relay Changes State When... Hysteresis
0 Ready/Fault Relay changes state when power is applied. Indicates that the drive is ready for operation. Relay returns drive to
shelf state when power is removed or a fault occurs.
None
1 At Frequency Drive reaches commanded frequency. 0.5 Hz above; 1.0 Hz below
2 MotorRunning Motor is receiving power from the drive. None
3 Reverse Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction. None
4 Motor Overld Motor overload condition exists. 100 ms time delay on or off
5 Ramp Reg Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel/ decel times to avoid an overcurrent or overvoltage fault from
occurring.
100 ms time delay on or off
6 Above Freq Drive exceeds the frequency (Hz) value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level]. 100 ms time delay on or off
7 Above Cur Drive exceeds the current (% Amps) value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level]. 100 ms time delay on or off
8 Above DCVolt Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level]. 100 ms time delay on or off
9 Retries Exst Value set in A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded. None
10 Above Anlg V Analog input voltage (0-10V input) exceeds the value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level]. 100 ms time delay on or off
11 Above PF Ang Power Factor angle exceeds the value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level]. 100 ms time delay on or off
12 Anlg In Loss Analog input loss has occurred. Program t094 [Anlg In V Loss] or t097 [Anlg In mA Loss] for desired action when
input loss occurs.
On, 2 mA / 1V
Off, 3 mA / 1.5V
13 ParamControl Output will be directly controlled by the state of the t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level]. A value of 0 causes the output
to turn off. A value of 1 or greater in this parameter causes the output to turn on.
None
14 NonRec Fault Value set in A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded or
A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is not enabled or
A non-resettable fault has occurred.
None
15 EM Brk Cntrl EM Brake is energized. Program t087 [EM Brk On Delay] and t086 [EM Brk Off Delay] for desired action. None
16 Thermal OL Relay energizes when thermal Motor overload counter is above the value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level]. It
also energizes if the drive is within 5C of the drive overheat trip point.
None
17 Amb OverTemp Relay energizes when control module over temperature occurs. None
18 Local Active Active when drive P046, P048 or P050 [Start Source x] is in local keypad control. None
19 Comm Loss Active when communication is lost from any comm source with reference or control. None
20 Logic In 1
(1)
An input is programmed as Logic Input 1 and is active. None
21 Logic In 2
(1)
An input is programmed as Logic Input 2 and is active. None
22 Logic 1 & 2
(1)
Both Logic inputs are programmed and active. None
23 Logic 1 or 2
(1)
One or both Logic inputs are programmed and one or both is active. None
24 StpLogic Out
(1)
Drive enters StepLogic step with Command Word set to enable Logic output. None
25 Timer Out Timer has reached the value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level] or not timing. None
26 Counter Out Counter has reached the value set in t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level] or not counting. None
27 At Position
(1)
Drive is in Positioning mode and has reached the commanded position. Tolerance is adjusted with A564 [Encoder
Pos Tol].
28 At Home
(1)
Drive is in Positioning mode and has reached the home position. Tolerance is adjusted with A564 [Encoder Pos Tol].
29 Safe-Off
(1)
Both safe-off inputs are active.
IMPORTANT
Value for t077 or t082 [Relay Outx Level] must be entered in percent of drive rated output
current.
IMPORTANT Do not use if t093 [10V Bipolar Enbl] is set to 1 Bi-Polar In.
t077 [Relay Out1 Level] Related Parameter(s): t076, t081
t082 [Relay Out2 Level]
PowerFlex 525 only.
32 bit parameter.
Determines the on/off point for the output relay when t076 or t081 [Relay Outx Sel] is set to the values shown below.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/9999
Display: 1
PF 525
32
Min/Max Value Range Based On [Relay Outx Sel] Setting
6: 0...500 Hz 10: 0...100% 16: 0.1...9999 s 20: 0/1
7: 0...180% 11: 0/1 17: 1...9999 counts 26: 0...150%
8: 0...815V 13: 0...800 18: 0...180
t079 [Relay 1 On Time]
t084 [Relay 2 On Time]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the delay time before Relay energizes after required condition is met.
Min/Max: 0.0/600.0 s
Display: 0.1 s
PF 525
t080 [Relay 1 Off Time]
t085 [Relay 2 Off Time]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the delay time before Relay de-energizes after required condition ceases.
Min/Max: 0.0/600.0 s
Display: 0.1 s
PF 525
t086 [EM Brk Off Delay] Related Parameter(s): P045
Sets the time the drive remains at minimum frequency before ramping up to the commanded frequency (and engaging the brake coil relay) if Electromechanical (EM) Brake Control
Mode is enabled with P045 [Stop Mode].
Min/Max: 0.00/10.00 s
Display: 0.01 s
Frequency
Time
[Minimum Freq]
[EM Brk Of Delay] [EM Brk On Delay]
Stop
commanded
Start
commanded
EM Brk
de-energized (On)
Drive stops EM Brk
energized (Of)
R
a
m
p

a
c
c
e
l R
a
m
p
d
e
c
e
l
t087 [EM Brk On Delay] Related Parameter(s): P045
Sets the time the drive remains at minimum frequency (after releasing the brake coil relay) before stopping if EM Brake Control Mode is enabled with P045 [Stop Mode].
Min/Max: 0.00/10.00 s
Display: 0.01 s
Frequency
Time
[Minimum Freq]
[EM Brk Of Delay] [EM Brk On Delay]
Stop
commanded
Start
commanded
EM Brk
de-energized (On)
Drive stops EM Brk
energized (Of)
R
a
m
p

a
c
c
e
l R
a
m
p
d
e
c
e
l
t088 [Analog Out Sel] Related Parameter(s): t090
PowerFlex 525 only.
The 0-10V, 0-20 mA or 4-2 0 mA analog output can be used to provide a signal proportional to several drive conditions. This parameter also selects which analog calibration parameters
to use.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/23
Display: 1
PF 525
Options Output Range Minimum Output Value Maximum Output Value =
t089 [Analog Out High]
Filter
(1)
(1) Filter A is a single pole digital filter with a 162 ms time constant. Given a 0...100% step input from a steady state, the output of Filter A takes 500 ms to get to 95% of maximum, 810 ms to get to 99%,
and 910 ms to get to 100%.
Related
Parameter
0 OutFreq 0-10 0-10V 0V = 0 Hz [Maximum Freq] None b001
1 OutCurr 0-10 0-10V 0V = 0 A 200% Drive Rated Current Filter A b003
2 OutVolt 0-10 0-10V 0V = 0 V 120% Drive Rated Output Volts None b004
3 OutPowr 0-10 0-10V 0V = 0 kW 200% Drive Rated Power Filter A b017
4 OutTorq 0-10 0-10V 0V = 0 A 200% Drive Rated Current Filter A d382
5 TstData 0-10 0-10V 0V = 0000 65535 (Hex FFFF) None
6 Setpnt 0-10 0-10V 0V = 0% 100.0% Setpoint setting None t090
7 DCVolt 0-10 0-10V 0V = 0V 100.0% of trip value None b005
8 OutFreq 0-20 0-20 mA 0 mA = 0 Hz [Maximum Freq] None b001
9 OutCurr 0-20 0-20 mA 0 mA = 0 A 200% Drive Rated Current Filter A b003
10 OutVolt 0-20 0-20 mA 0 mA = 0 V 120% Drive Rated Output Volts None b004
11 OutPowr 0-20 0-20 mA 0 mA = 0 kW 200% Drive Rated Power Filter A b017
12 OutTorq 0-20 0-20 mA 0 mA = 0 A 200% Drive Rated Current Filter A d382
13 TstData 0-20 0-20 mA 0 mA = 0000 65535 (Hex FFFF) None
14 Setpnt 0-20 0-20 mA 0 mA = 0% 100.0% Setpoint setting None t090
15 DCVolt 0-20 0-20 mA 0 mA = 0V 100.0% of trip value None b005
16 OutFreq 4-20 4-20 mA 4 mA = 0 Hz [Maximum Freq] None b001
17 OutCurr 4-20 4-20 mA 4 mA = 0 A 200% Drive Rated Current Filter A b003
18 OutVolt 4-20 4-20 mA 4 mA = 0 V 120% Drive Rated Output Volts None b004
19 OutPowr 4-20 4-20 mA 4 mA = 0 kW 200% Drive Rated Power Filter A b017
20 OutTorq 4-20 4-20 mA 4 mA = 0 A 200% Drive Rated Current Filter A d382
21 TstData 4-20 4-20 mA 4 mA = 0000 65535 (Hex FFFF) None
22 Setpnt 4-20 4-20 mA 4 mA = 0% 100.0% Setpoint setting None t090
23 DCVolt 4-20 4-20 mA 4 mA = 0V 100.0% of trip value None b005
t089 [Analog Out High]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Scales the maximum output value (V or mA) when the source setting is at maximum.
Values Default: 100%
Min/Max: 0/800%
Display: 1%
PF 525
t090 [Anlg Out Setpt] Related Parameter(s): t088
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the percentage of output desired when t088 [Analog Out Sel] is set to 6, 14 or 22 Analog Setpoint.
Values Default: 0.0%
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
PF 525
t091 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] Related Parameter(s): P043, t092, t093
Sets the percentage (based on 10V) of input voltage applied to the 0-10V analog input used to represent P043 [Minimum Freq].
Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value larger than t092 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi].
If t093 [10V Bipolar Enbl] is set to 1 Bi-Polar In, this parameter is ignored.
Min/Max: 0.0/200.0%
Display: 0.1%
t092 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] Related Parameter(s): P044, t091, t093
Sets the percentage (based on 10V) of input voltage applied to the 0-10V analog input used to represent P044 [Maximum Freq].
Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value smaller than t091 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo].
If t093 [10V Bipolar Enbl] is set to 1 Bi-Polar In, the same value applies to positive and negative voltage.
Min/Max: 0.0/200.0%
Display: 0.1%
t093 [10V Bipolar Enbl] Related Parameter(s): t091, t092
PowerFlex 525 only.
Enables/disables bi-polar control. In bi-polar mode direction is commanded by the polarity of the voltage.
If bi-polar control is enabled, P043 [Minimum Freq] and t091 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] are ignored.
Options 0 Uni-Polar In (Default) 0-10V only
1 Bi-Polar In 10V
PF 525
t094 [Anlg In V Loss] Related Parameter(s): P043, P044, A426, A427
Sets the response to a loss of input. When the 0-10V input (or 10 to +10V) is used for any reference, any input less than 1V is reported as a signal loss. Input must exceed 1.5V for the
signal loss condition to end.
If enabled, this function affects any input that is being used as a speed reference, PID reference or PID setpoint in the drive.
Options 0 Disabled (Default)
1 Fault (F29)
2 Stop
3 Zero Ref
4 Min Freq Ref
5 Max Freq Ref
6 Key Freq Ref
7 MOP Freq Ref
8 Continu Last
t095 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo] Related Parameter(s): P043, t096
Sets the percentage (based on 4-20 mA) of input current applied to the 4-20 mA analog input used to represent P043 [Minimum Freq].
Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value larger than t096 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi].
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
t096 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi] Related Parameter(s): P044, t095
Sets the percentage (based on 4-20 mA) of input current applied to the 4-20 mA analog input used to represent P044 [Maximum Freq].
Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value smaller than t095 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo].
Min/Max: 0.0/200.0%
Display: 0.1%
t097 [Anlg In mA Loss] Related Parameter(s): P043, P044, A426, A427
Sets the response to a loss of input. When the 4-20mA input is used for any reference, any input less than 2 mA is reported as a signal loss. Input must exceed 3 mA for the signal loss
condition to end.
If enabled, this function affects any input that is being used as a speed reference or PID reference or PID setpoint in the drive.
1 Fault (F29)
2 Stop
3 Zero Ref
4 Min Freq Ref
5 Max Freq Ref
6 Key Freq Ref
7 MOP Freq Ref
8 Continu Last
t098 [Anlg Loss Delay] Related Parameter(s): t094, t097
Sets the length of time after power-up during which the drive detects no analog signal loss.
Response to an analog signal loss is set in t094 or t097 [Analog In x Loss].
Min/Max: 0.0 /20.0 s
Display: 0.1 s
t099 [Analog In Filter]
Sets the level of additional filtering of the analog input signals. A higher number increases filtering and decreases bandwidth. Each setting doubles the applied filtering (1 = 2x filter, 2
= 4x filter, and so on).
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/14
Display: 1
t100 [Sleep-Wake Sel] Related Parameter(s): t101, t102, t103
Drive sleeps if the appropriate analog input drops below the set t101 [Sleep Level] for the time set in t102 [Sleep Time] and the drive is running. When entering sleep mode the drive
ramps to zero and the run indicator on the keypad display flashes to indicate the drive is in sleep mode.
When the appropriate analog input rises above the set [Wake Level], the drive wakes and ramps to the commanded frequency.
Inversion can be accomplished by setting [Sleep Level] to a higher setting than t103 [Wake Level].
1 0-10V Input Sleep enabled from 0-10V Analog Input 1
2 4-20mA Input Sleep enabled from 4-20 mA Analog Input 2
3 Command Freq Sleep enabled based on drive commanded frequency
ATTENTION: Enabling the Sleep-Wake function can cause unexpected machine operation during the Wake mode. Equipment damage and/or personal injury
can result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. In addition, all applicable local, national and international codes, standards, regulations or
industry guidelines must be considered.
t101 [Sleep Level]
Sets the analog input level the drive must reach to enter sleep mode.
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
t102 [Sleep Time]
Sets the analog input time the drive must stay below to enter sleep mode.
Min/Max: 0.0/600.0 s
Display: 0.1 s
t103 [Wake Level]
Sets the analog input level the drive must reach to wake from sleep mode.
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
t104 [Wake Time]
Sets the analog input time the drive must stay above to wake from sleep mode.
Min/Max: 0.0/600.0 s
Display: 0.1 s
t105 [Safety Open En]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the action when both safety inputs (Safety 1 and Safety 2) are disabled (de-energized no power is applied).
Options 0 FaultEnable (Default)
1 FaultDisable
PF 525
Communications Group
C121 [Comm Write Mode]
Saves parameter values in active drive memory (RAM) or in drive non-volatile memory (EEPROM).
Options 0 Save (Default)
1 RAM only
IMPORTANT Parameter values set prior to setting 1 RAM only are saved in RAM.
ATTENTION: If Automatic Drive Configuration (ADC) is used, this parameter must remain at its default value of 0 Save.
C122 [Cmd Stat Select]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Selects velocity-specific or position/fibers-specific Command and Status Word bit definitions for use over a communication network. See Writing (06) Logic Command Data on page 191
for more information. This parameter cannot be changed when an I/O connection is established through the communication adapter or the drives embedded EtherNet/IP port.
Options 0 Velocity (Default)
1 Position
PF 525
C123 [RS485 Data Rate]
Sets the communications baud rate (bits/second) for the RS485 port. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Options 0 1200
1 2400
2 4800
3 9600 (Default)
4 19,200
5 38,400
C124 [RS485 Node Addr]
Sets the Modbus drive node number (address) for the RS485 port if using a network connection. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Values Default: 100
Min/Max: 1/247
Display: 1
C125 [Comm Loss Action] Related Parameter(s): P045
Sets the drive's response to a loss of connection or excessive communication errors on the RS485 port.
Options 0 Fault (Default)
1 Coast Stop Stops drive using Coast to stop.
2 Stop Stops drive using P045 [Stop Mode] setting.
3 Continu Last Drive continues operating at communication commanded speed saved in RAM.
C126 [Comm Loss Time] Related Parameter(s): C125
Sets the time that the drive remains in communication loss with the RS485 port before taking the action specified in C125 [Comm Loss Action]. See Appendix C for more information.
Min/Max: 0.1/60.0 s
Display: 0.1 s
IMPORTANT This setting is effective only if I/O that controls the drive is transmitted through the RS485 port.
Communications Group (continued)
C127 [RS485 Format]
Determines the details related to the specific Modbus protocol used by the drive. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Options 0 RTU 8-N-1 (Default)
1 RTU 8-E-1
2 RTU 8-O-1
3 RTU 8-N-2
4 RTU 8-E-2
5 RTU 8-O-2
C128 [EN Addr Sel] Related Parameter(s): C129-C132, C133-C136, C137-C140
PowerFlex 525 only.
Enables the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set with a BOOTP server. Identifies the connections that would be attempted on a reset or power cycle. A reset or power
cycle is required after selection is made.
Options 1 Parameters
2 BOOTP (Default)
PF 525
C129 [EN IP Addr Cfg 1] Related Parameter(s): C128
C130 [EN IP Addr Cfg 2]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the bytes in the IP address. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/255
Display: 1
PF 525
192.168.1.62
[EN IP Addr Cfg 1]
[EN IP Addr Cfg 2]
[EN IP Addr Cfg 3]
[EN IP Addr Cfg 4]
IMPORTANT C128 [EN Addr Sel] must be set to 1 Parameters.
C133 [EN Subnet Cfg 1] Related Parameter(s): C128
C134 [EN Subnet Cfg 2]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the bytes of the subnet mask. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/255
Display: 1
PF 525
255.255.255.0
[EN Subnet Cfg 1]
[EN Subnet Cfg 2]
[EN Subnet Cfg 3]
[EN Subnet Cfg 4]
C137 [EN Gateway Cfg 1] Related Parameter(s): C128
C138 [EN Gateway Cfg 2]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the bytes of the gateway address. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/255
Display: 1
PF 525
192.168.1.1
[EN Gateway Cfg 1]
[EN Gateway Cfg 2]
[EN Gateway Cfg 3]
[EN Gateway Cfg 4]
C141 [EN Rate Cfg]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the network data rate at which EtherNet/IP communicates. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Options 0 Auto detect (Default)
1 10Mbps Full
2 10Mbps Half
3 100Mbps Full
4 100Mbps Half
PF 525
C143 [EN Comm Flt Actn] Related Parameter(s): P045, C145, C146, C147-C150
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the action that the EtherNet/IP interface and drive takes if the EtherNet/IP interface detects that Ethernet communications have been disrupted.
1 Stop Drive stops per P045 [Stop Mode] setting.
2 Zero Data Note: The Reference and Datalink values transmitted to the drive will be set to 0.
3 Hold Last Note: The Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink values transmitted to the drive will be held at their last value.
4 Send Flt Cfg Note: The Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink values will be transmitted to the drive as configured in C145, C146, and
C147...C150.
PF 525
IMPORTANT This setting is effective only if I/O that controls the drive is transmitted through the EtherNet/IP interface.
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter C143 [EN Comm Flt Actn] lets you determine the action of the EtherNet/IP interface and
connected drive if communications are disrupted. By default, this parameter faults the drive. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run.
Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning the drive,
verify that your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, a disconnected drive).
C144 [EN Idle Flt Actn] Related Parameter(s): P045, C145, C146, C147-C150
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the action that the EtherNet/IP interface and drive takes if the EtherNet/IP interface detects that the scanner is idle because the controller was switched to program mode.
1 Stop Drive stops per P045 [Stop Mode] setting.
2 Zero Data Note: The Reference and Datalink values transmitted to the drive will be set to 0.
3 Hold Last Note: The Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink values transmitted to the drive will be held at their last value.
4 Send Flt Cfg Note: The Logic Command, Reference, and Datalink values will be transmitted to the drive as configured in C145, C146, and
C147...C150.
PF 525
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter C144 [EN Idle Flt Actn] lets you determine the action of the EtherNet/IP interface and
connected drive if the scanner is idle. By default, this parameter faults the drive. you can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions
should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage. When commissioning the drive, verify that
your system responds correctly to various situations (for example, a disconnected drive).
C145 [EN Flt Cfg Logic] Related Parameter(s): C143, C144
32 bit parameter.
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the Logic Command data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true:
C143 [EN Comm Flt Actn] is set to 4 Send Flt Cfg and communications are disrupted.
C144 [EN Idle Flt Actn] is set to 4 Send Flt Cfg and the scanner is put into Program or Test mode.
See Writing (06) Logic Command Data on page 191 for more information.
Values Default: 0000
Min/Max: 0000/FFFF
Display: 0000
32
PF 525
C146 [EN Flt Cfg Ref] Related Parameter(s): C143, C144
32 bit parameter.
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the Reference data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true:
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/50000
Display: 1
32
PF 525
C147 [EN Flt Cfg DL 1]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the Ethernet Datalink Input data that is sent to the drive if any of the following is true:
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/65535
Display: 1
PF 525
C153 [EN Data In 1]
C154 [EN Data In 2]
C155 [EN Data In 3]
C156 [EN Data In 4]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Datalink parameter number whose value is written from the embedded EtherNet/IP data table. This parameter cannot be changed when an I/O connection is established through the
drives embedded EtherNet/IP port.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/800
Display: 1
PF 525
C157 [EN Data Out 1]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Datalink parameter number whose value is read from the embedded EtherNet/IP data table. This parameter cannot be changed when an I/O connection is established through the
drives embedded EtherNet/IP port.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/800
Display: 1
PF 525
C161 [Opt Data In 1]
Datalink parameter number whose value is written from the High Speed Drive Serial Interface (HSDSI) data table. This parameter cannot be changed when an I/O connection is
established through the communication adapter.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/800
Display: 1
C165 [Opt Data Out 1]
Datalink parameter number whose value is read from the HSDSI data table. This parameter cannot be changed when an I/O connection is established through the communication
adapter.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/800
Display: 1
C169 [MultiDrv Sel]
Sets the configuration of the drive that is in multi-drive mode. A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Options 0 Disabled (Default) No multi-drive master from the internal network option module or embedded Ethernet port. The drive can still function as a
multi-drive slave or as a single drive (no multi-drive used).
1 Network Opt Multi-drive is enabled with the internal network option as a multi-drive master. The host drive is Drive 0 and up to four slave
drives can be daisy-chained from its RS485 port.
2 EtherNet/IP
(1)
Multi-drive is enabled with the embedded Ethernet port as the multi-drive master. The host drive is Drive 0 and up to four slave
drives can be daisy-chained from its RS485 port.
C171 [Drv 1 Addr] Related Parameter(s): C169
C172 [Drv 2 Addr]
C173 [Drv 3 Addr]
C174 [Drv 4 Addr]
Sets the corresponding node addresses of the daisy-chained drives when C169 [MultiDrv Sel] is set to 1 Network Opt or 2 EtherNet/IP. A reset or power cycle is required after
selection is made.
Values Default:
Drv 1 Addr:
Drv 2 Addr:
Drv 3 Addr:
Drv 4 Addr:
2
3
4
5
Min/Max: 1/247
Display: 1
C175 [DSI I/O Cfg]
Sets the configuration of the Drives that are active in the multi-drive mode. Identifies the connections that would be attempted on a reset or power cycle. A reset or power cycle is
required after selection is made.
Options 0 Drive 0 (Default)
1 Drive 0-1
2 Drive 0-2
3 Drive 0-3
4 Drive 0-4
Logic Group
L180 [Stp Logic 0]
L182 [Stp Logic 2]
L184 [Stp Logic 4]
L186 [Stp Logic 6]
L181 [Stp Logic 1] Related Parameter(s):
L183 [Stp Logic 3]
L185 [Stp Logic 5]
L187 [Stp Logic 7]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Values Default: 00F1
Min/Max: 0000/FAFF
Display 0001
See Appendix D and Appendix E for more information on applying Step Logic and Position StepLogic.
Parameters L180...L187 are only active if P047, P049, or P051 [Speed Referencex] is set to 13 Step Logic or 16 Positioning. These parameters can be used to create a custom profile of
frequency commands. Each step can be based on time, status of a Logic input or a combination of time and the status of a Logic input.
Digits 1...4 for each [Stp Logic x] parameter must be programmed according to the desired profile. A Logic input is established by setting a digital input, parameters t062, t063,
t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] to 24 Logic In 1 and/or 25 Logic In 2 or by using Bits 6 and 7 of A560 [Enh Control Word].
A time interval between steps can be programmed using parameters L190...L197 [Stp Logic Time x]. See the table below for related parameters.
The speed for any step is programmed using parameters A410...A417 [Preset Freq x].
The position for any step is programmed using parameters L200...L214 [Step Units x].
How StepLogic Works
The StepLogic sequence begins with a valid start command. A normal sequence always begins with L180 [Stp Logic 0].
Digit 1: Logic for next step
This digit defines the logic for the next step. When the condition is met the program advances to the next step. Step 0 follows Step 7. Example: Digit 1 is set to 3. When Logic In 2
becomes active, the program advances to the next step.
Digit 2: Logic to jump to a different step
For all settings other than F, when the condition is met, the program overrides Digit 0 and jumps to the step defined by Digit 3.
Digit 3: Different step to jump
When the condition for Digit 2 is met, this digit setting determines the next step or to end the program.
Digit 4: Step settings
This digit defines additional characteristics of each step.
Any StepLogic parameter can be programmed to control a relay or opto output, but you can not control different outputs based on the condition of different StepLogic commands.
PF 525
Step StepLogic Parameter Related Preset Frequency Parameter
(Can be activated independent of StepLogic Parameters)
Related StepLogic Time Parameter
(Active when L180...L187 Digit 1 or 2 are set to 1, b, C, d or E)
0 L180 [Stp Logic 0] A410 [Preset Freq 0] L190 [Stp Logic Time 0]
Step StepLogic Position Parameter
0 L200 [Step Units 0] & L201 [Step Units F 0]
StepLogic Settings
The logic for each function is determined by the four digits for each StepLogic parameter. The following is a listing of the available settings for each digit. See Appendix D for more
information.

Logic for next step Digit 1
Logic to jump to a different step Digit 2
Different step to jump Digit 3
Step settings Digit 4
Not Used
Velocity Control Settings (Digit 4)
Required
Setting
Accel/Decel
Param. Used
StepLogic
Output State
Commanded
Direction
0 Accel/Decel 1 Off FWD
1 Accel/Decel 1 Off REV
2 Accel/Decel 1 Off No Output
3 Accel/Decel 1 On FWD
4 Accel/Decel 1 On REV
5 Accel/Decel 1 On No Output
A Accel/Decel 2 On REV
b Accel/Decel 2 On No Output
Positioning Settings (Digit 4)
Required
Setting
Accel/Decel
Param. Used
StepLogic
Output State
Direction
From Home
Type of
Command
0 Accel/Decel 1 Off FWD Absolute
1 Accel/Decel 1 Off FWD Incremental
2 Accel/Decel 1 Off REV Absolute
3 Accel/Decel 1 Off REV Incremental
4 Accel/Decel 1 On FWD Absolute
5 Accel/Decel 1 On FWD Incremental
6 Accel/Decel 1 On REV Absolute
7 Accel/Decel 1 On REV Incremental
A Accel/Decel 2 Off REV Absolute
b Accel/Decel 2 Off REV Incremental
C Accel/Decel 2 On FWD Absolute
d Accel/Decel 2 On FWD Incremental
E Accel/Decel 2 On REV Absolute
F Accel/Decel 2 On REV Incremental
Settings (Digit 3)
Setting Description
0 Jump to Step 0
1 Jump to Step 1
2 Jump to Step 2
3 Jump to Step 3
4 Jump to Step 4
5 Jump to Step 5
6 Jump to Step 6
7 Jump to Step 7
8 End Program (Normal Stop)
9 End Program (Coast to Stop)
A End Program and Fault (F2)
Settings (Digit 2 and 1)
Setting Description
0 Skip Step (Jump Immediately)
1 Step Based on [Stp Logic Time x]
2 Step if Logic In 1 is Active
4 Step if Logic In 1 is Not Active
6 Step if either Logic In 1 or Logic In 2 is Active
7 Step if both Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 are Active
8 Step if neither Logic In 1 nor Logic In 2 is Active
9 Step if Logic In 1 is Active and Logic In 2 is Not Active
A Step if Logic In 2 is Active and Logic In 1 is Not Active
b Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 1 is Active
C Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 2 is Active
d Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 1 is Not Active
E Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 2 is Not Active
F Do Not Step/Ignore Digit 2 Settings
Logic Group (continued)
L190 [Stp Logic Time 0]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the time to remain in each step if the corresponding command word is set to Step based on time.
Min/Max: 0.0/999.9 s
Display: 0.1 s
PF 525
L200 [Step Units 0]
L204 [Step Units 2]
L208 [Step Units 4]
L212 [Step Units 6]
L202 [Step Units 1]
L206 [Step Units 3]
L210 [Step Units 5]
L214 [Step Units 7]
32 bit parameter.
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the position in user-defined units the drive must reach at each step.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/6400
Display: 1
32
PF 525
Advanced Display Group
d360 [Analog In 0-10V] Related Parameter(s): t091, t092
Displays the 0-10V analog input as a percent of full scale.
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
d361 [Analog In 4-20mA] Related Parameter(s): t095, t096
Displays the 4-20 mA analog input as a percent of full scale.
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
d362 [Elapsed Time-hr] Related Parameter(s): A555
Displays the total elapsed powered-up time (in hours) since timer reset. The timer stops when it reaches the maximum value.
Min/Max: 0/32767 hr
Display: 1 hr
d363 [Elapsed Time-min] Related Parameter(s): d362, A555
Displays the total elapsed powered-up time (in minutes) since timer reset. Resets to zero when maximum value is reached and increments d362 [Elapsed Time-hr] by one.
Min/Max: 0.0/60.0 min
Display: 0.1 min
d364 [Counter Status]
Displays the current value of the counter if enabled.
Min/Max: 0/65535
Display: 1
d365 [Timer Status]
32 bit parameter.
Displays the current value of the timer if enabled.
Min/Max: 0/9999 s
Display: 1 s
32
d367 [Drive Type]
Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel.
Min/Max: 0/65535
Display: 1
Advanced Display Group (continued)
d368 [Testpoint Data] Related Parameter(s): A483
Displays the present value of the function selected in A483 [Testpoint Sel].
Min/Max: 0/FFFF
Display: 1
d369 [Motor OL Level]
Displays the motor overload counter.
Min/Max: 0.0/150.0%
Display: 0.1%
d375 [Slip Hz Meter] Related Parameter(s): P032
Displays the current amount of slip or droop (absolute value) being applied to the motor frequency. Drives applies slip based on the setting for P032 [Motor NP Hertz].
Min/Max: 0.0/25.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
d376 [Speed Feedback]
32 bit parameter.
Displays the value of the actual motor speed whether measured by encoder/pulse train feedback or estimated.
Display: 1 rpm
32
d378 [Encoder Speed]
32 bit parameter.
PowerFlex 525 only.
Provides a monitoring point that reflects the speed measured from the feedback device. This shows the encoder or pulse train speed even if not used directly to control motor speed.
Display: 1 rpm
32
PF 525
d380 [DC Bus Ripple]
Displays the real-time value of the DC bus ripple voltage.
Min/Max: 0/410VDC for 230V AC drives; 820VDC for 460VAC drives; 1025VDC for 600VAC drives
Display: 1V DC
d381 [Output Powr Fctr]
Displays the angle in electrical degrees between motor voltage and motor current.
Min/Max: 0.0/180.0 deg
Display: 0.1 deg
d382 [Torque Current]
Displays the current value of the motor torque current measured by the drive.
Display: 0.01 A
d383 [PID1 Fdbk Displ]
d385 [PID2 Fdbk Displ]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the active PID Feedback value.
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
PF 525
d384 [PID1 Setpnt Disp]
d386 [PID2 Setpnt Disp]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the active PID Setpoint value.
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
PF 525
d387 [Position Status]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the present operating condition of the drive. When in Positioning mode, Bit 1 indicates positive or negative position in relation to Home.
Min/Max: 0000/1111
Display: 0000
PF 525

1 = Condition True, 0 = Condition False
Dir Positive Digit 1
At Position Digit 2
At Home Digit 3
Drive Homed Digit 4
Not Used
d388 [Units Traveled H] Related Parameter(s): d387
32 bit parameter.
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the number of user-defined units traveled from the home position. See d387 [Position Status] for direction of travel.
Min/Max: 0/64000
Display: 1
32
PF 525
d389 [Units Traveled L] Related Parameter(s): d387
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the number of user-defined units traveled from the home position. See d387 [Position Status] for direction of travel.
Min/Max: 0.00/0.99
Display: 0.01
PF 525
d390 [Fiber Status]
Present status of the Fibers features.
Min/Max: 0000/1111
Display: 0000

Sync Hold Digit 1
Sync Ramp Digit 2
Traverse On Digit 3
Traverse Dec Digit 4
Not Used
d391 [Stp Logic Status] Related Parameter(s): P047, L180-L187
32 bit parameter.
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the current step of the Step Logic profile as defined by parameters L180...L187 [Step Logic x] when P047 [Speed Reference1] is set to 13 Step Logic or 16 Positioning.
Min/Max: 0/8
Display: 1
32
PF 525
d392 [RdyBit Mode Act] Related Parameter(s): A574
PowerFlex 525 only.
(With FRN 3.xxx and later.)
Displays the value of A574 [RdyBit Mode Cfg].
Min/Max: 0/1
Display: 1
PF 525
Advanced Program Group
A410 [Preset Freq 0]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the frequency of the drive outputs to the programmed value when selected.
Values Defaults:
Preset Freq 0:
Preset Freq 1:
Preset Freq 2:
Preset Freq 3:
Preset Freq 4:
Preset Freq 5:
Preset Freq 6:
Preset Freq 7...15:
0.00 Hz
5.00 Hz
10.00 HZ
20.00 Hz
30.00 Hz
40.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
60.00 Hz
Min/Max: 0.00/500.00 Hz
Display: 0.01 Hz
PF 525
For PowerFlex 525
Default Accel/Decel Used Preset Input 1
(DigIn TermBlk 05)
Preset Input 2
(DigIn TermBlk 06)
Preset Input 3
(DigIn TermBlk 07)
Preset Input 4
(DigIn TermBlk 08)
Preset Setting 0
(1)
(1) Preset Setting 0 is only available if P047, P049 or P051 [Speed Referencex] is set to 7 Preset Freq.
1 0 0 0 0
Preset Setting 1 1 1 0 0 0
For PowerFlex 523
Default Accel/Decel Used Preset Input 1
(DigIn TermBlk 05)
Preset Input 2
(DigIn TermBlk 06)
Preset Input 3
(DigIn TermBlk 03)
Preset Setting 0
(1)
1 0 0 0
Preset Setting 1 1 1 0 0
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A426 [Keypad Freq] Related Parameter(s): P047, P049, P051
Provides the drive frequency command using the built-in keypad navigation. When P047, P049 or P051 [Speed Referencex] selects 2 Keypad Freq, the value set in this parameter
controls the frequency of the drive. The value of this parameter can also be changed when navigating with the keypad by pressing the Up or Down arrow keys.
Min/Max: 0.00/500.00 Hz
Display: 0.01 Hz
A427 [MOP Freq]
Provides the drive frequency command using the built-in Motor Operated Potentiometer (MOP).
Min/Max: 0.00/500.00 Hz
Display: 0.01 Hz
IMPORTANT
Frequency is not written to non-volatile storage until drive is powered-down. If both MOP Up and MOP Down are applied at the same time, the inputs are
ignored and the frequency is unchanged.
A428 [MOP Reset Sel]
Determines if the current MOP reference command is saved on power down.
Options 0 Zero MOP Ref Resets the MOP frequency to zero on power down and stop.
1 Save MOP Ref (Default)
A429 [MOP Preload]
Determines the operation of the MOP function.
Options 0 No preload (Default)
1 Preload Bumpless Transfer: whenever MOP mode is selected, the current output value of the speed is loaded.
A430 [MOP Time]
Sets the rate of change of the MOP reference.
Min/Max: 0.1/600.0 s
Display: 0.1 s
A431 [Jog Frequency] Related Parameter(s): P044
Sets the output frequency when a jog command is issued.
Display: 0.01 Hz
A432 [Jog Accel/Decel]
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time used when in jog mode.
Min/Max: 0.01/600.00 s
Display: 0.01 s
A433 [Purge Frequency] Related Parameter(s): t062, t063, t065-t068
Provides a fixed frequency command value when t062, t063, t065-t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] is set to 40 Purge.
Min/Max: 0.00/500.00 Hz
Display: 0.01 Hz
A434 [DC Brake Time] Related Parameter(s): P045, A435
Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor.
Min/Max: 0.0/99.9 s
Display: 0.1 s
A435 [DC Brake Level] Related Parameter(s): P045
Defines the maximum DC brake current, in amps, applied to the motor when P045 [Stop Mode] is set to either 4 Ramp or 6 DC Brake.
Values Default: Drive Rated Amps x 0.05
Min/Max: 0.00/(Drive Rated Amps x 1.80)
Display: 0.01 A
DC Injection Stop Mode
V
o
l
t
s
/
S
p
e
e
d
Voltage
Time
Stop Command
Speed
[DC Brake Time]
V
o
l
t
s
/
S
p
e
e
d
Ramp-to-Stop Mode
Time
Stop Command
Magnitude
depends on
[DC Brake Level]
Magnitude
depends on
[DC Brake Level]
[DC Brake Time]
V
o
l
t
a
g
e
S
p
e
e
d
ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used. This feature should
not be used with synchronous motors. Motors may be demagnetized during braking.
A436 [DC Brk Time@Strt] Related Parameter(s): P045, A435
Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor after a valid start command is received.
Min/Max: 0.0/99.9 s
Display: 0.1 s
V
o
l
t
s
/
S
p
e
e
d
Time
Start Command
[DC Brake Level]
[DC Brk Time@Strt]
V
o
lt
a
g
e
S
p
e
e
d
A437 [DB Resistor Sel]
Enables/disables external dynamic braking and selects the level of resistor protection.
1 Norml RA Res 5%
2 NoProtection 100%
3...99 3...99% DutyCycle
A438 [DB Threshold] Related Parameter(s): A437
Sets the DC bus voltage threshold for Dynamic Brake operation. If DC bus voltage rises above this level, Dynamic Brake turns on. Lower values makes the dynamic braking function more
responsive but may result in nuisance Dynamic Brake activation.
Min/Max: 10.0/110.0%
Display: 0.1%
ATTENTION: Equipment damage may result if this parameter is set to a value that causes the dynamic braking resistor to dissipate excessive power. Parameter
settings less than 100% should be carefully evaluated to ensure that the Dynamic Brake resistor's wattage rating is not exceeded. In general, values less than
90% are not needed. This parameter's setting is especially important if parameter A437 [DB Resistor Sel] is set to 2 NoProtection.
A439 [S Curve %]
Enables a fixed shape S-Curve that is applied to the acceleration and deceleration ramps (including jog).
S-Curve Time = (Accel or Decel Time) x (S-Curve Setting in percentage)
Values Default: 0%
Min/Max: 0/100%
Display: 1%
S-Curve Time
Total Time to Accelerate = Accel Time + S-Curve Time
50% S-Curve
Target
vel
Target
vel/2
S-Curve Time = Accel Time
Total Time to Accelerate = Accel Time + S-Curve Time
100% S-Curve
Target
vel
Example:
Accel Time = 10 s
S-Curve Setting = 30%
S-Curve Time = 10 x 0.3 = 3 s
A440 [PWM Frequency] Related Parameter(s): A540
Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform. The chart below provides derating guidelines based on the PWM frequency setting.
Values Default: 4.0 kHz
Min/Max: 2.0/16.0 kHz
Display: 0.1 kHz
%

O
u
t
p
u
t

C
u
r
e
n
t

(
A
)
68
84
88
80
76
96
100
92
72
64
60
56
50
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 16 13 12 11 10 9
IMPORTANT
Ignoring derating guidelines can cause reduced drive performance. The drive may automatically reduce the PWM carrier frequency at low output speeds,
unless prevented from doing so by A540 [Var PWM Disable].
A441 [Droop Hertz@ FLA]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Reduces the frequency based on current. This frequency is subtracted from the commanded output frequency. Generally Slip and Droop would not both be used, but if both are enabled
they simply subtract from each other. Typically used in load sharing schemes.
Display: 0.1 Hz
PF 525
A442 [Accel Time 2] Related Parameter(s): P044
Time for the drive to ramp from 0.0 Hz to P044 [Maximum Freq] if Accel Time 2 is selected.
Accel Rate = [Maximum Freq] / [Accel Time]
Min/Max: 0.00/600.00 s
Display: 0.01 s
Speed
0
Time
[Maximum Freq]
0
A
c
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
D
e
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
A443 [Decel Time 2] Related Parameter(s): P044
Time for the drive to ramp from P044 [Maximum Freq] to 0.0 Hz if Decel Time 2 is selected.
Decel Rate = [Maximum Freq] / [Decel Time]
Min/Max: 0.00/600.00 s
Display: 0.01 s
A444 [Accel Time 3]
A446 [Accel Time 4]
Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases when selected by digital inputs.
Min/Max: 0.00/600.00 s
Display: 0.01 s
A445 [Decel Time 3]
A447 [Decel Time 4]
Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases when selected by digital inputs.
Min/Max: 0.00/600.00 s
Display: 0.01 s
A448 [Skip Frequency 1] Related Parameter(s): A449, A451, A453, A455
A450 [Skip Frequency 2]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Works in conjunction with A449, A451, A453 and A455 [Skip Freq Band x] creating a range of frequencies at which the drive does not operate continuously.
Values Default: 0.0 Hz (Disabled)
Min/Max: 0.0/500.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
PF 525
A449 [Skip Freq Band 1] Related Parameter(s): A448, A450, A452, A454
A451 [Skip Freq Band 2]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines the band around A448, A450, A452 and A454 [Skip Frequency x].
Display: 0.1 Hz
PF 525
Frequency
Time
Skip Frequency
Command
Frequency
Drive Output
Frequency
2x Skip
Frequency Band
A456 [PID 1 Trim Hi]
A468 [PID 2 Trim Hi]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Scales the upper value of the trim frequency when trim is active.
Min/Max: 0.0/500.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
PF 525
A457 [PID 1 Trim Lo]
A469 [PID 2 Trim Lo]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Scales the lower value of the trim frequency when trim is active.
Min/Max: 0.0/500.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
PF 525
A458 [PID 1 Trim Sel]
A470 [PID 2 Trim Sel]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the PID output as trim to the source reference.
Options 0 Disabled (Default) PID Trim is disabled.
1 TrimOn Pot
2 TrimOn Keypd
3 TrimOn DSI
4 TrimOn NetOp
5 TrimOn 0-10V
6 TrimOn 4-20
7 TrimOn Prset
8 TrimOn AnMlt
(1)
9 TrimOn MOP
10 TrimOn Pulse
11 TrimOn Slgic
(1)
12 TrimOn Encdr
(1)
13 TrimOn ENet
(1)
PF 525
A459 [PID 1 Ref Sel]
A471 [PID 2 Ref Sel]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Selects the source of the PID reference.
Options 0 PID Setpoint (Default)
1 Drive Pot
2 Keypad Freq
3 Serial/DSI
4 Network Opt
5 0-10V Input
6 4-20mA Input
7 Preset Freq
8 AnlgIn Multi
(1)
9 MOP Freq
10 Pulse Input
11 Step Logic
(1)
12 Encoder
(1)
13 EtherNet/IP
(1)
PF 525
A460 [PID 1 Fdback Sel]
A472 [PID 2 Fdback Sel]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Selects the source of the PID feedback.
Options 0 0-10V Input (Default) Note: PID does not function with bipolar input. Negative voltages are ignored and treated as zero.
1 4-20mA Input
2 Serial/DSI
3 Network Opt
4 Pulse Input
5 Encoder
(1)
6 EtherNet/IP
(1)
PF 525
A461 [PID 1 Prop Gain] Related Parameter(s): A459, A471
A473 [PID 2 Prop Gain]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the value for the PID proportional component when the PID mode is enabled.
Min/Max: 0.00/99.99
Display: 0.01
PF 525
A462 [PID 1 Integ Time] Related Parameter(s): A459, A471
A474 [PID 2 Integ Time]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the value for the PID integral component when PID mode is enabled.
Min/Max: 0.0/999.9 s
Display: 0.1 s
PF 525
A463 [PID 1 Diff Rate] Related Parameter(s): A459, A471
A475 [PID 2 Diff Rate]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the value (in 1/second) for the PID differential component when PID mode is enabled.
Min/Max: 0.00/99.99
Display: 0.01
PF 525
A464 [PID 1 Setpoint] Related Parameter(s): A459, A471
A476 [PID 2 Setpoint]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Provides an internal fixed value for process setpoint when PID mode is enabled.
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
PF 525
A465 [PID 1 Deadband]
A477 [PID 2 Deadband]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the lower limit of the PID output.
Min/Max: 0.0/10.0%
Display: 0.1%
PF 525
A466 [PID 1 Preload]
A478 [PID 2 Preload]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the value used to preload the integral component on start or enable.
Min/Max: 0.0/500.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
PF 525
A467 [PID 1 Invert Err]
A479 [PID 2 Invert Err]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Changes the sign of the PID error.
Options 0 Normal (Default)
1 Inverted
PF 525
A481 [Process Disp Lo] Related Parameter(s): b010, P043
Sets the value displayed in b010 [Process Display] when the drive is running at P043 [Minimum Freq].
Min/Max: 0.00/99.99
Display: 0.01
A482 [Process Disp Hi] Related Parameter(s): b010, P044
Sets the value displayed in b010 [Process Display] when the drive is running at P044 [Maximum Freq].
Min/Max: 0.00/99.99
Display: 0.01
A483 [Testpoint Sel]
Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel.
Values Default: 400
Min/Max: 0/FFFF
Display: 1
A484 [Current Limit 1] Related Parameter(s): P033
Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs.
Values Default: Drive Rated Amps x 1.1 (Normal Duty); Drive Rated Amps x 1.5 (Heavy Duty)
Min/Max: 0.0/Drive Rated Amps x 1.5 (Normal Duty); Drive Rated Amps x 1.8 (Heavy Duty)
Display: 0.1 A
A485 [Current Limit 2] Related Parameter(s): P033
PowerFlex 525 only.
Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs.
Values Default: Drive Rated Amps x 1.1
Min/Max: 0.0/Drive Rated Amps x 1.5 (Normal Duty); Drive Rated Amps x 1.8 (Heavy Duty)
Display: 0.1 A
PF 525
A486 [Shear Pin1 Level] Related Parameter(s): A487, A489
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the value of current at which the shear pin fault occurs after the time set in A487, A489 [Shear Pin x Time]. Setting the value at 0.0 A disables this function.
Values Default: 0.0 A (Disabled)
Display: 0.1 A
PF 525
A487 [Shear Pin 1 Time] Related Parameter(s): A486, A488
A489 [Shear Pin 2 Time]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the continuous time the drive must be at or above the value set in A486, A488 [Shear Pinx Level] before a shear pin fault occurs.
Min/Max: 0.00/30.00 s
Display: 0.01 s
PF 525
A490 [Load Loss Level] Related Parameter(s): A491
PowerFlex 525 only.
Provides a software trip (Load Loss fault) when the current drops below this level for the time specified in A491 [Load Loss Time].
Values Default: 0.0 A
Min/Max: 0.0/Drive Rated Amps
Display: 0.1 A
PF 525
A491 [Load Loss Time] Related Parameter(s): A490
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the required time for the current to be below A490 [Load Loss Level] before a Load Loss fault occurs.
Values Default: 0 s
Min/Max: 0/9999 s
Display: 1 s
PF 525
A492 [Stall Fault Time]
Sets the time that the drive remains in stall mode before a fault is issued.
Options 0 60 Seconds (Default)
1 120 Seconds
2 240 Seconds
3 360 Seconds
4 480 Seconds
5 Flt Disabled
A493 [Motor OL Select] Related Parameter(s): P032, P033
Drive provides Class 10 overload protection. Settings 0...2 select the derating factor for the I
2
t overload function.
Options 0 No Derate (Default)
1 Min. Derate
2 Max. Derate
Min Derate
0
80
100
60
40
20
%

o
f

[
M
o
t
o
r

O
L

C
u
r
e
n
t
]
No Derate
0
80
100
60
40
20
% of [Motor NP Hertz]
%

o
f

[
M
o
t
o
r

O
L

C
u
r
e
n
t
]
%

o
f

[
M
o
t
o
r

O
L

C
u
r
e
n
t
]
Max Derate
0
80
100
60
40
20
0 200 175 150 125 100 75 50 25 0 200 175 150 125 100 75 50 25 0 200 175 150 125 100 75 50 25
A494 [Motor OL Ret]
Selects whether the motor overload counter is saved on power-down or reset on power-up.
Options 0 Reset (Default)
1 Save
A495 [Drive OL Mode]
Determines how the drive handles overload conditions that would otherwise cause the drive to fault.
Options 0 Disabled
1 Reduce CLim
2 Reduce PWM
3 Both-PWM 1st (Default)
A496 [IR Voltage Drop] Related Parameter(s): P040
Value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator (autotune) for induction motor.
Min/Max: 0.0/600.0VAC
Display: 0.1VAC
A497 [Flux Current Ref] Related Parameter(s): P040
This is the current necessary for full motor flux. The value should be set to the full speed no-load current of the motor.
Min/Max: 0.00/(Drive Rated Amps x 1.4)
Display: 0.01 A
A498 [Motor Rr]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Rotor resistance of induction motor.
Min/Max: 0.00/655.35 ohm
Display: 0.01 ohm
PF 525
A499 [Motor Lm]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Mutual Inductance of induction motor.
Min/Max: 0.0/6553.5 mH
Display: 0.1 mH
PF 525
A500 [Motor Lx]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Leakage Inductance of induction motor.
Min/Max: 0.0/6553.5 mH
Display: 0.1 mH
PF 525
A509 [Speed Reg Sel] Related Parameter(s): A521, A522, A523, A524, A525, A526
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines if PI gain of the Vector control mode speed regulator is set automatically or manually. Parameters A521...A526 are set automatically by this parameter.
Options 0 Automatic (Default)
1 Manual
PF 525
A510 [Freq 1]
A512 [Freq 2]
A514 [Freq 3]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the Vector control mode frequency.
Values Default:
Freq 1:
Freq 2:
Freq 3:
8.33%
15.00%
20.00%
Min/Max: 0.00/200.00%
Display: 0.01%
PF 525
A511 [Freq 1 BW]
A513 [Freq 2 BW]
A515 [Freq 3 BW]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Speed control loop bandwidth for Vector control mode.
Values Default: 10 Hz
Min/Max: 0/40 Hz
Display: 1 Hz
PF 525
A521 [Freq 1 Kp] Related Parameter(s): A509, A510
A523 [Freq 2 Kp]
A525 [Freq 3 Kp]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets P-gain of Vector control mode when in frequency region 1, 2 or 3 for faster speed response during dynamic-state where motor is still accelerating. If A509 [Speed Reg Sel] is set
to 1 Manual, these parameters can be changed.
Min/Max: 0.0/500.0%
Display: 0.1%
PF 525
A522 [Freq 1 Ki] Related Parameter(s): A509, A510
A524 [Freq 2 Ki]
A526 [Freq 3 Ki]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets I-gain of Vector control mode when in frequency region 1, 2 or 3 for faster speed response during steady-state where motor is at its rated speed. If A509 [Speed Reg Sel] is set to
1 Manual, these parameters can be changed.
Min/Max: 0.000/10.000 s
Display: 0.001 s
PF 525
A530 [Boost Select] Related Parameter(s): b004, P031, P032, P039
Sets the boost voltage (% of P031 [Motor NP Volts]) and redefines the V/Hz curve. Only used for V/Hz and SVC control modes.
Options 0 Custom V/Hz
1 30.0, VT
Fan/Pump Curves (Variable Torque)
2 35.0, VT
3 40.0, VT
4 45.0, VT
5 0.0, no IR
Boost Voltage (% of Base) (Constant Torque)
6 0.0
(Default for 400V and 600V
drives, 5 HP and above)
7 2.5, CT
(Default for 200V drives, 5 HP and
above)
8 5.0, CT
(Default for drives below 5 HP)
9 7.5, CT
10 10.0, CT
11 12.5, CT
12 15.0, CT
13 17.5, CT
14 20.0, CT
% [Motor NP Hertz]
%

[
M
o
t
o
r

N
P

V
o
l
t
s
]
100
50
1/2 [Motor NP Volts]
[Maximum Voltage] can be set anywhere.
If it is > [Motor NP Volts] then it defnes a point on the V/Hz curve
[Maximum Freq] can be set anywhere.
If it is > [Motor NP Hertz] then it defnes a
point on the V/Hz curve
[Maximum Voltage] can be set anywhere.
If it is < [Motor NP Volts] then it functions as a limit only
(does not change the V/Hz curve)
[Maximum Freq] can be set anywhere.
If it is < [Motor NP Hertz] then it functions as a limit only
(does not change the V/Hz curve)
1
/
2
[
M
o
t
o
r
N
P
H
e
r
t
z
]
4
3
2
1
0 50 100
Settings
5...14
A531 [Start Boost] Related Parameter(s): P031, P032, P039, A530
Sets the boost voltage (% of P031 [Motor NP Volts]) and redefines the V/Hz curve when A530 [Boost Select] = 0 Custom V/Hz and P039 [Torque Perf Mode] = 0 V/Hz.
Min/Max: 0.0/25.0%
Display: 0.1%
Frequency
V
o
l
t
a
g
e
[Break Frequency] [Motor NP Hertz]
[Maximum Freq]
[
S
t
a
r
t

B
o
o
s
t
]
[Motor NP Volts]
[Maximum Voltage]
[
B
r
e
a
k

V
o
l
t
a
g
e
]
[Minimum Freq]
A532 [Break Voltage] Related Parameter(s): P031, P032, P039, A530, A533
Sets the voltage (in percent of [Base Frequency]) at the A533 [Break Frequency] if A530 [Boost Select] is set to 0 Custom V/Hz.
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
A533 [Break Frequency] Related Parameter(s): P031, P032, P039, A530, A532
Sets the frequency where A532 [Break Voltage] is applied if A530 [Boost Select] is set to 0 Custom V/Hz.
Min/Max: 0.0/500.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
A534 [Maximum Voltage] Related Parameter(s): b004
Sets the highest voltage the drive outputs.
Values Default: Drive Rated Volts
Min: 10V AC (on 230V AC Drives); 20V AC (on 460V AC Drives); 25V AC (on 600V AC Drives)
Max: 255V AC (on 230V AC Drives); 510V AC (on 460V AC Drives); 637.5V AC (on 600V AC Drives)
Display: 1V AC
A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] Related Parameter(s): A537
PowerFlex 525 only.
Selects the encoder type.
Allowable Control Modes Hardware Inputs
Options 0 None (Default) For all motor types
1 Pulse Train All except Vector [DigIn TermBlk 07]
2 Single Chan All except Vector
Optional incremental encoder card
(catalog number 25-ENC-1)
3 Single Check All except Vector
4 Quadrature For all motor types
5 Quad Check For all motor types
PF 525
ATTENTION: The loss of analog input, encoder or other feedback may cause unintended speed or motion. Take appropriate precautions to guard against
possible unintended speed or motion.
A536 [Encoder PPR]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Specifies the encoder Pulses Per Revolution (PPR) when an encoder is used.
Values Default: 1024 PPR
Min/Max: 1/20000 PPR
Display: 1 PPR
PF 525
Motor Control Mode Recommended Minimum Encoder PPR
Sensorless Vector Control (SVC) 42 x (number of poles/2) [Speed range 100:1] : 84 PPR (4 pole motor)
Velocity Vector Control (VVC) 500 x (number of poles/2) [Speed range 1000:1] : 1000 PPR (4 pole motor)
The maximum encoder pulse is 250 kHz.
A537 [Pulse In Scale] Related Parameter(s): t065, t067, A535
Sets the scale factor/gain for the Pulse Input when t065 or t067 [DigIn TermBlk xx] is set to 52 Pulse Train, or A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] is set to 1 Pulse Train.
Input frequency (Hz) / Pulse in Scale = Output frequency (Hz)
Values Default: 64
Min/Max: 0/20000
Display: 1
A538 [Ki Speed Loop]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the I-gain used in the PI calculation of the speed loop when feedback is used.
Values Default: 2.0
Min/Max: 0.0/400.0
Display: 0.1
PF 525
A539 [Kp Speed Loop]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the P-gain used in the PI calculation of the speed loop when feedback is used.
Values Default: 5.0
Min/Max: 0.0/200.0
Display: 0.1
PF 525
A540 [Var PWM Disable] Related Parameter(s): A440
Enables/disables a feature that varies the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform defined by A440 [PWM Frequency].
Options 0 Enabled (Default)
1 Disabled
A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] Related Parameter(s): A542
Sets the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart. See Chapter 4 for more information on faults and fault codes.
Clear a Type 1 fault and restart the drive.
1. Set A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] to a value other than 0.
2. Set A542 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to a value other than 0.
Clear an OverVoltage, UnderVoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp fault without restarting the drive.
2. Set A542 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to 0.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/9
Display: 1
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without
considering applicable local, national and international codes, standards, regulations or industry guidelines.
A542 [Auto Rstrt Delay] Related Parameter(s): A541
Sets the time between restart attempts if A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is not zero.
Min/Max: 0.0/120.0 s
Display: 0.1 s
A543 [Start At PowerUp]
Enables/disables drive start on power up without a Start command being cycled. Requires a digital input configured for Run or Start and a valid start contact.
1 Enabled
A544 [Reverse Disable] Related Parameter(s): b006
Enables/disables the function that allows the direction of motor rotation to be changed.
Options 0 Rev Enabled (Default)
1 Rev Disabled
A545 [Flying Start En]
Sets the condition that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor at actual RPM.
1 Enabled Catch and ramp to commanded speed at every drive start.
A546 [FlyStrt CurLimit]
Used to determine when the drive has matched the motor frequency if flying start is enabled.
Values Default: 150%
Min/Max: 30/200%
Display: 1%
A547 [Compensation]
Enables/disables correction options that may improve problems with motor instability.
Options 0 Disabled No compensation.
1 Electrical (Default) Some drive/motor combinations have inherent instabilities which are exhibited as non-sinusodial motor currents.
This setting attempts to correct this condition
2 Mechanical Some motor/load combinations have mechanical resonances which can be excited by the drive current regulator.
This setting slows down the current regulator response and attempts to correct this condition.
3 Both
A548 [Power Loss Mode]
Sets the reaction to a loss of input power.
Options 0 Coast (Default) Drive faults and motor coasts to a stop.
1 Decel Drive decelerates and attempts to keep the DC bus voltage above the undervoltage level.
A549 [Half Bus Enable]
Enables/disables the power ride through function which allows the drive to maintain power to the motor at 50% drive input voltage during short-term power sag conditions.
1 Enabled
ATTENTION: To guard against drive damage, a minimum line impedance must be provided to limit inrush current when the power line recovers. The input
impedance should be equal or greater than the equivalent of a 5% transformer with a VA rating 6 times the drive's input VA rating if Half Bus is enabled.
A550 [Bus Reg Enable]
Enables/disables the bus regulator.
Options 0 Disabled
1 Enabled (Default)
A551 [Fault Clear]
Resets a fault and clears the fault queue.
1 Reset Fault Resets the active fault but does not clear any fault buffer.
2 Clear Buffer Resets the active fault and clears all fault buffers to 0.
A552 [Program Lock] Related Parameter(s): A553
Protects parameters against change by unauthorized personnel with a 4-digit password.
Min/Max: 0000/9999
Display: 1111
A553 [Program Lock Mod] Related Parameter(s): A552
Determines the lock mode used in parameter A552 [Program Lock]. When set to 2 or 3, A552 [Program Lock] is added to the custom group to allow unlocking of parameters.
Options 0 Full Lock (Default) All parameters are locked except [Program Lock].
1 Keypad Lock All parameters are locked except [Program Lock] from keypad access but can still be accessed over communications.
2 Custom Only All parameters are locked and hidden except custom group and [Program Lock].
3 KeyPd Custom All parameters are locked and hidden except custom group and [Program Lock] from keypad access but can still be accessed over
communications.
A554 [Drv Ambient Sel]
Sets the maximum expected ambient of the drive when used above 50 C. When ambient temperature is above 50 C, the drive will apply necessary current derating.
Options 0 Normal (Default)
1 55C
2 60C
3 65C +Fan Kit Fan kit required.
4 70C +Fan Kit
A555 [Reset Meters] Related Parameter(s): b019, b021, b022, b023, b024,
b025, b026, d362, d363
Resets the values stored in the parameters that track fault times and energy usage.
1 Reset Meters Resets kWh, MWh, Accum kWh, Cost, and CO2 Sav parameter values.
2 Reset Time Resets min, hr, and x10 hr.
A556 [Text Scroll]
Sets the scrolling speed of the text in the LCD display.
Options 0 Off No scroll.
1 Low Speed
2 Mid Speed (Default)
3 High Speed
A557 [Out Phas Loss En]
Enable/disable output phase loss detection.
Options 0 Disable (Default)
1 Enable
A558 [Positioning Mode]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Defines the positioning transition mode used for the position steps.
Options 0 Time Steps (Default) Steps based on time.
1 Preset Input Preset inputs directly commands a given step.
2 Step Logic Use Step Logic Commands. Always start from Step 0.
3 Preset StpL Use Preset Inputs to determine starting step then Step Logic commands.
4 StpLogic-Lst Use Step Logic commands from last Step Logic step at last drive stop.
PF 525
A559 [Counts Per Unit]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the number of encoder counts equal to one user-defined unit.
Min/Max: 1/32000
Display: 1
PF 525
A560 [Enh Control Word] Related Parameter(s): t062, t063, t065 - t068, A571
PowerFlex 525 only.
Allows control of positioning and other functions through parameter control for use over comms. The functions replicate the digital input options and function in the same way.
Values Default: 0000 0000
Min/Max: 0000 0000/1111 1111
Display: 0000 0000
Digits 0 Home Limit In Positioning mode, this indicates the drive is at the home position
1 Find Home When set, the next start command causes the drive to find home. Set this bit to 0 after completing the homing routine.
2 Hold Step In Positioning mode, this input over-rides other inputs and causes the drive to remain at its current step (running at zero speed
once it reaches its position) until released.
3 Pos Redefine In Positioning mode, this input resets the home position to the current position of the machine. Set this bit to 0 after completing
the homing routine.
4 Sync Enable Must be used in order to hold the existing frequency when Sync Time is set to enable speed synchronization. When this bit is reset
to zero the drive accelerates to the new commanded frequency based on A571 [Sync Time] setting.
5 Traverse Dis When set the traverse function is disabled.
6 Logic In 1 This provides an identical function as the Logic In1 Digital Input option. This bit is logically ORed with a digital input t062, t063,
t065-t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] set to 24 Logic In1. It can be used to move through the Step-Logic functions (speed or position)
using comms control without requiring actual digital input transitions.
7 Logic In 2 This provides and identical function as the Logic In2 Digital Input option. This bit is logically ORed with a digital input t062, t063,
t065-t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] set to 25 Logic In2. It can be used to move through the Step-Logic functions (speed or position)
using comms control without requiring actual digital input transitions.
PF 525

1 = Input Present, 0 = Input Not Present
Home Limit Digit 1
Find Home Digit 2
Hold Step Digit 3
Pos Redefine Digit 4
Sync Enable Digit 5
Traverse Dis Digit 6
Logic In 1 Digit 7
Logic In 2 Digit 8
Not Used
A561 [Home Save]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Determines whether the current position is saved on power down.
Options 0 Home Reset (Default) Position resets to zero on power up.
1 Home Saved
PF 525
A562 [Find Home Freq]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the maximum frequency the drive uses when Find Home is issued.
Min/Max: 0.1/500.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
PF 525
A563 [Find Home Dir]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the direction the drive commands when Find Home is issued.
Options 0 Forward (Default)
1 Reverse
PF 525
A564 [Encoder Pos Tol]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the At Position and the At Home tolerance around the encoder count. The value is added to and subtracted from the target encoder unit value to create the tolerance range.
Values Default: 100
Min/Max: 1/50000
Display: 1
PF 525
A565 [Pos Reg Filter]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the error signal filter in the position regulator.
Values Default: 8
Min/Max: 0/15
Display: 1
PF 525
A566 [Pos Reg Gain]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Sets the gain adjustment for the position regulator.
Values Default: 3.0
Min/Max: 0.0/200.0
Display: 0.1
PF 525
A567 [Max Traverse]
Sets the amplitude of triangle wave speed modulation.
Min/Max: 0.00/300.00 Hz
Display: 0.01 Hz
H
e
r
t
z
Seconds
[Max Traverse]
[P Jump]
[Output Freq]
[Fiber Status]
Traverse Enable Bit
Traverse Bit
A568 [Traverse Inc] Related Parameter(s): A567
Sets the time required for the Traverse function to accelerate from the minimum to the maximum traverse frequency. See the diagram at A567 [Max Traverse].
Min/Max: 0.00/300.00 s
Display: 0.01 s
A569 [Traverse Dec] Related Parameter(s): A567
Sets the time required for the Traverse function to decelerate from the maximum to the minimum traverse frequency. See the diagram at A567 [Max Traverse].
Min/Max: 0.00/300.00 s
Display: 0.01 s
A570 [P Jump] Related Parameter(s): A567
Sets the frequency amplitude that is added to or subtracted from the commanded frequency. See the diagram at A567 [Max Traverse].
Min/Max: 0.00/300.00 Hz
Display: 0.01 Hz
A571 [Sync Time] Related Parameter(s): t062, t063, t065 - t068, A560
Enables the function that holds the drive at the current frequency even if the commanded frequency changes. Used with t062, t063, t065-t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] 32 Sync Enable.
Min/Max: 0.0/3200.0 s
Display: 0.1 s
H
e
r
t
z
Time
Speed Sync Bit
Change Ref's
[Sync Time]
Drive #1 and #2 Sync Enable Input
[Fiber Status]
New Drive #1 Reference
New Drive #2 Reference
A572 [Speed Ratio]
Scales the drive speed command.
Min/Max: 0.01/99.99
Display: 0.01
A573 [Mtr Options Cfg]
PowerFlex 525 only.
(With FRN 2.xx and later.)
Sets the configuration of the motor option.
Values Default: 11
Min/Max: 00/11
Display: 00
PF 525

1 = Enabled, 0 = Disabled
Jerk Select Digit 1
ZeroSpd Slip Digit 2
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Options Description
Jerk Select Limits the rate of change to the velocity reference for improved current limiting. Set to
0 Disabled for positioning type applications with fast Accel or Decel times.
ZeroSpd Slip Sets slip compensation to 0.0 Hz when the following conditions are met:
Commanded speed = 0.00 Hz
Status of drive = At speed
ZeroSpd Slip = 1 Enabled
A574 [RdyBit Mode Cfg] Related Parameter(s): d392
PowerFlex 525 only.
(With FRN 3.xxx and later.)
Determines which Stop conditions causes the drives Ready bit (Network Logic Status bit 1) to go low (0). A reset or power cycle is required after selection is made.
Options 0 Standard (Default)
1 Enhanced
PF 525
Ready Bit Status
(1)
(1) 1 = Active, 0 = Inactive
Stop Conditions Standard Enhanced
Drive fault 0 0
Stop digital input terminal 01/11 open 1 0
Holding down the drives keypad or the Remote DSI HIM Stop button 1 0
Stop commanded through Comms (Stop bit = 1) 1 0
Software (SW) Enable digital input terminal open 1 0
Safe-Torque-Off (STO) condition with value of t105 [Safety Open En] set to 1 FaultDisabled 0 0
Network Parameter Group
This group contains parameters for the network option card that is installed.
Refer to the network option cards user manual for more information on the
available parameters.
Modified Parameter Group
This group contains parameters that have their values changed from the factory
default.
When a parameter has its default value changed, it is automatically added to this
group. When a parameter has its value changed back to the factory default, it is
automatically removed from this group.
Fault and Diagnostic Group
F604 [Fault 4 Code] Related Parameter(s): b007-b009
F605 [Fault 5 Code]
F606 [Fault 6 Code]
F607 [Fault 7 Code]
F608 [Fault 8 Code]
F609 [Fault 9 Code]
F610 [Fault10 Code]
A code that represents a drive fault. The codes appear in these parameters in the order they occur (b007 [Fault 1 Code] = the most recent fault). Repetitive faults are only recorded once.
Min/Max: F0/F127
Display: F0
F611 [Fault 1 Time-hr]
F612 [Fault 2 Time-hr] Related Parameter(s): d362
F620 [Fault10 Time-hr]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the value of d362 [Elapsed Time-hr] when the fault occurs.
Min/Max: 0/32767 hr
Display: 1 hr
PF 525
F621 [Fault 1 Time-min]
F622 [Fault 2 Time-min] Related Parameter(s): d363
F630 [Fault10 Time-min]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the value of d363 [Elapsed Time-min] when the fault occurs.
Min/Max: 0.0/320.0 min
Display: 0.1 min
PF 525
Fault and Diagnostic Group (continued)
F631 [Fault 1 Freq]
F633 [Fault 3 Freq]
F635 [Fault 5 Freq]
F632 [Fault 2 Freq] Related Parameter(s): b001
F634 [Fault 4 Freq]
F636 [Fault 6 Freq]
F638 [Fault 8 Freq]
F640 [Fault10 Freq]
PowerFlex 525 only.
F637 [Fault 7 Freq]
F639 [Fault 9 Freq]
Displays and stores the value of b001 [Output Freq] with the most recent 10 faults occurred.
[Fault 1 Freq] stores the most recent fault, [Fault 2 Freq] stores the second most recent fault and [Fault 3 Freq] stores the third most recent fault.
Min/Max: 0.00/500.00 Hz
Display: 0.01 Hz
PF 525
F641 [Fault 1 Current]
F642 [Fault 2 Current] Related Parameter(s): b003
F650 [Fault10 Current]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays and stores the value of b003 [Output Current] with the most recent 10 faults occurred.
[Fault 1 Current] stores the most recent fault, [Fault 2 Current] stores the second most recent fault and [Fault 3 Current] stores the third most recent fault.
Display: 0.01 A
PF 525
F651 [Fault 1 BusVolts]
F652 [Fault 2 BusVolts] Related Parameter(s): b005
F660 [Fault10 BusVolts]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays and stores the value of b005 [DC Bus Voltage] with the most recent 10 faults occurred.
[Fault 1 BusVolts] stores the most recent fault, [Fault2 BusVolts] stores the second most recent fault and [Fault 3 BusVolts] stores the third most recent fault.
Min/Max: 0/1200VDC
Display: 1VDC
PF 525
F661 [Status @ Fault 1]
F662 [Status @ Fault 2] Related Parameter(s): b006
F670 [Status @ Fault10]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the value of b006 [Drive Status] with the most recent 10 faults occurred.
[Status@ Fault 1] stores the most recent fault, [Status@ Fault 2] stores the second most recent fault and [Status@ Fault 3] stores the third most recent fault.
Min/Max: 0/0x1F
Display: 1
PF 525

Running Digit 1
Forward Digit 2
Accelerating Digit 3
Decelerating Digit 4
SafetyActive
(1)
Digit 5
F681 [Comm Sts - DSI]
Displays the status of the RS485 serial (DSI) port to the drive.
Min/Max: 0000/1911
Display: 0000

Rx Digit 1
Tx Digit 2
Status Digit 3
Error Digit 4
Not Used
Digit 3 (Connection Status)
0 Not Active
1 Modbus slave network (external Modbus master)
2 Modbus multi-drive w/ internal com option master
3 Modbus multi-drive w/ embedded com master
(1)
4 DSI peripheral connected
5...8 Reserved
9 RS-485 network faulted
F682 [Comm Sts - Opt]
Displays the status of the internal communication to the drive.
Min/Max: 0000/1911
Display: 0000

Rx Digit 1
Tx Digit 2
Status Digit 3
Error Digit 4
Not Used
Digit 3 = Internal Com option
0 Not Active (no connection)
1 Internal option connected/active
2...8 Reserved
9 Internal com option faulted
F683 [Com Sts-Emb Enet]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the status of the embedded EtherNet/IP interface to the drive.
Min/Max: 0000/1911
Display: 0000
PF 525

Rx Digit 1
Tx Digit 2
Status Digit 3
Error Digit 4
Not Used
Digit 3 = Embedded EtherNet/IP
0 Not Active (no connection)
1 Embedded EtherNet/IP active
2-8 Reserved
9 Embedded EtherNet/IP faulted
F684 [EN Addr Src]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the actual source of the Ethernet configuration (IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address).
Options 1 Parameters Read Only
2 BOOTP
PF 525
F685 [EN Rate Act]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Displays the network data rate currently used by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.
Options 0 No Link Read Only
1 10Mbps Full
2 10Mbps Half
3 100Mbps Full
4 100Mbps Half
5 Dup IP Addr
6 Disabled
PF 525
F686 [DSI I/O Act]
Displays the Drives that are active in Multi-Drive mode.
Value Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 00000/11111
Display: 00000

1 = Drive Active, 0 = Drive Inactive
Drive 0 Actv Digit 1
F687 [HW Addr 1]
F688 [HW Addr 2]
F689 [HW Addr 3]
F690 [HW Addr 4]
F691 [HW Addr 5]
F692 [HW Addr 6]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Shows the MAC address for the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.
Min/Max: 0/255
Display: 1
PF 525
F693 [EN IP Addr Act 1]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Shows the actual IP address used by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface at the time. This indicates 0 if no address is set.
Min/Max: 0/255
Display: 1
PF 525
255.255.255.255
[EN IP Addr Act 1]
[EN IP Addr Act 2]
[EN IP Addr Act 3]
[EN IP Addr Act 4]
F697 [EN Subnet Act 1]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Shows the actual subnet mask used by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface at the time. This will indicate 0 if no address is set.
Min/Max: 0/255
Display: 1
PF 525
255.255.255.255
[EN Subnet Act 1]
[EN Subnet Act 2]
[EN Subnet Act 3]
[EN Subnet Act 4]
F701 [EN Gateway Act 1]
PowerFlex 525 only.
Shows the actual gateway address used by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface at the time. This will indicate 0 if no address is set.
Min/Max: 0/255
Display: 1
PF 525
255.255.255.255
[EN Gateway Act 1]
[EN Gateway Act 2]
[EN Gateway Act 3]
[EN Gateway Act 4]
F705 [Drv 0 Logic Cmd]
In multi-drive mode, this is the logic command being transmitted to drive 0/1/2/3/4/.
In single-drive mode, this is the logic command being used by the drive (whether HS-DSI, EtherNet/IP, or DSI) at the time. If comms control is NOT being used, and the drive is in single-
drive mode, then this parameter will show 0.
Min/Max: 0/FFFF
Display: 1
F706 [Drv 0 Reference]
In multi-drive mode, this is the reference being transmitted to drive 0/1/2/3/4.
In single-drive mode, this is the reference being used by the drive (whether HS-DSI, EtherNet/IP, or DSI) at the time. If comms control is NOT being used, and the drive is in single-drive
mode, then this parameter will show 0.
Min/Max: 0.00/500.00 Hz
Display: 0.01 Hz
F707 [Drv 0 Logic Sts]
In multi-drive mode, this is the logic status being received from drive 0/1/2/3/4.
In single-drive mode, this is the logic status of the drive at the time.
Min/Max: 0/FFFF
Display: 1
F708 [Drv 0 Feedback]
In multi-drive mode, this is the feedback being received from drive 0/1/2/3/4.
In single-drive mode, this is the feedback of the drive at the time.
Min/Max: 0.00/500.00 Hz
Display: 0.01 Hz
F725 [EN Rx Overruns]
PowerFlex 525 only.
A count of the number of receive overrun errors reported by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.
Min/Max: 0/65535
Display: 1
PF 525
F726 [EN Rx Packets]
PowerFlex 525 only.
A count of the number of receive packets reported by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.
Min/Max: 0/65535
Display: 1
PF 525
F727 [EN Rx Errors]
PowerFlex 525 only.
A count of the number of receive errors reported by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.
Min/Max: 0/65535
Display: 1
PF 525
F728 [EN Tx Packets]
PowerFlex 525 only.
A count of the number of transmitted packets reported by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.
Min/Max: 0/65535
Display: 1
PF 525
F729 [EN Tx Errors]
PowerFlex 525 only.
A count of the number of transmit errors reported by the embedded EtherNet/IP interface.
Min/Max: 0/65535
Display: 1
PF 525
F730 [EN Missed IO Pkt]
PowerFlex 525 only.
The number of I/O packets missed.
Min/Max: 0/65535
Display: 1
PF 525
F731 [DSI Errors]
The number of total DSI errors.
Min/Max: 0/65535
Display: 1
AppView Parameter Groups
AppView parameter groups provide a simple starting point for using the
PowerFlex 520-series drives by grouping certain commonly used parameters
based on different types of applications. Use these parameter groups to quickly
and easily setup the PowerFlex 520-series drive for your application.
AppView parameter groups are available for the following applications:
Conveyor
Mixer
Compressor
Centrifugal Pump
Blower/Fan
Extruder
Positioning (PowerFlex 525 only)
Textile/Fiber
You cannot add or remove parameters to or from the AppView parameter groups.
If you require quick access to additional parameters to what is already included in
the different AppView parameter groups, use the CustomView parameter group
instead.
The parameters in the AppView parameter groups can be quickly added to the
CustomView parameter group by doing the following:
Step Key(s) Example Displays
1. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to
an AppView group (G1...G8).
2. Press Enter or Sel to enter a group. The right
most digit of the last viewed parameter in that
group will flash.
the command G1->GC.
4. Press Enter or Sel to add all the parameters in
this AppView group to the CustomView group.
The LCD display will show a confirmation.
or
FWD
or
FWD
or
FWD
or
CustomView Parameter
Group
CustomView allows you to quickly access only the parameters needed for your
application by storing them in a custom parameter group. Add your frequently
used parameters to this group, then hide all other parameters with A552
[Program Lock] to simplify your drive configuration process.
Up to 100 parameters can be stored in the CustomView parameter group. You
can copy one entire AppView parameter group to the CustomView parameter
group as shown on page 138 or add individual parameters as show below.
To delete parameters from the CustomView parameter group:
the CustomView group (GC).
2. Press Enter to view the parameters that can be
added to the CustomView group.
through the list of parameters.
4. Press Enter to add the parameter to the
CustomView group. The LCD display will show a
confirmation.
the CustomView group (GC).
2. Press Enter to view the parameters that are in
the CustomView group.
the command GC---.
4. Press Enter or Sel to view the parameters that
are stored in the CustomView group.
through the list of parameters.
6. Press Enter to delete the parameter from the
CustomView group. The LCD display will show a
confirmation.
TIP The Connected Components Workbench software can be used to speed up this
process with drag and drop functionality.
or
FWD
FWD
or
PROGRAM
FWD
or
FWD
FWD
or
FWD
or
FWD
or
PROGRAM
FWD
Parameter Cross Reference by Name
Parameter Name No. Parameter Name No. Parameter Name No.
10V Bipolar Enbl
(1)
093 Current Limit 2
(1)
485 Drv 4 Reference 722
2-Wire Mode 064 DB Resistor Sel 437 Drv Ambient Sel 554
Accel Time 1 041 DB Threshold 438 DSI Errors 731
Accel Time 2 442 DC Brake Level 435 DSI I/O Act 686
Accel Time 3 444 DC Brake Time 434 DSI I/O Cfg 175
Accel Time 4 446 DC Brk Time@Strt 436 Elapsed kWh 021
Accum CO2 Sav 026 DC Bus Ripple 380 Elapsed MWh 022
Accum Cost Sav 025 DC Bus Voltage 005 Elapsed Run Time 019
Accum kWh Sav 024 Decel Time 1 042 Elapsed Time-hr 362
Analog In 0-10V 360 Decel Time 2 443 Elapsed Time-min 363
Analog In 4-20mA 361 Decel Time 3 445 EM Brk Off Delay 086
Analog In Filter 099 Decel Time 4 447 EM Brk On Delay 087
Analog Out High
(1)
089 Dig In Status 014 EN Addr Sel
(1)
128
Analog Out Sel
(1)
088 DigIn TermBlk 02 062 EN Addr Src
(1)
684
Anlg In 0-10V Hi 092 DigIn TermBlk 03 063 EN Comm Flt Actn
(1)
143
Anlg In 0-10V Lo 091 DigIn TermBlk 05 065 EN Data In 1
(1)
153
Anlg In mA Loss 097 DigIn TermBlk 06 066 EN Data In 2
(1)
154
Anlg In V Loss 094 DigIn TermBlk 07
(1)
067 EN Data In 3
(1)
155
Anlg In4-20mA Hi 096 DigIn TermBlk 08
(1)
068 EN Data In 4
(1)
156
Anlg In4-20mA Lo 095 Drive OL Mode 495 EN Data Out 1
(1)
157
Anlg Loss Delay 098 Drive Status 006 EN Data Out 2
(1)
158
Anlg Out Setpt
(1)
090 Drive Temp 027 EN Data Out 3
(1)
159
Auto Rstrt Delay 542 Drive Type 367 EN Data Out 4
(1)
160
Auto Rstrt Tries 541 Droop Hertz@ FLA
(1)
441 EN Flt Cfg DL 1
(1)
147
Autotune 040 Drv 0 Feedback 708 EN Flt Cfg DL 2
(1)
148
Average kWh Cost 052 Drv 0 Logic Cmd 705 EN Flt Cfg DL 3
(1)
149
Average Power 020 Drv 0 Logic Sts 707 EN Flt Cfg DL 4
(1)
150
Boost Select 530 Drv 0 Reference 706 EN Flt Cfg Logic
(1)
145
Break Frequency 533 Drv 1 Addr 171 EN Flt Cfg Ref
(1)
146
Break Voltage 532 Drv 1 Feedback 712 EN Gateway Act 1
(1)
701
Bus Reg Enable 550 Drv 1 Logic Cmd 709 EN Gateway Act 2
(1)
702
Cmd Stat Select
(1)
122 Drv 1 Logic Sts 711 EN Gateway Act 3
(1)
703
Com Sts-Emb Enet
(1)
683 Drv 1 Reference 710 EN Gateway Act 4
(1)
704
Comm Loss Action 125 Drv 2 Addr 172 EN Gateway Cfg 1
(1)
137
Comm Loss Time 126 Drv 2 Feedback 716 EN Gateway Cfg 2
(1)
138
Comm Sts - DSI 681 Drv 2 Logic Cmd 713 EN Gateway Cfg 3
(1)
139
Comm Sts - Opt 682 Drv 2 Logic Sts 715 EN Gateway Cfg 4
(1)
140
Comm Write Mode 121 Drv 2 Reference 714 EN Idle Flt Actn
(1)
144
Commanded Freq 002 Drv 3 Addr 173 EN IP Addr Act 1
(1)
693
Compensation 547 Drv 3 Feedback 720 EN IP Addr Act 2
(1)
694
Contrl In Status 013 Drv 3 Logic Cmd 717 EN IP Addr Act 3
(1)
695
Control Source 012 Drv 3 Logic Sts 719 EN IP Addr Act 4
(1)
696
Control SW Ver 029 Drv 3 Reference 718 EN IP Addr Cfg 1
(1)
129
Control Temp 028 Drv 4 Addr 174 EN IP Addr Cfg 2
(1)
130
Counter Status 364 Drv 4 Feedback 724 EN IP Addr Cfg 3
(1)
131
Counts Per Unit
(1)
559 Drv 4 Logic Cmd 721 EN IP Addr Cfg 4
(1)
132
Current Limit 1 484 Drv 4 Logic Sts 723 EN Missed IO Pkt
(1)
730
EN Rate Act
(1)
685 Fault 5 Time-hr 615 Freq 3 BW
(1)
515
EN Rate Cfg
(1)
141 Fault 5 Time-min 625 Freq 3 Ki
(1)
526
EN Rx Errors
(1)
727 Fault 6 BusVolts
(1)
656 Freq 3 Kp
(1)
525
EN Rx Overruns
(1)
725 Fault 6 Code
(1)
606 Half Bus Enable 549
EN Rx Packets
(1)
726 Fault 6 Current
(1)
646 Home Save
(1)
561
EN Subnet Act 1
(1)
697 Fault 6 Freq
(1)
636 HW Addr 1
(1)
687
EN Subnet Act 2
(1)
698 Fault 6 Time-hr
(1)
616 HW Addr 2
(1)
688
EN Subnet Act 3
(1)
699 Fault 6 Time-min
(1)
626 HW Addr 3v 689
EN Subnet Act 4
(1)
(1)
657 HW Addr 4
(1)
690
EN Subnet Cfg 1
(1)
133 Fault 7 Code
(1)
607 HW Addr 5
(1)
691
EN Subnet Cfg 2
(1)
134 Fault 7 Current
(1)
647 HW Addr 6
(1)
692
EN Subnet Cfg 3
(1)
135 Fault 7 Freq
(1)
637 IR Voltage Drop 496
EN Subnet Cfg 4
(1)
136 Fault 7 Time-hr
(1)
617 Jog Accel/Decel 432
EN Tx Errors
(1)
(1)
627 Jog Frequency 431
EN Tx Packets
(1)
(1)
658 Keypad Freq 426
Encoder Pos Tol
(1)
564 Fault 8 Code
(1)
608 Ki Speed Loop
(1)
538
Encoder PPR
(1)
536 Fault 8 Current
(1)
648 Kp Speed Loop
(1)
539
Encoder Speed
(1)
378 Fault 8 Freq
(1)
638 Language 30
Energy Saved 023 Fault 8 Time-hr
(1)
618 Load Loss Level
(1)
490
Enh Control Word
(1)
(1)
628 Load Loss Time
(1)
491
Fault 1 BusVolts 651 Fault 9 BusVolts
(1)
659 Max Traverse 567
Fault 1 Code 007 Fault 9 Code
(1)
609 Maximum Freq 044
Fault 1 Current 641 Fault 9 Current
(1)
649 Maximum Voltage 534
Fault 1 Freq 631 Fault 9 Freq
(1)
639 Minimum Freq 043
Fault 1 Time-hr 611 Fault 9 Time-hr
(1)
619 MOP Freq 427
Fault 1 Time-min 621 Fault 9 Time-min
(1)
629 MOP Preload 429
Fault 2 BusVolts 652 Fault Clear 551 MOP Reset Sel 428
Fault 2 Code 008 Fault10 BusVolts
(1)
660 MOP Time 430
Fault 2 Current 642 Fault10 Code
(1)
610 Motor Fdbk Type
(1)
535
Fault 2 Freq 632 Fault10 Current
(1)
650 Motor Lm
(1)
499
Fault 2 Time-hr 612 Fault10 Freq
(1)
640 Motor Lx
(1)
500
Fault 2 Time-min 622 Fault10 Time-hr
(1)
620 Motor NP FLA 034
Fault 3 BusVolts 653 Fault10 Time-min
(1)
630 Motor NP Hertz 032
Fault 3 Code 009 Fiber Status 390 Motor NP Poles 035
Fault 3 Current 643 Find Home Dir
(1)
563 Motor NP Power
(1)
037
Fault 3 Freq 633 Find Home Freq
(1)
562 Motor NP RPM 036
Fault 3 Time-hr 613 Flux Current Ref 497 Motor NP Volts 031
Fault 3 Time-min 623 Flying Start En 545 Motor OL Current 033
Fault 4 BusVolts 654 FlyStrt CurLimit 546 Motor OL Level 369
Fault 4 Code 604 Freq 1
(1)
510 Motor OL Ret 494
Fault 4 Current 644 Freq 1 BW
(1)
511 Motor OL Select 493
Fault 4 Freq 634 Freq 1 Ki
(1)
522 Motor Rr
(1)
498
Fault 4 Time-hr 614 Freq 1 Kp
(1)
521 Mtr Options Cfg 573
Fault 4 Time-min 624 Freq 2
(1)
512 MultiDrv Sel 169
Fault 5 BusVolts 655 Freq 2 BW
(1)
513 Opt Data In 1 161
Fault 5 Code 605 Freq 2 Ki
(1)
Fault 5 Current 645 Freq 2 Kp
(1)
Fault 5 Freq 635 Freq 3
(1)
Opt Data Out 1 165 Position Status
(1)
387 Shear Pin 2 Time
(1)
489
Opt Data Out 2 166 Positioning Mode
(1)
558 Shear Pin2 Level
(1)
488
Opt Data Out 3 167 Power Loss Mode 548 Skip Freq Band 1 449
Opt Data Out 4 168 Power Saved 018 Skip Freq Band 2 451
Opto Out Logic
(1)
075 Preset Freq 0 410 Skip Freq Band 3
(1)
453
Opto Out1 Level
(1)
070 Preset Freq 1 411 Skip Freq Band 4
(1)
455
Opto Out1 Sel
(1)
069 Preset Freq 2 412 Skip Frequency 1 448
Opto Out2 Level
(1)
073 Preset Freq 3 413 Skip Frequency 2 450
Opto Out2 Sel
(1)
072 Preset Freq 4 414 Skip Frequency 3
(1)
452
Out Phas Loss En 557 Preset Freq 5 415 Skip Frequency 4
(1)
454
Output Current 003 Preset Freq 6 416 Sleep Level 101
Output Freq 001 Preset Freq 7 417 Sleep Time 102
Output Power 017 Preset Freq 8
(1)
418 Sleep-Wake Sel 100
Output Powr Fctr 381 Preset Freq 9
(1)
419 Slip Hz Meter 375
Output RPM 015 Preset Freq 10
(1)
420 Speed Feedback 376
Output Speed 016 Preset Freq 11
(1)
421 Speed Ratio 572
Output Voltage 004 Preset Freq 12
(1)
422 Speed Reference1 047
P Jump 570 Preset Freq 13
(1)
PID 1 Deadband 465 Preset Freq 14
(1)
PID 1 Diff Rate 463 Preset Freq 15
(1)
425 Speed Reg Sel
(1)
509
PID 1 Fdback Sel 460 Process Disp Hi 482 Stall Fault Time 492
PID 1 Integ Time 462 Process Disp Lo 481 Start At PowerUp 543
PID 1 Invert Err 467 Process Display 010 Start Boost 531
PID 1 Preload 466 Program Lock 552 Start Source 1 046
PID 1 Prop Gain 461 Program Lock Mod 553 Start Source 2 048
PID 1 Ref Sel 459 Pulse In Scale 537 Start Source 3 050
PID 1 Setpoint 464 Purge Frequency 433 Status @ Fault 1 661
PID 1 Trim Hi 456 PWM Frequency 440 Status @ Fault 2 662
PID 1 Trim Lo 457 RdyBit Mode Act 392 Status @ Fault 3 663
PID 1 Trim Sel 458 RdyBit Mode Cfg 574 Status @ Fault 4 664
PID1 Fdbk Displ 383 Relay 1 Off Time 080 Status @ Fault 5 665
PID1 Setpnt Disp 384 Relay 1 On Time 079 Status @ Fault 6
(1)
666
PID 2 Deadband
(1)
477 Relay Out1 Level 077 Status @ Fault 7
(1)
667
PID 2 Diff Rate
(1)
475 Relay Out1 Sel 076 Status @ Fault 8
(1)
668
PID 2 Fdback Sel
(1)
472 Relay 2 Off Time
(1)
085 Status @ Fault 9
(1)
669
PID 2 Integ Time
(1)
474 Relay 2 On Time
(1)
084 Status @ Fault10
(1)
670
PID 2 Invert Err
(1)
479 Relay Out2 Level
(1)
082 Step Units 0
(1)
200
PID 2 Preload
(1)
478 Relay Out2 Sel
(1)
081 Step Units 1
(1)
202
PID 2 Prop Gain
(1)
473 Reset Meters 555 Step Units 2
(1)
204
PID 2 Ref Sel
(1)
471 Reset to Defalts 053 Step Units 3
(1)
206
PID 2 Setpoint
(1)
476 Reverse Disable 544 Step Units 4
(1)
208
PID 2 Trim Hi
(1)
468 RS485 Data Rate 123 Step Units 5
(1)
210
PID 2 Trim Lo
(1)
469 RS485 Format 127 Step Units 6
(1)
212
PID 2 Trim Sel
(1)
470 RS485 Node Addr 124 Step Units 7
(1)
214
PID2 Fdbk Displ
(1)
385 S Curve % 439 Stop Mode 045
PID2 Setpnt Disp
(1)
386 Safety Open En
(1)
105 Stp Logic 0
(1)
180
Pos Reg Filter
(1)
565 Shear Pin 1 Time 487 Stp Logic 1
(1)
181
Pos Reg Gain
(1)
566 Shear Pin1 Level 486 Stp Logic 2
(1)
182
Stp Logic 3
(1)
183 Stp Logic Time 4
(1)
194 Torque Perf Mode 039
Stp Logic 4
(1)
(1)
195 Traverse Dec 569
Stp Logic 5
(1)
(1)
196 Traverse Inc 568
Stp Logic 6
(1)
(1)
197 Units Traveled H
(1)
388
Stp Logic 7
(1)
187 Sync Time 571 Units Traveled L
(1)
389
Stp Logic Status
(1)
391 Testpoint Data 368 Var PWM Disable 540
Stp Logic Time 0
(1)
190 Testpoint Sel 483 Voltage Class 038
Stp Logic Time 1
(1)
191 Text Scroll 556 Wake Level 103
Stp Logic Time 2
(1)
192 Timer Status 365 Wake Time 104
Stp Logic Time 3
(1)
193 Torque Current 382
Notes:
Chapter 4
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides information to guide you in troubleshooting the
PowerFlex 520-series drive. Included is a listing and description of drive faults
with possible solutions, when applicable.
Drive Status
The condition or state of your drive is constantly monitored. Any changes will be
indicated through the integral LCD display.
See Display and Control Keys on page 58 for information on drive status
indicators and controls.
Faults
A fault is a condition that stops the drive. There are two fault types.
Drive Status 145
Faults 145
Fault Descriptions 147
Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions 150
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Drive does not contain
user-serviceable components. Do not disassemble drive chassis.
Fault Types
Type Fault Description
1 Auto-Reset/Run When this type of fault occurs, and A541 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is set to a value greater than
0, a user-configurable timer, A542 [Auto Rstrt Delay], begins. When the timer reaches
zero, the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault. If the condition that caused the
fault is no longer present, the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted.
2 Non-Resettable This type of fault may require drive or motor repair, or is caused by wiring or programming
errors. The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared.
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting
Fault Indication
Manually Clearing Faults
Automatically Clearing Faults
Condition Display
Drive is indicating a fault.
The integral LCD display provides visual notification of a fault condition by displaying the
following.
Flashing fault number
Flashing fault indicator (LED)
Press the Esc key to regain control of the display.
Step Key(s)
1. Press Esc to acknowledge the fault. The fault information will be removed so that you
can use the integral keypad.
Access b007 [Fault 1 Code] to view the most recent fault information.
2. Address the condition that caused the fault.
The cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared. See Fault Types,
Descriptions and Actions on page 147.
3. After corrective action has been taken, clear the fault by one of these methods.
Press Stop if P045 [Stop Mode] is set to a value between 0 and 3.
Cycle drive power.
Set A551 [Fault Clear] to 1 Reset Fault or 2 Clear Buffer.
Cycle digital input if t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] is set to
13 Clear Fault.
Option/Step
Clear a Type 1 fault and restart the drive.
2. Set A542 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to a value other than 0.
Clear an OverVoltage, UnderVoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp fault
without restarting the drive.
2. Set A542 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to 0.
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if these
parameters are used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function
without considering applicable local, national and international codes,
standards, regulations or industry guidelines.
FAULT
FWD
Troubleshooting Chapter 4
Auto Restart (Reset/Run)
The Auto Restart feature provides the ability for the drive to automatically
perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application
intervention. This allows remote or unattended operation. Only certain faults
are allowed to be reset. Certain faults (Type 2) that indicate possible drive
component malfunction are not resettable. Fault types are listed in the table
Fault Types on page 145. See Fault Descriptions on page 147 for more
information.
Use caution when enabling this feature, since the drive will attempt to issue its
own start command based on user selected programming.
Fault Descriptions
Fault Types, Descriptions and Actions
No. Fault Type
(2)
Description Action
F000 No Fault No fault present.
F002 Auxiliary Input 1 External trip (Auxiliary) input. Check remote wiring.
Verify communications
programming for intentional fault.
F003 Power Loss 2 Single phase operation detected with
excessive load.
Monitor the incoming AC line for low
voltage or line power interruption.
Check input fuses.
Reduce load.
F004 UnderVoltage 1 DC bus voltage fell below the minimum
value.
Monitor the incoming AC line for low
voltage or line power interruption.
F005 OverVoltage 1 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum
value.
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage
or transient conditions. Bus overvoltage
can also be caused by motor
regeneration. Extend the decel time or
install dynamic brake option.
F006 Motor Stalled 1 Drive is unable to accelerate or
decelerate motor.
Increase P041, A442, A444, A446
[Accel Time x] or reduce load so drive
output current does not exceed the
current set by parameter A484, A485
[Current Limit x] for too long.
Check for overhauling load.
F007 Motor Overload 1 Internal electronic overload trip. An excessive motor load exists.
Reduce load so drive output current
does not exceed the current set by
parameter P033 [Motor OL Current].
Verify A530 [Boost Select] setting.
F008 Heatsink OvrTmp 1 Heatsink/Power Module temperature
exceeds a predefined value.
Check for blocked or dirty heat sink
fins. Verify that ambient
temperature has not exceeded the
rated ambient temperature.
Check fan.
F009 CC OvrTmp 1 Control module temperature exceeds a
predefined value.
Check product ambient
temperature.
Check for airflow obstruction.
Check for dirt or debris.
Check fan.
F012 HW OverCurrent 2 The drive output current has exceeded
the hardware current limit.
Check programming. Check for excess
load, improper A530 [Boost Select]
setting, DC brake volts set too high or
other causes of excess current.
F013 Ground Fault 1
(3)
A current path to earth ground has been
detected at one or more of the drive
output terminals.
Check the motor and external wiring to
the drive output terminals for a
grounded condition.
F015
(1)
Load Loss 2 The output torque current is below the
value programmed in A490 [Load Loss
Level] for a time period greater than the
time programmed in A491 [Load Loss
Time].
Verify connections between motor
and load.
Verify level and time requirements
F021 Output Ph Loss 1 Output Phase Loss (if enabled).
Configure with A557 [Out Phas Loss En].
Verify motor wiring.
Verify motor.
F029 Analog In Loss 1 An analog input is configured to fault on
signal loss. A signal loss has occurred.
Configure with t094 [Anlg In V Loss] or
t097 [Anlg In mA Loss].
Check for broken/loose connections
at inputs.
Check parameters.
F033 Auto Rstrt Tries 2 Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset
a fault and resume running for the
programmed number of A541 [Auto
Rstrt Tries].
Correct the cause of the fault and
manually clear.
F038 Phase U to Gnd 2 A phase to ground fault has been
detected between the drive and motor
in this phase.
Check the wiring between the drive
and motor.
Check motor for grounded phase.
Replace drive if fault cannot be
cleared.
F039 Phase V to Gnd
F040 Phase W to Gnd
F041 Phase UV Short 2 Excessive current has been detected
between these two output terminals.
Check the motor and drive output
terminal wiring for a shorted
condition.
cleared.
F042 Phase UW Short
F043 Phase VW Short
F048 Params Defaulted 1 The drive was commanded to write
default values to EEPROM.
Clear the fault or cycle power to the
drive.
Program the drive parameters as
needed.
F059
(1)
Safety Open 1 Both of the safety inputs (Safety 1,
Safety 2) are not enabled.
Configure with t105 [Safety Open En].
Check safety input signals. If not
using safety, verify and tighten
jumper for I/O terminals S1, S2 and
S+.
F063 SW OverCurrent 1 Programmed A486, A488 [Shear Pinx
Level] has been exceeded for a time
period greater than the time
programmed in A487, A489 [Shear Pin x
Time].
Verify connections between motor
and load.
Verify level and time requirements.
F064 Drive Overload 2 Drive overload rating has been
exceeded.
Reduce load or extend Accel Time.
F070 Power Unit 2 Failure has been detected in the drive
power section.
Check maximum ambient
temperature has not been exceeded.
Cycle power.
cleared.
F071 DSI Net Loss 2 Control over the Modbus or DSI
communication link has been
interrupted.
Cycle power.
Check communications cabling.
Check Modbus or DSI setting.
Check Modbus or DSI status.
F072 Opt Net Loss 2 Control over the network option cards
remote network has been interrupted.
Cycle power.
Check network adapter setting.
Check external network status.
F073
(1)
EN Net Loss 2 Control through the embedded
EtherNet/IP adapter has been
interrupted.
Cycle power.
Check EtherNet/IP setting.
Check external network status.
F080 Autotune Failure 2 The autotune function was either
cancelled by the user or failed.
Restart procedure.
No. Fault Type
(2)
Description Action
F081 DSI Comm Loss 2 Communications between the drive and
the Modbus or DSI master device have
been interrupted.
Cycle power.
Check Modbus or DSI setting.
Check Modbus or DSI status.
Modify using C125 [Comm Loss
Action].
Connecting I/O terminals C1 and C2
to ground may improve noise
immunity.
Replace wiring, Modbus master
device, or control module.
F082 Opt Comm Loss 2 Communications between the drive and
the network option card have been
interrupted.
Cycle power.
Reinstall option card in drive.
Action].
Replace wiring, port expander,
option card, or control module.
F083
(1)
EN Comm Loss 2 Internal communications between the
drive and the embedded EtherNet/IP
adapter have been interrupted.
Cycle power.
Check EtherNet/IP setting.
Check drives Ethernet settings and
diagnostic parameters.
Action].
Replace wiring, Ethernet switch, or
control module.
F091
(1)
Encoder Loss 2 Requires differential encoder.
One of the 2 encoder channel signals is
missing.
Check Wiring.
If P047, P049, P051 [Speed
Referencex] = 16 Positioning and
A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] = 5 Quad
Check, swap the Encoder channel
inputs or swap any two motor leads.
Replace encoder.
F094 Function Loss 2 Freeze-Fire (Function Loss) input is
inactive, input to the programmed
terminal is open.
Close input to the terminal and cycle
power.
F100 Parameter Chksum 2 Drive parameter non-volatile storage is
corrupted.
Set P053 [Reset To Defalts] to 2 Factory
Rset.
F101 External Storage 2 External non-volatile storage has failed. Set P053 [Reset To Defalts] to 2 Factory
Rset.
F105 C Connect Err 2 Control module was disconnected while
drive was powered.
Clear fault and verify all parameter
settings. Do not remove or install the
control module while power is applied.
F106 Incompat C-P 2 The PowerFlex 525 control module does
not support power modules with 0.25
HP power rating.
Change to a different power module.
Change to a PowerFlex 523 control
module.
F107 Replaced C-P 2 The control module could not recognize
the power module. Hardware failure.
Change to a different power module.
Replace control module if changing
power module does not work.
F109 Mismatch C-P 2 The control module was mounted to a
different drive type power module.
Set P053 [Reset To Defalts] to 3 Power
Reset.
F110 Keypad Membrane 2 Keypad membrane failure /
disconnected.
Cycle power.
Replace control module if fault
cannot be cleared.
F111
(1)
Safety Hardware 2 Safety input enable hardware
malfunction. One of the safety inputs is
not enabled.
Check safety input signals. If not
using safety, verify and tighten
jumper for I/O terminals S1, S2 and
S+.
cannot be cleared.
F114 uC Failure 2 Microprocessor failure. Cycle power.
cannot be cleared.
No. Fault Type
(2)
Description Action
Common Symptoms and
Corrective Actions
The drive is designed to start from the keypad when shipped. For a basic test of
drive operation:
1. Remove all user I/O wire.
2. Verify safety terminals (S1, S2 and S+) jumper is in place and tightened.
3. Verify wire jumper is in place between I/O terminals 01 and 11.
4. Verify that the three jumpers are in their proper default positions on the
control board. See PowerFlex 525 Control I/O Wiring Block Diagram on
page 39 for more information.
5. Reset default parameter values by setting P053 [Reset Defalts] to 2
Factory Rset.
6. If safe to do so for your application, press Start on drive keypad. Drive will
run according to the speed potentiometer.
F122 I/O Board Fail 2 Failure has been detected in the drive
control and I/O section.
Cycle power.
Replace drive or control module if
fault cannot be cleared.
F125 Flash Update Req 2 The firmware in the drive is corrupt,
mismatched, or incompatible with the
hardware.
Perform a firmware flash update
operation to attempt to load a valid set
of firmware.
F126 NonRecoverablErr 2 A non-recoverable firmware or
hardware error was detected. The drive
was automatically stopped and reset.
Clear fault or cycle power to the
drive.
Replace drive or control module if
fault cannot be cleared.
F127 DSIFlashUpdatReq 2 A critical problem with the firmware
was detected and the drive is running
using backup firmware that only
supports DSI communications.
Perform a firmware flash update
operation using DSI communications to
attempt to load a valid set of firmware.
(1) This fault is not applicable to PowerFlex 523 drives.
(2) See Fault Types for more information.
(3) This fault may be cleared by the auto-restart routine and will be attempted only once. It ignores the value set in parameter A541
[Auto Rstrt Tries].
No. Fault Type
(2)
Description Action
Motor does not Start.
Drive does not Start from Start or Run Inputs wired to the terminal
block.
Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
No output voltage to the motor. None Check the power circuit.
Check the supply voltage.
Check all fuses and disconnects.
Check the motor.
Verify that the motor is connected properly.
Check the control input signals.
Verify that a Start signal is present. If 2-Wire control is used, verify that either the Run
Forward or Run Reverse signal is active, but not both.
Verify that I/O Terminal 01 is active.
Verify that P046, P048, P050 [Start Source x] matches your configuration.
Verify that A544 [Reverse Disable] is not prohibiting movement.
Verify that safety inputs (Safety 1 and Safety 2) are active.
Improper boost setting at initial start-up. None Set A530 [Boost Select] to 2 35.0, VT.
Drive is Faulted Flashing red status light Clear fault.
Cycle drive power.
13 Clear Fault.
Incorrect programming.
P046, P048, P050 [Start Source x] is set incorrectly.
None Check setting for b012 [Control Source].
Incorrect input wiring.
See page 42 for wiring examples.
2 wire control requires Run Forward, Run Reverse or Jog
input.
3 wire control requires Start and Stop inputs
Stop input is always required.
None Wire inputs correctly and/or install jumper.
If the PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function is used, verify that inputs are active.
If 2-wire or 3-wire mode is used, verify that t062 [DigIn TermBlk 02] and t063 [DigIn
TermBlk 03] are set properly.
Incorrect Sink/Source jumper setting. None Set switch to match wiring scheme.
Drive is Faulted Flashing red status light Clear fault.
Cycle drive power.
13 Clear Fault.
Incorrect programming.
P046, P048, P050 [Start Source x] is set incorrectly.
t062, t063 [DigIn TermBlk 02/03] is set incorrectly.
None Check parameter settings.
Incorrect input wiring.
See page 42 for wiring examples.
2 wire control requires Run Forward, Run Reverse or Jog
input.
3 wire control requires Start and Stop inputs
Stop input is always required.
None Wire inputs correctly and/or install jumper.
If the PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function is used, verify that inputs are active.
Incorrect Sink/Source jumper setting. None Set switch to match wiring scheme.
Drive does not respond to changes in speed command.
Motor and/or drive will not accelerate to commanded speed.
Motor operation is unstable.
Drive will not reverse motor direction.
No value is coming from the source of the command. The drive Run indicator is
lit and output is 0 Hz.
Check b012 [Control Source] for correct source.
If the source is an analog input, check wiring and use a meter to check for presence of
signal.
Check b002 [Commanded Freq] to verify correct command.
Incorrect reference source is being selected by remote device or
digital inputs.
None Check b012 [Control Source] for correct source.
Check b014 [Dig In Status] to see if inputs are selecting an alternate source. Verify
settings for t062, t063, t065-t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx].
Check P047, P049, P051 [Speed Referencex] for the source of the speed reference.
Reprogram as necessary.
Review the Speed Reference Control chart on page 46.
Verify communications if used.
Acceleration time is excessive. None Reprogram P041, A442, A444, A446 [Accel Time x].
Excess load or short acceleration times force the drive into
current limit, slowing or stopping acceleration.
None Compare b003 [Output Current] with A484, A485 [Current Limit x].
Remove excess load or reprogram P041, A442, A444, A446 [Accel Time x].
Check for improper A530 [Boost Select] setting.
Speed command source or value is not as expected. None Verify b002 [Commanded Freq].
Check b012 [Control Source] for the proper Speed Command.
Programming is preventing the drive output from exceeding
limiting values.
None Check P044 [Maximum Freq] to ensure that speed is not limited by programming.
Verify programming of A572 [Speed Ratio].
Torque performance does not match motor characteristics. None Set motor nameplate full load amps in parameter P034 [Motor NP FLA].
Perform P040 [Autotune] Static Tune or Rotate Tune procedure.
Set P039 [Torque Perf Mode] to 0 V/Hz.
Motor data was incorrectly entered. None 1. Correctly enter motor nameplate data into P031, P032 and P033.
2. Enable A547 [Compensation].
3. Use A530 [Boost Select] to reduce boost level.
Reverse is disabled. None Check A544 [Reverse Disable].
Digital input is not selected for reversing control. None Check [DigIn TermBlk xx] (See page 82). Choose correct input and program for reversing
mode.
Digital input is incorrectly wired. None Check input wiring (See page 42).
Motor wiring is improperly phased for reverse. None Switch two motor leads.
Drive does not power up.
Motor is rotating at zero Hz or slip frequency is not correct.
No input power to drive. None Check the power circuit.
Check the supply voltage.
Check all fuses and disconnects.
Control module is not connected properly to power module. None 1. Remove power.
2. Verify that the control module is properly and fully installed on the power module.
3. Reapply power.
Incorrect speed calculation. Improper speed. Verify P032 [Motor NP Hertz].
Reduce boost with A530 [Boost Select].
Set P036 [Motor NP RPM] to motor synchronous speed.
Notes:
Appendix A
Supplemental Drive Information
Certifications
Certifications 155
Environmental Specifications 156
Technical Specifications 157
Power Specifications 160
Certifications PowerFlex 523 PowerFlex 525
c-UL-us Listed to UL508C and CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 14-05.
C-Tick Australian Communications and Media Authority
In conformity with the following:
Radiocommunications Act: 1992
Radiocommunications Standard: 2008
Radiocommunications Labelling Notice: 2008
Standards applied:
EN 61800-3:2004 +A1:2012
CE In conformity with the following European Directives:
EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)
Standards applied:
EN 61800-3:2004 +A1:2012
EN 61800-5-1:2007
TUV Not applicable TV Rheinland
Standards applied:
EN ISO 13849-1:2008
EN 61800-5-2:2007
EN 61508 PARTS 1-7:2010
EN 62061:2005
EN 60204-1:2009
Certified to ISO 13849-1 SIL2/PLd with
embedded Safe-Torque-Off function
Meets Functional Safety (FS) when used with
embedded Safe-Torque-Off function
ATEX
II (2) G D
Not applicable Certified to ATEX directive 94/9/EC
Group II Category (2) GD Applications with ATEX
Approved Motors
KCC Korean Registration of Broadcasting and Communications Equipment
Compliant with the following standards:
Article 58-2 of Radio Waves Act, Clause 3
GOST-R Russian GOST-R Certificate no.
POCC US.ME92.H00040
AC 156 Tested by Trentec to be compliant with AC156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification
Testing of Nonstructural Components and 2003 International Building Code for worst-case
seismic level for USA excluding site class F
N223
TUV
Rheinland
. .
Functional
Safety
Bauart geprft
Type approved
Appendix A Supplemental Drive Information
Environmental Specifications
EPRI Electric Power Research Institute
Certified compliant with the following standards:
SEMI F47
IEC 61000-4-34
Lloyds Register Not applicable Lloyds Register Type Approval Certificate
12/10068(E1)
RoHS Compliant with the European Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive
The drive is also designed to meet the appropriate portions of the following specifications:
NFPA 70 - US National Electrical Code
NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable
Speed Drive Systems.
Certifications PowerFlex 523 PowerFlex 525
Specifications PowerFlex 523 PowerFlex 525
Altitude:
Without derating:
With derating:
See Current Derating Curves on page 17 for derating guidelines.
1000 m (3300 ft) max.
Up to 4000 m (13,200 ft) max., with the exception of 600V drives at 2000 m (6600 ft)
max.
Max. Surrounding Air
Temperature
Without derating:
With derating:
See Current Derating Curves on page 17 for derating guidelines.
-20...50 C (-4...122 F)
-20...60 C (-4...140 F) or -20...70 C (-4...158 F) with optional Control Module Fan
kit.
Storage Temperature:
Frame A...D:
Frame E:
-40...85 C (-40...185 F)
-40...70 C (-40...158 F)
Atmosphere:
Relative Humidity: 0...95% noncondensing
Shock:
Vibration:
Complies with IEC 60068-2-27
Complies with IEC 60068-2-6:1995
Conformal Coating: Complies with:
IEC 60721-3-3 to level 3C2 (chemical and gases only)
Surrounding Environment
Pollution Degree
Pollution Degree 1 & 2:
See Pollution Degree Ratings According to EN 61800-5-1 on page 49
for descriptions.
All enclosures acceptable.
Sound Pressure Level
(A-weighted)
Frame A & B:
Frame C:
Frame D:
Frame E:
Measurements are taken 1 m from the drive.
Maximum 53 dBA
Maximum 57 dBA
Maximum 64 dBA
Maximum 68 dBA
IMPORTANT
Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or
corrosive gas, vapors or dust. If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time, it must
be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere.
Frame
Size
Operating and Nonoperating Nonoperating (Transportation)
Force
(Shock/Vibration) Mounting Type
Force
(Shock/Vibration) Mounting Type
A 15 g / 2 g DIN rail or screw 30 g/ 2.5 g Screw only
B 15 g / 2 g DIN rail or screw 30 g/ 2.5 g Screw only
C 15 g / 2 g DIN rail or screw 30 g/ 2.5 g Screw only
D 15 g / 2 g Screw only 30 g/ 2.5 g Screw only
E 15 g / 1.5 g Screw only 30 g/ 2.5 g Screw only
Supplemental Drive Information Appendix A
Technical Specifications
Protection
Electrical
Control
Bus Overvoltage Trip
100...120V AC Input:
405V DC bus (equivalent to 150V AC incoming line)
Bus Undervoltage Trip
525...600V AC Input
P038 = 3 600V:
P038 = 2 480V:
Power Ride-Thru: 100 ms
Logic Control Ride-Thru: 0.5 s minimum, 2 s typical
Electronic Motor Overload
Protection:
Provides class 10 motor overload protection according to NEC article 430 and motor
over-temperature protection according to NEC article 430.126 (A) (2).
UL 508C File 29572.
Overcurrent: 200% hardware limit, 300% instantaneous fault
Ground Fault Trip: Phase-to-ground on drive output
Short Circuit Trip: Phase-to-phase on drive output
Voltage Tolerance: -15% / +10%
Frequency Tolerance: 47...63 Hz
Input Phases: Three-phase input provides full rating. Single-phase input provides 35% rating on
three-phase drives.
Displacement Power Factor: 0.98 across entire speed range
Maximum Short Circuit Rating: 100,000 Amps Symmetrical
Actual Short Circuit Rating: Determined by AIC Rating of installed fuse/circuit breaker
Transistor Type: Isolated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT)
Internal DC Bus Choke
Only for Frame E drive ratings
11 kW (15 HP)
15...18.5 kW (20...25 HP) Heavy Duty
15...18.5 kW (20...25 HP) Heavy Duty
Method Sinusoidal PWM, Volts/Hertz, Sensorless Vector Control, Economizer SVC motor control
and Closed Loop Velocity Vector Control (Closed Loop Velocity Vector Control is not
applicable to PowerFlex 523 drives)
Carrier Frequency 2...16 kHz, Drive rating based on 4 kHz
Frequency Accuracy
Digital Input:
Analog Input:
Within 0.05% of set output frequency
Within 0.5% of maximum output frequency, 10-Bit resolution
Analog Output: 2% of full scale, 10-Bit resolution
Performance
V/Hz (Volts per Hertz):
SVC (Sensorless Vector):
SVC Economizer:
VVC (Velocity Vector Control):
1% of base speed across a 60:1 speed range
0.5% of base speed across a 100:1 speed range
0.5% of base speed across a 100:1 speed range
0.5% of base speed across a 60:1 speed range Not applicable to PowerFlex 523
drives
Control Inputs
Control Outputs
Performance with Encoder
SVC (Sensorless Vector):
SVC Economizer:
VVC (Velocity Vector Control):
0.1% of base speed across a 100:1 speed

range
0.1% of base speed across a 100:1 speed
range
0.1% of base speed across a 1000:1
speed range
Output Voltage Range: 0V to rated motor voltage
Output Frequency Range: 0...500 Hz (programmable)
Efficiency: 97.5% (typical)
Stop Modes: Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp, Coast, DC-Brake,
and Ramp-to-Stop
Accel/Decel: Four independently programmable accel and decel times. Each time may be
programmed from 0...600 s in 0.01 s increments.
Intermittent Overload
Normal Duty: 110% Overload capability for up to 60 s, 150% for up to 3 s
Applies for power rating above 15 kW (20 HP) only. Based on 480V drive rating.
Heavy Duty: 150% Overload capability for up to 60 s, 180% for up to 3 s
Digital Bandwidth: 10 Rad/s for open and closed loop
Quantity: (1) Dedicated for stop
(4) Programmable
(1) Dedicated for stop
(6) Programmable
Current: 6 mA
Type
Source Mode (SRC):
Sink Mode (SNK):
18...24V = ON, 0...6V = OFF
0...6V = ON, 18...24V = OFF
Pulse Train
Quantity:
Input Signal:
Input Frequency:
Current
Consumption:
(1) Shared with one of the programmable digital input terminals.
Transistor contact (open collector)
0...100 kHz
7 mA @ 24V DC maximum
Analog: Quantity: (2) Isolated, 0-10V and 4-20mA (2) Isolated, -10-10V and 4-20mA
Specification
Resolution:
0-10V DC Analog:
4-20mA Analog:
External Pot:
10-bit
100k ohm input impedance
250 ohm input impedance
1...10k ohm, 2 W minimum
Relay: Quantity: (1) Programmable Form C (2) 1 Programmable Form A and
1 Programmable Form B
Specification
Resistive Rating:
Inductive Rating:
3.0 A @ 30V DC, 3.0 A @ 125V, 3.0 A @ 240V AC
0.5 A @ 30V DC, 0.5 A @ 125V, 0.5 A @ 240V AC
Encoder
Opto: Quantity: (2) Programmable
Specification: 30V DC, 50 mA Non-inductive
Analog Quantity: (1) Non-Isolated 0-10V or 4-20 mA
Specification
Resolution:
0-10V DC Analog:
4-20 mA Analog:
10-bit
1 k ohm minimum
525 ohm maximum
Type: Incremental, dual channel
Supply: 12V, 250 mA
Quadrature: 90 , 27 @ 25 C
Duty Cycle: 50%, +10%
Requirements: Encoders must be line driver type, quadrature (dual channel) or pulse
(single channel), 3.5...26V DC output, single-ended or differential and
capable of supplying a minimum of 10 mA per channel.
Allowable input is DC up to a maximum frequency of 250 kHz. The
encoder I/O automatically scales to allow 5V, 12V and 24V DC nominal
voltages.
Power Specifications
Watts Loss
PowerFlex 520-Series Estimated Watts Loss (Rated Load, Speed & PWM)
Voltage Output Current (A) Total Watts Loss
100...120V,
50/60 Hz 1-Phase
1.6 20.0
2.5 27.0
4.8 53.0
6.0 67.0
200...240V,
50/60 Hz 1-Phase
1.6 20.0
2.5 29.0
4.8 50.0
8.0 81.0
11.0 111.0
200...240V,
50/60 Hz 1-Phase
w/ EMC Filter
1.6 20.0
2.5 29.0
4.8 53.0
8.0 84.0
11.0 116.0
200...240V,
50/60 Hz 3-Phase
1.6 20.0
2.5 29.0
5.0 50.0
8.0 79.0
11.0 107.0
17.5 148.0
24.0 259.0
32.2 323.0
48.3 584.0
62.1 708.0
380...480V,
50/60 Hz 3-Phase
1.4 27.0
2.3 37.0
4.0 62.0
6.0 86.0
10.5 129.0
13.0 170.0
17.0 221.0
24.0 303.0
30.0 387.0
380...480V,
50/60 Hz 3-Phase
w/ EMC Filter
1.4 27.0
2.3 37.0
4.0 63.0
6.0 88.0
10.5 133.0
13.0 175.0
17.0 230.0
24.0 313.0
30.0 402.0
37.0 602.0
43.0 697.0
Input Current Scaling (Optional)
You can use a higher drive rating by scaling the input current based on the output
current required for your application.
525...600V,
50/60 Hz 3-Phase
0.9 22.0
1.7 32.0
3.0 50.0
4.2 65.0
6.6 95.0
9.9 138.0
12.0 164.0
19.0 290.0
22.0 336.0
27.0 466.0
32.0 562.0
PowerFlex 520-Series Input Current Scaled By Motor Current
PowerFlex 523 PowerFlex 525 Output Input
Catalog Number Catalog Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
100...120V AC (-15%, +10%) 1-Phase Input, 0...230V 3-Phase Output
25A-V1P6N104 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.8 6.4 5.2 4.0 3.2
25A-V2P5N104 25B-V2P5N104 2.5 2.0 1.6 1.3 9.6 7.7 6.2 4.8
25A-V4P8N104 25B-V4P8N104 4.8 3.8 3.1 2.4 19.2 15.4 12.5 9.6
25A-V6P0N104 25B-V6P0N104 6.0 4.8 3.9 3.0 24.0 19.2 15.6 12.0
25A-A1P6N104 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.8 5.3 4.3 3.4 2.7
25A-A2P5N104 25B-A2P5N104 2.5 2.0 1.6 1.3 6.5 5.2 4.2 3.3
25A-A4P8N104 25B-A4P8N104 4.8 3.8 3.1 2.4 10.7 8.6 7.0 5.4
25A-A8P0N104 25B-A8P0N104 8.0 6.4 5.2 4.0 18.0 14.4 11.7 9.0
25A-A011N104 25B-A011N104 11.0 8.8 7.2 5.5 22.9 18.3 14.9 11.5
200...240V AC (-15%, +10%) 1-Phase Input with EMC Filter, 0...230V 3-Phase Output
25A-A1P6N114 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.8 5.3 4.3 3.4 2.7
25A-A2P5N114 25B-A2P5N114 2.5 2.0 1.6 1.3 6.5 5.2 4.2 3.3
25A-A4P8N114 25B-A4P8N114 4.8 3.8 3.1 2.4 10.7 8.6 7.0 5.4
25A-A8P0N114 25B-A8P0N114 8.0 6.4 5.2 4.0 18.0 14.4 11.7 9.0
25A-A011N114 25B-A011N114 11.0 8.8 7.2 5.5 22.9 18.3 14.9 11.5
25A-B1P6N104 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.8 1.9 1.5 1.2 1.0
25A-B2P5N104 25B-B2P5N104 2.5 2.0 1.6 1.3 2.7 2.2 1.8 1.4
25A-B5P0N104 25B-B5P0N104 5.0 4.0 3.2 2.5 5.8 4.6 3.8 2.9
25A-B8P0N104 25B-B8P0N104 8.0 6.4 5.2 4.0 9.5 7.6 6.2 4.8
25A-B011N104 25B-B011N104 11.0 8.8 7.2 5.5 13.8 11.0 9.0 6.9
25A-B017N104 25B-B017N104 17.5 14.0 11.4 8.8 21.1 16.9 13.7 10.6
25A-B024N104 25B-B024N104 24.0 19.2 15.6 12.0 26.6 21.3 17.3 13.3
25A-B032N104 25B-B032N104 32.2 25.8 20.9 16.1 34.8 27.8 22.6 17.4
25A-B048N104 25B-B048N104 48.3 38.6 31.4 24.2 44.0 35.2 28.6 22.0
25A-B062N104 25B-B062N104 62.1 49.7 40.4 31.1 56.0 44.8 36.4 28.0
PowerFlex 520-Series Estimated Watts Loss (Rated Load, Speed & PWM)
Voltage Output Current (A) Total Watts Loss
25A-D1P4N104 25B-D1P4N104 1.4 1.1 0.9 0.7 1.9 1.5 1.2 1.0
25A-D2P3N104 25B-D2P3N104 2.3 1.8 1.5 1.2 3.2 2.6 2.1 1.6
25A-D4P0N104 25B-D4P0N104 4.0 3.2 2.6 2.0 5.7 4.6 3.7 2.9
25A-D6P0N104 25B-D6P0N104 6.0 4.8 3.9 3.0 7.5 6.0 4.9 3.8
25A-D010N104 25B-D010N104 10.5 8.4 6.8 5.3 13.8 11.0 9.0 6.9
25A-D013N104 25B-D013N104 13.0 10.4 8.5 6.5 15.4 12.3 10.0 7.7
25A-D017N104 25B-D017N104 17.0 13.6 11.1 8.5 18.4 14.7 12.0 9.2
25A-D024N104 25B-D024N104 24.0 19.2 15.6 12.0 26.4 21.1 17.2 13.2
25A-D030N104 25B-D030N104 30.0 24.0 19.5 15.0 33.0 26.4 21.5 16.5
25A-D1P4N114 25B-D1P4N114 1.4 1.1 0.9 0.7 1.9 1.5 1.2 1.0
25A-D2P3N114 25B-D2P3N114 2.3 1.8 1.5 1.2 3.2 2.6 2.1 1.6
25A-D4P0N114 25B-D4P0N114 4.0 3.2 2.6 2.0 5.7 4.6 3.7 2.9
25A-D6P0N114 25B-D6P0N114 6.0 4.8 3.9 3.0 7.5 6.0 4.9 3.8
25A-D010N114 25B-D010N114 10.5 8.4 6.8 5.3 13.8 11.0 9.0 6.9
25A-D013N114 25B-D013N114 13.0 10.4 8.5 6.5 15.4 12.3 10.0 7.7
25A-D017N114 25B-D017N114 17.0 13.6 11.1 8.5 18.4 14.7 12.0 9.2
25A-D024N114 25B-D024N114 24.0 19.2 15.6 12.0 26.4 21.1 17.2 3.2
25A-D030N114 25B-D030N114 30.0 24.0 19.5 15.0 33.0 26.4 21.5 16.5
25A-D037N114 25B-D037N114 37.0 29.6 24.1 18.5 33.7 27.0 21.9 16.9
25A-D043N114 25B-D043N114 43.0 34.4 28.0 21.5 38.9 31.1 25.3 19.5
25A-E0P9N104 25B-E0P9N104 0.9 0.7 0.6 0.5 1.2 1.0 0.8 0.6
25A-E1P7N104 25B-E1P7N104 1.7 1.4 1.1 0.9 2.3 1.8 1.5 1.2
25A-E3P0N104 25B-E3P0N104 3.0 2.4 2.0 1.5 3.8 3.0 2.5 1.9
25A-E4P2N104 25B-E4P2N104 4.2 3.4 2.7 2.1 5.3 4.2 3.4 2.7
25A-E6P6N104 25B-E6P6N104 6.6 5.3 4.3 3.3 8.0 6.4 5.2 4.0
25A-E9P9N104 25B-E9P9N104 9.9 7.9 6.4 5.0 11.2 9.0 7.3 5.6
25A-E012N104 25B-E012N104 12.0 9.6 7.8 6.0 13.5 10.8 8.8 6.8
25A-E019N104 25B-E019N104 19.0 15.2 12.4 9.5 24.0 19.2 15.6 12.0
25A-E022N104 25B-E022N104 22.0 17.6 14.3 11.0 27.3 21.8 17.7 13.7
25A-E027N104 25B-E027N104 27.0 21.6 17.6 13.5 24.7 19.8 16.1 12.4
25A-E032N104 25B-E032N104 32.0 25.6 20.8 16.0 29.2 23.4 19.0 14.6
PowerFlex 520-Series Input Current Scaled By Motor Current
PowerFlex 523 PowerFlex 525 Output Input
Catalog Number Catalog Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Appendix B
Accessories and Dimensions
Product Selection
Catalog Number Description
25B - V 2P5 N 1 0 4
Drive Voltage Rating Rating Enclosure HIM Emission Class Version
PowerFlex 520-Series Drive Ratings
Output Ratings
Input
Voltage Range
Frame
Size
PowerFlex 523 PowerFlex 525 Normal Duty Heavy Duty
Output
Current (A) HP kW HP kW Catalog No. Catalog No.
0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2 1.6 85...132 A 25A-V1P6N104
(2)
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 2.5 85...132 A 25A-V2P5N104 25B-V2P5N104

1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 4.8 85...132 B 25A-V4P8N104 25B-V4P8N104
1.5 1.1 1.5 1.1 6.0 85...132 B 25A-V6P0N104 25B-V6P0N104
0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2 1.6 170...264 A 25A-A1P6N104
(2)
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 2.5 170...264 A 25A-A2P5N104 25B-A2P5N104

1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 4.8 170...264 A 25A-A4P8N104 25B-A4P8N104
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 8.0 170...264 B 25A-A8P0N104 25B-A8P0N104
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 11.0 170...264 B 25A-A011N104 25B-A011N104
0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2 1.6 170...264 A 25A-A1P6N114
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 2.5 170...264 A 25A-A2P5N114 25B-A2P5N114
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 4.8 170...264 A 25A-A4P8N114 25B-A4P8N114
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 8.0 170...264 B 25A-A8P0N114 25B-A8P0N114
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 11.0 170...264 B 25A-A011N114 25B-A011N114
0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2 1.6 170...264 A 25A-B1P6N104
(2)
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 2.5 170...264 A 25A-B2P5N104 25B-B2P5N104

1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 5.0 170...264 A 25A-B5P0N104 25B-B5P0N104
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 8.0 170...264 A 25A-B8P0N104 25B-B8P0N104
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 11.0 170...264 A 25A-B011N104 25B-B011N104
5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0 17.5 170...264 B 25A-B017N104 25B-B017N104
7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5 24.0 170...264 C 25A-B024N104 25B-B024N104
10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5 32.2 170...264 D 25A-B032N104 25B-B032N104
15.0 11.0 10.0 7.5 48.3 170...264 E 25A-B048N104 25B-B048N104
20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0 62.1 170...264 E 25A-B062N104 25B-B062N104
(1)
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 1.4 323...528 A 25A-D1P4N104
(2)
25B-D1P4N104
(2)
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 2.3 323...528 A 25A-D2P3N104 25B-D2P3N104
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 4.0 323...528 A 25A-D4P0N104 25B-D4P0N104
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 6.0 323...528 A 25A-D6P0N104 25B-D6P0N104
5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0 10.5 323...528 B 25A-D010N104 25B-D010N104
Appendix B Accessories and Dimensions
7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5 13.0 323...528 C 25A-D013N104 25B-D013N104
10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5 17.0 323...528 C 25A-D017N104 25B-D017N104
15.0 11.0 15.0 11.0 24.0 323...528 D 25A-D024N104 25B-D024N104
20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0 30.0 323...528 D 25A-D030N104 25B-D030N104
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 1.4 323...528 A 25A-D1P4N114 25B-D1P4N114
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 2.3 323...528 A 25A-D2P3N114 25B-D2P3N114
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 4.0 323...528 A 25A-D4P0N114 25B-D4P0N114
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 6.0 323...528 A 25A-D6P0N114 25B-D6P0N114
5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0 10.5 323...528 B 25A-D010N114 25B-D010N114
7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5 13.0 323...528 C 25A-D013N114 25B-D013N114
10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5 17.0 323...528 C 25A-D017N114 25B-D017N114
15.0 11.0 15.0 11.0 24.0 323...528 D 25A-D024N114 25B-D024N114
20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0 30.0 323...528 D 25A-D030N114 25B-D030N114
25.0 18.5 20.0 15.0 37.0 323...528 E 25A-D037N114 25B-D037N114
30.0 22.0 25.0 18.5 43.0 323...528 E 25A-D043N114 25B-D043N114
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.9 446...660 A 25A-E0P9N104
(2)
25B-E0P9N104
(2)
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 1.7 446...660 A 25A-E1P7N104 25B-E1P7N104
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 3.0 446...660 A 25A-E3P0N104 25B-E3P0N104
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 4.2 446...660 A 25A-E4P2N104 25B-E4P2N104
5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0 6.6 446...660 B 25A-E6P6N104 25B-E6P6N104
7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5 9.9 446...660 C 25A-E9P9N104 25B-E9P9N104
10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5 12.0 446...660 C 25A-E012N104 25B-E012N104
15.0 11.0 15.0 11.0 19.0 446...660 D 25A-E019N104 25B-E019N104
20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0 22.0 446...660 D 25A-E022N104 25B-E022N104
25.0 18.5 20.0 15.0 27.0 446...660 E 25A-E027N104 25B-E027N104
30.0 22.0 25.0 18.5 32.0 446...660 E 25A-E032N104 25B-E032N104
(1) A non-filtered drive is not available for 380...480V AC 25 HP (18.5 kW) and 30 HP (22.0 kW) ratings. Filtered drives are available,
however you must verify that the application will support a filtered drive.
(2) These drive ratings do not come with a heatsink cooling fan and are in accordance with design specifications.
Dynamic Brake Resistors
Drive Ratings Minimum
Resistance
10%
Resistance
5% Catalog No.
(1)(2)
Input Voltage HP kW
100...120V
50/60 Hz
1-Phase
0.25 0.2 56 91 AK-R2-091P500
0.5 0.4 56 91 AK-R2-091P500
1.0 0.75 56 91 AK-R2-091P500
1.5 1.1 41 91 AK-R2-091P500
200...240V
50/60 Hz
1-Phase
0.25 0.2 56 91 AK-R2-091P500
0.5 0.4 56 91 AK-R2-091P500
1.0 0.75 56 91 AK-R2-091P500
2.0 1.5 41 91 AK-R2-091P500
3.0 2.2 32 47 AK-R2-047P500
PowerFlex 520-Series Drive Ratings
Output Ratings
Input
Voltage Range
Frame
Size
PowerFlex 523 PowerFlex 525 Normal Duty Heavy Duty
Output
Current (A) HP kW HP kW Catalog No. Catalog No.
Accessories and Dimensions Appendix B
(1) The resistors listed in this tables are rated for 5% duty cycle.
(2) Use of Rockwell Automation resistors is always recommended. The resistors listed have been carefully selected for optimizing
performance in a variety of applications. Alternative resistors may be used, however, care must be taken when making a selection.
See the PowerFlex Dynamic Braking Resistor Calculator, publication PFLEX-AT001.
(3) Requires two resistors wired in parallel.
(4) Requires three resistors wired in parallel.
200...240V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.25 0.2 56 91 AK-R2-091P500
0.5 0.4 56 91 AK-R2-091P500
1.0 0.75 56 91 AK-R2-091P500
2.0 1.5 41 91 AK-R2-091P500
3.0 2.2 32 47 AK-R2-047P500
5.0 4.0 18 47 AK-R2-047P500
7.5 5.5 16 30 AK-R2-030P1K2
10.0 7.5 14 30 AK-R2-030P1K2
15.0 11.0 14 15 AK-R2-030P1K2
(3)
20.0 15.0 10 15 AK-R2-030P1K2
(3)
380...480V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.5 0.4 89 360 AK-R2-360P500
1.0 0.75 89 360 AK-R2-360P500
2.0 1.5 89 360 AK-R2-360P500
3.0 2.2 89 120 AK-R2-120P1K2
5.0 4.0 47 120 AK-R2-120P1K2
7.5 5.5 47 120 AK-R2-120P1K2
10.0 7.5 47 120 AK-R2-120P1K2
15.0 11.0 43 60 AK-R2-120P1K2
(3)
20.0 15.0 43 60 AK-R2-120P1K2
(3)
25.0 18.5 27 40 AK-R2-120P1K2
(4)
30.0 22.0 27 40 AK-R2-120P1K2
(4)
525...600V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.5 0.4 112 360 AK-R2-360P500
1.0 0.75 112 360 AK-R2-360P500
2.0 1.5 112 360 AK-R2-360P500
3.0 2.2 112 120 AK-R2-120P1K2
5.0 4.0 86 120 AK-R2-120P1K2
7.5 5.5 59 120 AK-R2-120P1K2
10.0 7.5 59 120 AK-R2-120P1K2
15.0 11.0 59 60 AK-R2-120P1K2
(3)
20.0 15.0 59 60 AK-R2-120P1K2
(3)
25.0 18.5 53 60 AK-R2-120P1K2
(3)
30.0 22.0 34 40 AK-R2-120P1K2
(4)
EMC Line Filters
Drive Ratings
Frame Size Catalog No. Input Voltage HP kW Current (A)
100...120V
50/60 Hz
1-Phase
0.25 0.2 1.6 A 25-RF011-AL
0.5 0.4 2.5 A 25-RF011-AL
1.0 0.75 4.8 B 25-RF023-BL
1.5 1.1 6.0 B 25-RF023-BL
Dynamic Brake Resistors
Drive Ratings Minimum
Resistance
10%
Resistance
5% Catalog No.
(1)(2)
Input Voltage HP kW
200...240V
50/60 Hz
1-Phase
0.25 0.2 1.6 A 25-RF011-AL
0.5 0.4 2.5 A 25-RF011-AL
1.0 0.75 4.8 A 25-RF011-AL
2.0 1.5 8.0 B 25-RF023-BL
3.0 2.2 11.0 B 25-RF023-BL
200...240V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.25 0.2 1.6 A 25-RF014-AL
0.5 0.4 2.5 A 25-RF014-AL
1.0 0.75 5.0 A 25-RF014-AL
2.0 1.5 8.0 A 25-RF014-AL
3.0 2.2 11.0 A 25-RF014-AL
5.0 4.0 17.5 B 25-RF021-BL
7.5 5.5 24.0 C 25-RF027-CL
10.0 7.5 32.2 D 25-RF035-DL
15.0 11.0 48.3 E 25-RF056-EL
20.0 15.0 62.1 E 25-RF056-EL
380...480V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.5 0.4 1.4 A 25-RF7P5-AL
1.0 0.75 2.3 A 25-RF7P5-AL
2.0 1.5 4.0 A 25-RF7P5-AL
3.0 2.2 6.0 A 25-RF7P5-AL
5.0 4.0 10.5 B 25-RF014-BL
7.5 5.5 13.0 C 25-RF018-CL
10.0 7.5 17.0 C 25-RF018-CL
15.0 11.0 24.0 D 25-RF033-DL
20.0 15.0 30.0 D 25-RF033-DL
25.0 18.5 37.0 E 25-RF039-EL
30.0 22.0 43.0 E 25-RF039-EL
(1)
525...600V
50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.5 0.4 0.9 A 25-RF8P0-BL
(2)
1.0 0.75 1.7 A 25-RF8P0-BL
(2)
2.0 1.5 3.0 A 25-RF8P0-BL
(2)
3.0 2.2 4.2 A 25-RF8P0-BL
(2)
5.0 4.0 6.6 B 25-RF8P0-BL
7.5 5.5 9.9 C 25-RF014-CL
10.0 7.5 12.0 C 25-RF014-CL
15.0 11.0 19.0 D 25-RF027-DL
20.0 15.0 22.0 D 25-RF027-DL
25.0 18.5 27.0 E 25-RF029-EL
30.0 22.0 32.0 E 25-RF029-EL
(1)
(1) EMC Line Filter size is based on the input current of the drive. See the tables on page 25 and page 26 for more information.
(2) This 600V drive rating needs to be matched with a frame B EMC Line Filter.
EMC Plates
Item Description
Frame
Size Catalog No.
EMC Plate Optional grounding plate for shielded cables. A 25-EMC1-FA
B 25-EMC1-FB
C 25-EMC1-FC
D 25-EMC1-FD
E 25-EMC1-FE
EMC Line Filters
Drive Ratings
Frame Size Catalog No. Input Voltage HP kW Current (A)
Human Interface Module (HIM) Option Kits and Accessories
Item Description Catalog No.
LCD Display, Remote Panel
Mount
Digital speed control
CopyCat capable
IP66 (NEMA Type 4X/12) indoor use only
Includes 2.9 meter cable
22-HIM-C2S
LCD Display, Remote
Handheld
Digital speed control
Full numeric keyboard
CopyCat capable
IP 30 (NEMA Type 1)
Includes 1.0 meter cable
Panel mount with optional Bezel Kit
22-HIM-A3
Bezel Kit Panel mount for LCD Display, Remote Handheld unit, IP 30 (NEMA Type 1)
Includes 2.0 m DSI cable
22-HIM-B1
DSI HIM Cable
(DSI HIM to RJ45 cable)
1.0 m (3.3 ft) 22-HIM-H10
2.9 m (9.51 ft) 22-HIM-H30
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Kit
Item Description
Frame
Size Catalog No.
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Kit Field installed kit. Converts drive to IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1
enclosure. Includes conduit box with mounting screws and
plastic top panel.
A 25-JBAA
B 25-JBAB
C 25-JBAC
D 25-JBAD
E 25-JBAE
Item Description
Frame
Size Catalog No.
Control Module Fan Kit For use with drive in environments with ambient
temperatures up to 70 C or horizontal mounting.
A...D 25-FAN1-70C
E 25-FAN2-70C
Incremental Encoder Input Option
Incremental Encoder Incremental encoder input option board. 25-ENC-1
Bulletin 160 to PowerFlex 520-Series Mounting Adapter Plate
Item Description
B160
Frame
Size Catalog No.
Mounting Adapter Plate For use with drive when replacing Bulletin 160 drives in
existing installations to a PowerFlex 520-Series drive. Select
the catalog number based on the frame size of your Bulletin
160 drive.
A 25-MAP-FA
B 25-MAP-FB
Replacement Parts

PowerFlex 520-Series Power Module
Item Description
PowerFlex 520-Series
Power Module
Replacement power module for use with PowerFlex 520-Series drives. Includes:
Power Module
Power Module Front Cover
Power Terminal Guard
Heatsink Fan
Output Ratings
Input
Voltage Range
Frame
Size Catalog No.
Normal Duty Heavy Duty
Output
Current (A) HP kW HP kW
0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2 1.6 85...132 A 25-PM1-V1P6
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 2.5 85...132 A 25-PM1-V2P5
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 4.8 85...132 B 25-PM1-V4P8
1.5 1.1 1.5 1.1 6.0 85...132 B 25-PM1-V6P0
0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2 1.6 170...264 A 25-PM1-A1P6
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 2.5 170...264 A 25-PM1-A2P5
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 4.8 170...264 A 25-PM1-A4P8
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 8.0 170...264 B 25-PM1-A8P0
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 11.0 170...264 B 25-PM1-A011
0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2 1.6 170...264 A 25-PM2-A1P6
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 2.5 170...264 A 25-PM2-A2P5
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 4.8 170...264 A 25-PM2-A4P8
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 8.0 170...264 B 25-PM2-A8P0
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 11.0 170...264 B 25-PM2-A011
0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2 1.6 170...264 A 25-PM1-B1P6
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 2.5 170...264 A 25-PM1-B2P5
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 5.0 170...264 A 25-PM1-B5P0
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 8.0 170...264 A 25-PM1-B8P0
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 11.0 170...264 A 25-PM1-B011
5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0 17.5 170...264 B 25-PM1-B017
7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5 24.0 170...264 C 25-PM1-B024
10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5 32.2 170...264 D 25-PM1-B032
15.0 11.0 10.0 7.5 48.3 170...264 E 25-PM1-B048
20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0 62.1 170...264 E 25-PM1-B062
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 1.4 323...528 A 25-PM1-D1P4
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 2.3 323...528 A 25-PM1-D2P3
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 4.0 323...528 A 25-PM1-D4P0
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 6.0 323...528 A 25-PM1-D6P0
5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0 10.5 323...528 B 25-PM1-D010
7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5 13.0 323...528 C 25-PM1-D013
10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5 17.0 323...528 C 25-PM1-D017
15.0 11.0 15.0 11.0 24.0 323...528 D 25-PM1-D024
20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0 30.0 323...528 D 25-PM1-D030
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 1.4 323...528 A 25-PM2-D1P4
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 2.3 323...528 A 25-PM2-D2P3
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 4.0 323...528 A 25-PM2-D4P0
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 6.0 323...528 A 25-PM2-D6P0
5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0 10.5 323...528 B 25-PM2-D010
7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5 13.0 323...528 C 25-PM2-D013
10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5 17.0 323...528 C 25-PM2-D017
15.0 11.0 15.0 11.0 24.0 323...528 D 25-PM2-D024
20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0 30.0 323...528 D 25-PM2-D030
25.0 18.5 20.0 15.0 37.0 323...528 E 25-PM2-D037
30.0 22.0 25.0 18.5 43.0 323...528 E 25-PM2-D043
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 0.9 446...660 A 25-PM1-E0P9
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 1.7 446...660 A 25-PM1-E1P7
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 3.0 446...660 A 25-PM1-E3P0
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 4.2 446...660 A 25-PM1-E4P2
5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0 6.6 446...660 B 25-PM1-E6P6
7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5 9.9 446...660 C 25-PM1-E9P9
10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5 12.0 446...660 C 25-PM1-E012
15.0 11.0 15.0 11.0 19.0 446...660 D 25-PM1-E019
20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0 22.0 446...660 D 25-PM1-E022
25.0 18.5 20.0 15.0 27.0 446...660 E 25-PM1-E027
30.0 22.0 25.0 18.5 32.0 446...660 E 25-PM1-E032
PowerFlex 520-Series Control Module
Item Description
Frame
Size Catalog No.
PowerFlex 523 Control
Module
Replacement control module for use with
PowerFlex 520-Series drives. Includes:
Control Module
Control Module Front Cover
A...E 25A-CTM1
Module
25B-CTM1
Other Parts
Item Description
Frame
Size Catalog No.
Module Front Cover
Replacement cover for the control module I/O terminals,
EtherNet/IP and DSI ports.
A...E 25A-CTMFC1
Module Front Cover
25B-CTMFC1
Power Module Front Cover
Replacement cover for the PowerFlex 520-Series power
module.
B 25-PMFC-FB
C 25-PMFC-FC
D 25-PMFC-FD
E 25-PMFC-FE
Power Terminal Guard
Replacement finger guard for power terminals. A 25-PTG1-FA
B 25-PTG1-FB
C 25-PTG1-FC
D 25-PTG1-FD
E 25-PTG1-FE
Output Ratings
Input
Voltage Range
Frame
Size Catalog No.
Output
Current (A) HP kW HP kW
Heatsink Fan Kit
Replacement fan for drive power module. A 25-FAN1-FA
B 25-FAN1-FB
C 25-FAN1-FC
D 25-FAN1-FD
E 25-FAN1-FE
PowerFlex 520-Series EMC
Cores
Replacement EMC cores A 25-CORE-A
25-CORE-RF-A
B 25-CORE-B
25-CORE-RF-B
C 25-CORE-C
25-CORE-RF-C
D 25-CORE-D
25-CORE-RF-D
E 25-CORE-E
25-CORE-RF-E
Communication Option Kits and Accessories
Communication Adapters Embedded communication options for use with the
PowerFlex 520-Series drives:
DeviceNet
Dual Port EtherNet/IP
PROFIBUS DP-V1
25-COMM-D
25-COMM-E2P
25-COMM-P
Compact I/O Module Three channel 1769-SM2
Universal Serial Bus (USB)
Converter Module
Provides serial communication with DF1 protocol for use with
Connected Components Workbench software. Includes:
2 m USB cable (1)
20-HIM-H10 cable (1)
22-HIM-H10 cable (1)
1203-USB
Serial Converter Module
(RS485 to RS232)
Provides serial communication with DF1 protocol for use with
Connected Components Workbench software. Includes:
DSI to RS232 serial converter (1)
1203-SFC serial cable (1)
22-RJ45CBL-C20 cable (1)
22-SCM-232
DSI Cable 2.0 m RJ45 to RJ45 cable, male to male connectors. 22-RJ45CBL-C20
Serial Cable 2.0 m serial cable with a locking low profile connector to
connect to the serial converter and a 9-pin sub-miniature D
female connector to connect to a computer.
1203-SFC
Splitter Cable RJ45 one to two port splitter cable (Modbus only) AK-U0-RJ45-SC1
Terminating Resistors RJ45 120 Ohm resistors (2 pieces) AK-U0-RJ45-TR1
Terminal Block RJ45 Two position terminal block (5 pieces) AK-U0-RJ45-TB2P
Workbench Software
(Download or DVD-ROM)
Windows-based software packages for programming and
configuring Allen-Bradley drives and other Rockwell
Automation products.
Compatibility:
Windows XP, Windows Vista and Windows 7
http://
ab.rockwellautomation.co
m/programmable-
controllers/connected-
components-workbench-
software
Other Parts
Item Description
Frame
Size Catalog No.
Bulletin 1321-3R Series Line Reactors
Output Ratings
(1)
Input Line Reactor
(3)(4)
Output Line Reactor
(3)(4)
IP00
(Open Style)
IP11
(NEMA/UL Type 1)
IP00
(Open Style)
IP11
(NEMA/UL Type 1)
HP kW HP kW Catalog No. Catalog No. Catalog No. Catalog No.
200...240V 50/60 Hz 1-Phase
(2)
0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2 1321-3R4-A 1321-3RA4-A 1321-3R2-D 1321-3RA2-D
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 1321-3R8-A 1321-3RA8-A 1321-3R2-D 1321-3RA2-D
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 1321-3R8-A 1321-3RA8-A 1321-3R4-A 1321-3RA4-A
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 1321-3R18-A 1321-3RA18-A 1321-3R8-A 1321-3RA8-A
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 1321-3R18-A 1321-3RA18-A 1321-3R12-A 1321-3RA12-A
200...240V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase
0.25 0.2 0.25 0.2 1321-3R2-D 1321-3RA2-D 1321-3R2-D 1321-3RA2-D
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 1321-3R2-D 1321-3RA2-D 1321-3R2-D 1321-3RA2-D
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 1321-3R4-A 1321-3RA4-A 1321-3R4-A 1321-3RA4-A
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 1321-3R8-A 1321-3RA8-A 1321-3R8-A 1321-3RA8-A
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 1321-3R12-A 1321-3RA12-A 1321-3R12-A 1321-3RA12-A
5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0 1321-3R18-A 1321-3RA18-A 1321-3R18-A 1321-3RA18-A
7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5 1321-3R25-A 1321-3RA25-A 1321-3R25-A 1321-3RA25-A
10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5 1321-3R35-A 1321-3RA35-A 1321-3R35-A 1321-3RA35-A
15.0 11.0 10.0 7.5 1321-3R45-A 1321-3RA45-A 1321-3R45-A 1321-3RA45-A
20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0 1321-3R55-A (ND)
1321-3R45-A (HD)
1321-3RA55-A (ND)
1321-3RA45-A (HD)
1321-3R55-A (ND)
1321-3R45-A (HD)
1321-3RA55-A (ND)
1321-3RA45-A (HD)
380...480V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 1321-3R2-B 1321-3RA2-B 1321-3R2-B 1321-3RA2-B
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 1321-3R4-C 1321-3RA4-C 1321-3R4-C 1321-3RA4-C
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 1321-3R4-B 1321-3RA4-B 1321-3R4-B 1321-3RA4-B
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 1321-3R8-C 1321-3RA8-C 1321-3R8-C 1321-3RA8-C
5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0 1321-3R12-B 1321-3RA12-B 1321-3R12-B 1321-3RA12-B
7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5 1321-3R12-B 1321-3RA12-B 1321-3R12-B 1321-3RA12-B
10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5 1321-3R18-B 1321-3RA18-B 1321-3R18-B 1321-3RA18-B
15.0 11.0 15.0 11.0 1321-3R25-B 1321-3RA25-B 1321-3R25-B 1321-3RA25-B
20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0 1321-3R35-B (ND)
1321-3R25-B (HD)
1321-3RA35-B (ND)
1321-3RA25-B (HD)
1321-3R35-B (ND)
1321-3R25-B (HD)
1321-3RA35-B (ND)
1321-3RA25-B (HD)
25.0 18.5 20.0 15.0 1321-3R35-B 1321-3RA35-B 1321-3R35-B 1321-3RA35-B
30.0 22.0 25.0 18.5 1321-3R45-B (ND)
1321-3R35-B (HD)
1321-3RA45-B (ND)
1321-3RA35-B (HD)
1321-3R45-B (ND)
1321-3R35-B (HD)
1321-3RA45-B (ND)
1321-3RA35-B (HD)
525...600V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase
0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 1321-3R1-C 1321-3RA1-C 1321-3R1-C 1321-3RA1-C
1.0 0.75 1.0 0.75 1321-3R2-B 1321-3RA2-B 1321-3R2-B 1321-3RA2-B
2.0 1.5 2.0 1.5 1321-3R4-C 1321-3RA4-C 1321-3R4-C 1321-3RA4-C
3.0 2.2 3.0 2.2 1321-3R4-B 1321-3RA4-B 1321-3R4-B 1321-3RA4-B
5.0 4.0 5.0 4.0 1321-3R8-C 1321-3RA8-C 1321-3R8-C 1321-3RA8-C
7.5 5.5 7.5 5.5 1321-3R12-B 1321-3RA12-B 1321-3R12-B 1321-3RA12-B
10.0 7.5 10.0 7.5 1321-3R12-B 1321-3RA12-B 1321-3R12-B 1321-3RA12-B
15.0 11.0 15.0 11.0 1321-3R18-B 1321-3RA18-B 1321-3R18-B 1321-3RA18-B
20.0 15.0 15.0 11.0 1321-3R25-B (ND)
1321-3R18-B (HD)
1321-3RA25-B (ND)
1321-3RA18-B (HD)
1321-3R25-B (ND)
1321-3R18-B (HD)
1321-3RA25-B (ND)
1321-3RA18-B (HD)
25.0 18.5 20.0 15.0 1321-3R35-C (ND)
1321-3R25-C (HD)
1321-3RA35-C (ND)
1321-3RA25-C (HD)
1321-3R35-C (ND)
1321-3R25-C (HD)
1321-3RA35-C (ND)
1321-3RA25-C (HD)
30.0 22.0 25.0 18.5 1321-3R35-C (ND)
1321-3R25-B (HD)
1321-3RA35-C (ND)
1321-3RA25-B (HD)
1321-3R35-C (ND)
1321-3R25-B (HD)
1321-3RA35-C (ND)
1321-3RA25-B (HD)
(1) Normal Duty and Heavy Duty ratings for 15 HP (11 kW) and below are identical except for 200...240V 3-Phase 15 HP (11 kW) drive.
(2) Standard 3-phase reactors can be used for 1-phase applications by routing each of the two supply conductors through an outside
coil and leaving the center open.
(3) Catalog numbers listed are for 3% impedance at 60 Hz. 5% impedance reactor types are also available. See publication 1321-TD001.
(4) Input line reactors were sized based on the NEC fundamental motor amps. Output line reactors were sized based on the VFD rated
output currents.
Product Dimensions
The PowerFlex 520-series drive is available in five frame sizes. See the PowerFlex
520-Series Drive Ratings on page 163 for information on power ratings.
IP 20/Open Type Frame A
PowerFlex 520-Series Drive Weight
Frame Size Weight (kg/lb)
A 1.1 / 2.4
B 1.6 / 3.5
C 2.3 / 5.0
D 3.9 / 8.6
E 12.9 / 28.4
72.0 (2.83) 172.0 (6.77)
6.0 (0.24)
57.5 (2.26)
1
4
0
.
0

(
5
.
5
1
)
1
5
2
.
0

(
5
.
9
8
)
9
2
.
7

(
3
.
6
5
)
Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches)
IP 20/Open Type Frame B
IP 20/Open Type Frame C
87.0 (3.43) 172.0 (6.77)
72.5 (2.85)
6.0 (0.24)
1
8
0
.
0

(
7
.
0
9
)
9
2
.
7

(
3
.
6
5
)
1
6
8
.
0

(
6
.
6
1
)
109.0 (4.29)
90.5 (3.56)
2
2
0
.
0

(
8
.
6
6
)
2
0
7
.
0

(
8
.
1
5
)
184.0 (7.24)
6.0 (0.24)
9
2
.
7

(
3
.
6
5
)
IP 20/Open Type Frame D
IP 20/Open Type Frame E
130.0 (5.12)
2
6
0
.
0

(
1
0
.
2
4
)
2
4
7
.
0

(
9
.
7
2
)
116.0 (4.57)
212.0 (8.35)
6.0 (0.24)
185.0 (7.28)
160.0 (6.30)
3
0
0
.
0

(
1
1
.
8
1
)
2
8
0
.
0

(
1
1
.
0
2
)
279.0 (10.98)
7.6 (0.30)
IP 20/Open Type with Control Module Fan Kit Frame A...C
Specifications 25-FAN1-70C 25-FAN2-70C
Rated Voltage 24V DC
Operation Voltage 14...27.6V DC
Input Current 0.1 A 0.15 A
Speed (Reference) 7000 rpm 4500 10% rpm
Maximum Air Flow (At zero static pressure) 0.575 m
3
/min 1.574 m
3
/min
Maximum Air Pressure (At zero air flow) 7.70 mmH
2
O 9.598 mmH
2
O
Acoustical Noise 40.5 dB-A 46.0 dB-A
Insulation Type UL Class A
Frame Size Frame A...D Frame E
Wire Size 0.32 mm
2
(22 AWG)
Torque 0.29...0.39 Nm (2.6...3.47 lb-in.)
25-FAN1-70C 25-FAN2-70C
72.0 (2.83)
3
2
.
0

(
1
.
2
6
)
1
4
0
.
0

(
5
.
5
1
)
1
5
2
.
0

(
5
.
9
8
)
57.5 (2.26)
87.0 (3.43)
3
2
.
0

(
1
.
2
6
)
1
8
0
.
0

(
7
.
0
9
)
1
6
8
.
0

(
6
.
6
1
)
72.5 (2.85)
109.0 (4.29)
3
2
.
0

(
1
.
2
6
)

2
2
0
.
0

(
8
.
6
6
)
2
0
7
.
0

(
8
.
1
5
)
90.5 (3.56)
Frame A Frame B
Frame C
IMPORTANT An external 24V DC power source is required when using
the Control Module Fan Kit with drive frames A, B, and C.
IP 20/Open Type with Control Module Fan Kit Frame D...E
130.0 (5.12)
3
2
.
0

(
1
.
2
6
)
2
6
0
.
0

(
1
0
.
2
4
)
2
4
7
.
0

(
9
.
7
2
)
116.0 (4.57)
185.0 (7.28)
196.0 (7.72)
5
2
.
0

(
2
.
0
5
)
3
0
0
.
0

(
1
1
.
8
1
)
2
8
0
.
0

(
1
1
.
0
2
)
160.0 (6.30)
Frame D Frame E
IMPORTANT Remove the label to access the built-in 24V supply on drive frames D and E for use with the
Control Module Fan Kit.
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Frame A
72.0 (2.83)
172.0 (6.77)
6.0 (0.24)
51.1 (2.01)
21.0 (0.82)
57.5 (2.26) 1
5
.
0

(
0
.
5
9
)
2
1
9
.
0

(
8
.
6
2
)
9
2
.
7

(
3
.
6
5
)
1
4
0
.
0

(
5
.
5
1
)
1
3
5
.
4

(
5
.
3
3
)
1
1
1
.
9

(
4
.
4
1
)
8
8
.
2

(
3
.
4
7
)
6
4
.
7

(
2
.
5
5
)
1
5
2
.
0

(
5
.
9
8
)
21.5 (0.85)
IP 30/NEMA 1/ UL Type 1 conduit box
IP 30/NEMA 1/ UL Type 1 top panel
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Frame B
87.0 (3.43)
172.0 (6.77)
6.1 (0.24)
72.5 (2.85)
66.1 (2.60)
63.1 (2.48)
33.5 (1.32)
23.9 (0.94)
1
5
.
0

(
0
.
5
9
)
9
2
.
7

(
3
.
6
5
)
2
1
8
.
0

(
8
.
5
8
)
1
8
0
.
0

(
7
.
0
9
)
1
6
8
.
0

(
6
.
6
1
)
1
2
8
.
5

(
5
.
0
6
)
1
0
8
.
5

(
4
.
2
7
)
8
8
.
3

(
3
.
4
8
)
6
7
.
3

(
2
.
6
5
)
21.5 (0.85)
27.5 (1.08)
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Frame C
109.0 (4.29)
184.0 (7.24)
1
5
.
0

(
0
.
5
9
)
2
0
7
.
0

(
8
.
1
5
)
1
2
3
.
3

(
4
.
8
5
)
8
2
.
2

(
3
.
2
4
)
2
2
2
.
0

(
8
.
6
6
)
9
2
.
7

(
3
.
6
5
)
2
5
5
.
0

(
1
0
.
0
4
)
90.5 (3.56)
80.5 (3.17)
66.5 (2.62)
34.5 (1.36)
26.5 (1.04)
6.0 (0.24)
21.5 (0.85)
27.5 (1.08)
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Frame D
130.0 (5.12)
212.0 (8.35)
6.0 (0.24)
2
6
0
.
0

(
1
0
.
2
4
)
2
9
5
.
0

(
1
1
.
6
1
)
1
5
.
0

(
0
.
5
9
)
2
4
7
.
0

(
9
.
7
2
)
1
0
9
.
8

(
4
.
3
2
)
1
5
3
.
3

(
6
.
0
4
)
116.0 (4.57)
96.0 (3.78)
44.0 (1.73)
30.0 (1.18)
70.0 (2.76)
21.5 (0.85)
33.5 (1.32)
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Frame E
185.0 (7.28)
160.0 (6.30)
127.5 (5.02)
82.5 (3.25)
62.5 (2.46)
42.5 (1.67)
279.0 (10.98)
1
5
.
0

(
0
.
5
9
)
3
5
0
.
0

(
1
3
.
7
8
)
3
0
0
.
0

(
1
1
.
8
1
)
2
8
0
.
0

(
1
1
.
0
2
)
2
1
2
.
0

(
8
.
3
5
)
1
8
1
.
0

(
7
.
1
3
)
1
6
4
.
0

(
6
.
4
6
)
7.6 (0.30)
21.5 (0.85)
43.7 (1.72)
EMC Line Filter Frame A
EMC Line Filter Frame B
5.5 (0.22)
72.0 (2.83)
54.0 (2.13)
5.5 (0.22)
54.0 (2.13)
23.0 (0.91) 20.0 (0.79)
30.0 (1.18)
55.0 (2.17)
234.0
(9.21) 223.0
(8.78)
223.0
(8.78)
Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) Filter can be mounted onto the back of the drive.
5.5 (0.22)
87.0 (3.43)
58.0 (2.28)
270.0
(10.63)
58.0 (2.28)
5.5 (0.22)
258.0
(10.16)
258.0
(10.16)
24.0 (0.94) 25.0 (0.98)
35.0 (1.38)
70.0 (2.76)
EMC Line Filter Frame C
EMC Line Filter Frame D
5.5 (0.22)
263.0
(10.35)
263.0
(10.35)
25.0 (0.98) 28.0 (1.10)
76.0 (2.99)
5.5 (0.22)
275.0
(10.83)
109.0 (4.29) 70.0 (2.76)
76.0 (2.99) 37.0 (1.46)
5.5 (0.22)
80.0 (3.15) 130.0 (5.12)
90.0 (3.54) 33.0 (1.30)
33.0 (1.30)
28.0 (1.10)
28.0 (1.10)
298.0
(11.73)
298.0
(11.73)
310.0
(12.20)
90.0 (3.54)
5.5 (0.22)
EMC Line Filter Frame E
80.0 (3.15)
28.0 (1.10)
155.0 (6.10)
110.0 (4.33)
110.0 (4.33)
33.0 (1.30)
28.0 (1.10) 33.0 (1.30)
375.0
(14.76)
375.0
(14.76)
390.0
(15.35)
5.5 (0.22)
5.5 (0.22)
Optional Accessories and Kits
Installing a Communication Adapter
1. Insert the communication adapter interface connector into the Control
Module. Make sure the indicator line on the connector is aligned with the
surface of the Control Module.
2. Align the connectors on the communication adapter to the
communication adapter interface connector, then push the back cover
down.
Communication
adapter interface
connector
For PowerFlex 523
For PowerFlex 525
Communication
adapter interface
connector
3. Press along the edges of the back cover until it snaps firmly into place.
Removing a Communication Adapter
1. Insert a finger into the slot at the top of the back cover. Lift to separate the
back cover from the Control Module.
Communication
adapter interface
connector
Notes:
Appendix C
RS485 (DSI) Protocol
PowerFlex 520-series drives support the RS485 (DSI) protocol to allow efficient
operation with Rockwell Automation peripherals. In addition, some Modbus
functions are supported to allow simple networking. PowerFlex 520-series drives
can be multi-dropped on an RS485 network using Modbus protocol in RTU
mode.
PowerFlex 520-Series Drive Network
For information regarding EtherNet/IP or other communication protocols, refer
to the appropriate user manual.
Network Wiring
Network wiring consists of a shielded 2-conductor cable that is daisy-chained
from node to node.
Network Wiring Diagram Example
Controller
ATTENTION: Never attempt to connect a Power over Ethernet (PoE) cable to the
RS485 port. Doing so may damage the circuitry.
IMPORTANT The shield is connected at ONLY ONE end of each cable segment.
C1 C2
Master
4
5 TxRxD-
TxRxD+
TxRxD-
TxRxD+
TxRxD-
TxRxD+
Shield Shield Shield
120 ohm resistor
120 ohm resistor
X X X
FRONT
PIN 8 PIN 1
TxRxD-
TxRxD+
RS485
(DSI)
AK-U0-RJ45-TB2P
BR+
BR- DC- DC+
C1 C2
TxRxD-
TxRxD+
RS485
(DSI)
BR+
BR- DC- DC+
PowerFlex 525
Node 1
4
5
PowerFlex 523
Node 2
4
5
PowerFlex 525
Node n
Appendix C RS485 (DSI) Protocol
Only pins 4 and 5 on the RJ45 plug should be wired. The other pins on the
PowerFlex 520-series drives RJ45 socket must not be connected because they
contain power, etc. for other Rockwell Automation peripheral devices.
Wiring terminations on the master controller will vary depending on the master
controller used and TxRxD+ and TxRxD- are shown for illustration
purposes only. Refer to the master controllers user manual for network
terminations. Note that there is no standard for the + and - wires, and
consequently Modbus device manufacturers interpret them differently. If you
have problems with initially establishing communications, try swapping the two
network wires at the master controller.
Standard RS485 wiring practices apply.
Termination resistors need to be applied at each end of the network cable.
RS485 repeaters may need to be used for long cable runs, or if greater than
32 nodes are needed on the network.
Network wiring should be separated from power wires by at least
0.3 meters (1 foot).
Network wiring should only cross power wires at a right angle.
I/O Terminal C1 (RJ45 Shield) for the Ethernet and DSI network cables on the
PowerFlex 520-series drive must also be connected to PE ground (there are two
PE terminals on the drive). The shield for the network cables should be
connected to PE ground at one end only.
I/O Terminal C2 (Comm Common) is internally tied to Network Common for
the network signals, and NOT to RJ45 Shield. Tying I/O Terminal C2 to PE
ground may improve noise immunity in some applications.
See I/O Control Terminal Designations on page 38 and page 40 for more
information.
Parameter Configuration
The following PowerFlex 520-series drive parameters are used to configure the
drive to operate on a DSI network.
Configuring Parameters for DSI Network
Parameter Details Reference
P046 [Start Source 1] Set to 3 Serial/DSI if Start is controlled from the network. page 80
P047 [Speed Reference1] Set to 3 Serial/DSI if the Speed Reference is controlled from the network. page 80
C123 [RS485 Data Rate] Sets the data rate for the RS485 (DSI) Port. All nodes on the network must be
set to the same data rate.
page 94
C124 [RS485 Node Addr] Sets the node address for the drive on the network. Each device on the
network requires a unique node address.
page 94
C125 [Comm Loss Action] Selects the drives response to communication problems. page 94
C126 [Comm Loss Time] Sets the time that the drive will remain in communication loss before the
drive implements C125 [Comm Loss Action].
page 94
C127 [Comm Format] Sets the transmission mode, data bits, parity and stop bits for the RS485 (DSI)
Port. All nodes on the network must be set to the same setting.
page 95
C121 [Comm Write Mode] Set to 0 Save when programming drive.
Set to 1 RAM only to only write to volatile memory.
page 94
RS485 (DSI) Protocol Appendix C
Supported Modbus Function
Codes
The peripheral interface (DSI) used on PowerFlex 520-series drives supports
some of the Modbus function codes.
Writing (06) Logic Command
Data
The PowerFlex 520-series drive can be controlled through the network by
sending Function Code 06 writes to register address 2000H (Logic Command).
P046 [Start Source 1] must be set to 3 Serial/DSI in order to accept the
commands. PowerFlex 523 drives support only Velocity bit definitions.
PowerFlex 525 drives can use Parameter C122 [Cmd Stat Select] to select either
Velocity or Position bit definitions.
Supported Modbus Function Codes
Modbus Function Code (Decimal) Command
03 Read Holding Registers
06 Preset (Write) Single Register
16 (10 Hexadecimal) Preset (Write) Multiple Registers
IMPORTANT Modbus devices can be 0-based (registers are numbered starting at 0) or 1-
based (registers are numbered starting at 1). Depending on the Modbus
Master used, the register addresses listed on the following pages may need to
be offset by +1. For example, Logic Command may be register address 8192 for
some master devices (e.g. ProSoft 3150-MCM SLC Modbus scanner) and 8193
for others (e.g. PanelViews).
TIP Powerup/Reset the drive after selecting an option for C122 [Cmd Stat Select]
for the change to take effect.
Velocity Bit Definitions
Comm Logic Command C122 = 0 Velocity
Address (Decimal) Bit(s) Description
2000H (8192) 0 1 = Stop, 0 = Not Stop
1 1 = Start, 0 = Not Start
2 1 = Jog, 0 = No Jog
3 1 = Clear Faults, 0 = Not Clear Faults
5, 4 00 = No Command
01 = Forward Command
10 = Reverse Command
11 = No Command
6 1 = Force Keypad Control, 0 = Not Force Keypad Control
7 1 = MOP Increment, 0 = Not Increment
01 = Accel Rate 1 Enable
10 = Accel Rate 2 Enable
11 = Hold Accel Rate Selected
01 = Decel Rate 1 Enable
10 = Decel Rate 2 Enable
11 = Hold Decel Rate Selected
14, 13, 12 000 = No Command
001 = Freq. Source = P047 [Speed Reference1]
100 = A410 [Preset Freq 0]
15 1 = MOP Decrement, 0 = Not Decrement
Writing (06) Comm
Frequency Command
The PowerFlex 520-series drive Comm Frequency Command can be controlled
through the network by sending Function Code 06 writes to register address
2001H (Comm Frequency Command).
Reading (03) Logic Status
Data
The PowerFlex 520-series drive Logic Status data can be read through the
network by sending Function Code 03 reads to register address 2100H (Logic
Status). PowerFlex 523 drives support only Velocity bit definitions.
PowerFlex 525 drives can use Parameter C122 [Cmd Stat Select] to select either
Velocity or Position bit definitions.
Position Bit Definitions
Comm Logic Command C122 = 1 Position
2000H (8192) 0 1 = Stop, 0 = Not Stop
1 1 = Start, 0 = Not Start
2 1 = Jog, 0 = No Jog
3 1 = Clear Faults, 0 = Not Clear Faults
01 = Forward Command
10 = Reverse Command
11 = No Command
6 1 = Logic In 1
7 1 = Logic In 2
10, 9, 8 000 = Freq. and Position Step 0
001 = Freq. and Position Step 1
11 1 = Find Home
12 1 = Hold Step
13 1 = Pos Redefine
14 1 = Sync Enable
15 1 = Traverse Disable
Comm Frequency Command
Reference
Address (Decimal) Description
2001H (8193) Used by internal comm modules to control the reference of the drive. In units of
0.01 Hz.

Velocity Bit Definitions
Comm Logic Status C122 = 0 Velocity
2100H (8448) 0 1 = Ready, 0 = Not Ready
1 1 = Active (Running), 0 = Not Active
2 1 = Cmd Forward, 0 = Cmd Reverse
3 1 = Rotating Forward, 0 = Rotating Reverse
4 1 = Accelerating, 0 = Not Accelerating
5 1 = Decelerating, 0 = Not Decelerating
6 Not Used
7 1 = Faulted, 0 = Not Faulted
8 1 = At Reference, 0 = Not At Reference
9 1 = Main Freq Controlled by Active Comm
10 1 = Operation Cmd Controlled by Active Comm
11 1 = Parameters have been locked
12 Digital Input 1 Status
Position Bit Definitions
Comm Logic Status C122 = 1 Position
2100H (8448) 0 1 = Ready, 0 = Not Ready
1 1 = Active (Running), 0 = Not Active
2 1 = Cmd Forward, 0 = Cmd Reverse
3 1 = Rotating Forward, 0 = Rotating Reverse
4 1 = Accelerating, 0 = Not Accelerating
5 1 = Decelerating, 0 = Not Decelerating
6 1 = Forward Travel Position, 0 = Reverse Travel Position
7 1 = Faulted, 0 = Not Faulted
8 1 = At Reference, 0 = Not At Reference
9 1 = At Position, 0 = Not At Position
10 1 = At Home, 0 = Not At Home
11 1 = Drive Homed, 0 = Not Drive Homed
12 1 = Sync Hold, 0 = Not Sync Hold
13 1 = Sync Ramp, 0 = Not Sync Ramp
14 1 =Traverse On, 0 = Traverse Off
15 1 = Traverse Decel, 0 = Not Traverse Decel
Reading (03) Drive Error
Codes
The PowerFlex 520-series Error Code data can be read through the network by
sending Function Code 03 reads to register address 2101H (Drive Error Codes).
Drive Error Codes
Logic Status
Address (Decimal) Value (Decimal) Description
2101H (8449) 0 No Fault
2 Auxiliary Input
3 Power Loss
4 Undervoltage
5 Overvoltage
6 Motor Stalled
7 Motor Overload
8 Heatsink Overtemperature
9 Control Module Overtemperature
12 HW Overcurrent (300%)
13 Ground Fault
15 Load Loss
21 Output Phase Loss
29 Analog Input Loss
33 Auto Restart Tries
38 Phase U to Ground Short
39 Phase V to Ground Short
40 Phase W to Ground Short
41 Phase UV Short
42 Phase UW Short
43 Phase VW Short
48 Parameters Defaulted
59 Safety Open
63 Software Overcurrent
64 Drive Overload
70 Power Unit Fail
71 DSI Network Loss
72 Option Card Network Loss
73 Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter Network Loss
80 AutoTune Fail
81 DSI Communication Loss
82 Option Card Communication Loss
83 Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter Communication Loss
91 Encoder Loss
94 Function Loss
100 Parameter Checksum Error
101 External Storage
105 Control Module Connect Error
106 Incompatible Control-Power Module
107 Unrecognized Control-Power Module
109 Mismatched Control-Power Module
110 Keypad Membrane
111 Safety Hardware
114 Microprocessor Failure
122 I/O Board Fail
Reading (03) Drive
Operational Values
The PowerFlex 520-series Drive Operational Values can be read through the
network by sending Function Code 03 reads to register addresses
2102H...210AH.
Reading (03) and Writing
(06) Drive Parameters
To access drive parameters, the Modbus register address equals the parameter
number. For example, a decimal 1 is used to address Parameter b001 [Output
Freq] and decimal 41 is used to address Parameter P041 [Accel Time 1].
Additional Information
See http://www.ab.com/drives/ for additional information.
2101H (8449) 125 Flash Update Required
126 Non Recoverable Error
127 DSI Flash Update Required
Drive Error Codes
Logic Status
Address (Decimal) Value (Decimal) Description
Drive Operational Values
Reference
Address (Decimal) Description
2102H (8450) Frequency Command (xxx.xx Hz)
2103H (8451) Output Frequency (xxx.xx Hz)
2104H (8452) Output Current (xxx.xx A)
2105H (8453) DC-BUS Voltage (xxxV)
2106H (8454) Output Voltage (xxx.xV)
Appendix D
Velocity StepLogic, Basic Logic and Timer/
Counter Functions
Four PowerFlex 520-series logic functions provide the capability to program
simple logic functions without a separate controller.
Velocity StepLogic Function (specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only)
Steps through up to eight preset speeds based on programmed logic.
Programmed logic can include conditions that need to be met from digital
inputs programmed as Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 before stepping from
one preset speed to the next. A timer is available for each of the eight steps
and is used to program a time delay before stepping from one preset speed
to the next. The status of a digital output can also be controlled based on
the step being executed.
Basic Logic Function (specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only)
Up to two digital inputs can be programmed as Logic In 1 and/or Logic
In 2. A digital output can be programmed to change state based on the
condition of one or both inputs based on basic logic functions such as
AND, OR, NOR. The basic logic functions can be used with or without
StepLogic.
Timer Function
A digital input can be programmed for Timer Start. A digital output can
be programmed as a Timer Out with an output level programmed to the
desired time. When the timer reaches the time programmed into the
output level the output will change state. The timer can be reset with a
digital input programmed as Reset Timer.
Counter Function
A digital input can be programmed for Counter In. A digital output can
be programmed as Counter Out with an output level programmed to the
desired number of counts. When the counter reaches the count
programmed into the output level the output will change state. The
counter can be reset with a digital input programmed as Reset Counter.
TIP Use the Wizard in Connected Components Workbench to simplify setup instead
of manually configuring the parameters.
Appendix D Velocity StepLogic, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions
Velocity StepLogic Using
Timed Steps
To activate this function, set one of the three speed reference sources, parameter
P047, P049 or P051[Speed Referencex] to 13 Step Logic and activate that
speed reference source. Three parameters are used to configure the logic, speed
reference and time for each step.
Logic is defined using parameters L180...L187 [Stp Logic x].
Preset Speeds are set with parameters A410...A417 [Preset Freq 0...7].
Time of operation for each step is set with parameters L190...L197 [Stp
Logic Time x].
The direction of motor rotation can be forward or reverse.
Using Timed Steps
Velocity StepLogic Sequence
Sequence begins with a valid start command.
A normal sequence begins with Step 0 and transition to the next step when
the corresponding StepLogic time has expired.
Step 7 is followed by Step 0
Sequence repeats until a stop is issued or a fault condition occurs.
Velocity StepLogic Using
Basic Logic Functions
Digital input and digital output parameters can be configured to use logic to
transition to the next step. Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 are defined by programming
parameters t062...t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] to 24 Logic In 1 or
25 Logic In 2.
Example
Run at Step 0.
Transition to Step 1 when Logic In 1 is true.
Logic senses the edge of Logic In 1 when it transitions from off to on.
Logic In 1 is not required to remain on.
IMPORTANT This function is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
Time
0
Forward
Reverse
Step 0 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7
IMPORTANT This function is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
Velocity StepLogic, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions Appendix D
Transition to Step 2 when both Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 are true.
The drive senses the level of both Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 and transitions
to Step 2 when both are on.
Transition to Step 3 when Logic In 2 returns to a false or off state.
Inputs are not required to remain in the on condition except under the
logic conditions used for the transition from Step 2 to Step 3.
The step time value and the basic logic may be used together to satisfy machine
conditions. For instance, the step may need to run for a minimum time period
and then use the basic logic to trigger a transition to the next step.
Timer Function
Digital inputs and outputs control the timer function and are configured with
parameters t062...t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] set to 19 Timer Start
and 21 Reset Timer.
Digital outputs (relay and opto type) define a preset level and indicate when the
level is reached. Level parameters t077 [Relay Out1 Level], t082[Relay Out2
Level], t070 [Opto Out1 Level] and t073 [Opto Out2 Level] are used to set the
desired time in seconds.
Parameters t076 [Relay Out1 Sel], t081 [Relay Out2 Sel], t069 [Opto Out1 Sel]
and t072 [Opto Out2 Sel] are set to 25 Timer Out and causes the output to
change state when the preset level is reached.
Example
Drive starts up and accelerates to 30 Hz.
After 30 Hz has been maintained for 20 seconds, a 4-20 mA analog input
becomes the reference signal for speed control.
Time
Logic In 1
Logic In 2
Frequency
Start Step 0 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
Time
Logic In 1
Logic In 2
Frequency
Start Step 0 Step 1
The timer function is used to select a preset speed with a 20 second run
time that overrides the speed reference while the digital input is active.
Parameters are set to the following options:
P047 [Speed Reference1] = 6 4-20mA Input
P049 [Speed Reference2] = 7 Preset Freq
t062 [DigIn TermBlk 02] = 1 Speed Ref 2
t063 [DigIn TermBlk 03] = 19 Timer Start
t076 [Relay Out1 Sel] = 25 Timer Out
t077 [Relay Out1 Level] = 20.0 Secs
A411 [Preset Freq 1] = 30.0 Hz
The control terminal block is wired such that a start command will also
trigger the timer start.
The relay output is wired to I/O Terminal 02 (DigIn TermBlk 02) so that
it forces the input on when the timer starts.
After the timer is complete, the output is turned off releasing the preset
speed command. The drive defaults to following the analog input
reference as programmed.
Note that a Reset Timer input is not required for this example since the Timer
Start input both clears and starts the timer.
Counter Function
Digital inputs and outputs control the counter function and are configured with
parameters t062...t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] set to 20 Counter In
and 22 Reset Countr.
Digital outputs (relay and opto type) define a preset level and indicate when the
level is reached. Level parameters t077 [Relay Out1 Level], t082[Relay Out2
Level], t070 [Opto Out1 Level] and t073 [Opto Out2 Level] are used to set the
desired count value.
Parameters t076 [Relay Out1 Sel], t081 [Relay Out2 Sel], t069 [Opto Out1 Sel]
and t072 [Opto Out2 Sel] are set to 26 Counter Out which causes the output
to change state when the level is reached.
Example
A photo eye is used to count packages on a conveyor line.
An accumulator holds the packages until 5 are collected.
A diverter arm redirects the group of 5 packages to a bundling area.
The diverter arm returns to its original position and triggers a limit switch
that resets the counter.
Parameters are set to the following options:
t065 [DigIn TermBlk 05] = 20 Counter In
t066 [DigIn TermBlk 06] = 22 Reset Countr
t076 [Relay Out1 Sel] = 26 Counter Out
t077 [Relay Out1 Level] = 5.0 Counts
Velocity StepLogic, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions Appendix D
Velocity StepLogic
Parameters
DigIn TermBlk 06
Reset Counter
Limit Switch
DigIn TermBlk 05
Counter In
Photo Eye
Start
Output
Frequency
Relay Out
Code Descriptions for Parameters L180...L187
Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1
0 0 F 1
Digit 4 Defines the action during the step currently executing
Setting Accel/Decel Parameter
Used
StepLogic Output State Commanded Direction
0 1 Off FWD
1 1 Off REV
2 1 Off No Output
3 1 On FWD
4 1 On REV
5 1 On No Output
6 2 Off FWD
7 2 Off REV
8 2 Off No Output
9 2 On FWD
A 2 On REV
b 2 On No Output
Digit 3 Defines what step to jump to or how to end program when the logic conditions specified
in Digit 2 are met.
Setting Logic
0 Jump to Step 0
1 Jump to Step 1
2 Jump to Step 2
3 Jump to Step 3
4 Jump to Step 4
5 Jump to Step 5
6 Jump to Step 6
7 Jump to Step 7
Digit 2 Defines what logic must be met to jump to a step other than the very next step.
Setting Description Logic
0 Skip Step (jump immediately) SKIP
1 Step based on the time programmed in the respective [Stp Logic Time x] parameter. TIMED
2 Step if Logic In 1 is active (logically true) TRUE
4 Step if Logic In 1 is not active (logically false) FALSE
6 Step if either Logic In 1 or Logic In 2 is active (logically true) OR
7 Step if both Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 is active (logically true) AND
8 Step if neither Logic In 1 or Logic In 2 is active (logically true) NOR
9 Step if Logic In 1 is active (logically true) and Logic In 2 is not active (logically false) XOR
A Step if Logic In2 is active (logically true) and Logic In 1 is not active (logically false) XOR
b Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 1 is active (logically true) TIMED AND
C Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 2 is active (logically true) TIMED AND
d Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 1 is not active (logically false) TIMED OR
E Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 2 is not active (logically false) TIMED OR
F Do not step OR no jump to, so use Digit 0 logic IGNORE
Digit 1 Defines what logic must be met to jump to the very next step.
Setting Description Logic
0 Skip Step (jump immediately) SKIP
1 Step based on the time programmed in the respective [Stp Logic Time x] parameter. TIMED
6 Step if either Logic In 1 or Logic In 2 is active (logically true) OR
7 Step if both Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 is active (logically true) AND
8 Step if neither Logic In 1 or Logic In 2 is active (logically true) NOR
9 Step if Logic In 1 is active (logically true) and Logic In 2 is not active (logically false) XOR
A Step if Logic In 2 is active (logically true) and Logic In 1 is not active (logically false) XOR
b Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 1 is active (logically true) TIMED AND
C Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 2 is active (logically true) TIMED AND
d Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 1 is not active (logically false) TIMED OR
E Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 2 is not active (logically false) TIMED OR
F Use logic programmed in Digit 1 IGNORE
Appendix E
Encoder/Pulse Train Usage and Position
StepLogic Application
Encoder and Pulse Train
Usage
The PowerFlex 520-series drives include a pulse train input built into the
terminal block. PowerFlex 525 drives also support an optional encoder card. The
pulse train and encoder can be used for many of the same functions, but the pulse
train supports up to 100 kHz at 24V, and uses the drive built-in terminal block.
The encoder supports up to 250 kHz dual channel at 5, 12 or 24V and requires
the optional encoder board to be installed. When A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] is set
to a value other than zero, the drive is set to use an encoder or pulse train. The
drive will use the encoder or pulse train in several ways depending on the settings
of other parameters. The drive will use the encoder or pulse train as shown below
(listed in order of priority):
1. If enabled by P047, P049, or P051 [Speed Referencex], the encoder or
pulse train will be used directly as a commanded speed (normally used
with a pulse train) or as a position reference (normally used with a
quadrature encoder).
2. If not enabled by the Speed Reference parameters, the encoder or pulse
train can be used with the PID function if enabled by A459 or A471 [PID
x Ref Sel], or A460 or A472 [PID x Fdback Sel].
3. If not enabled by the Speed Reference or PID function parameters, the
encoder or pulse train can be used with A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] for
direct feedback and trim of the speed command. The normal slip
compensation is not used in this case. Instead the drive will use the encoder
or pulse train to determine actual output frequency and adjust the output
frequency to match the command. Parameters A538 [Ki Speed Loop] and
A539 [Kp Speed Loop] are used in this control loop. The primary benefit
of this mode is increased speed accuracy when compared to open-loop slip
compensation. It does not provide speed bandwidth improvement.
Encoder Interface
The incremental encoder option card can source 5 or 12 volt power and accept 5,
12 or 24 volt single ended or differential inputs. See Appendix B for ordering
information.
IMPORTANT The encoder usage, and position StepLogic application covered in this chapter
is specific to PowerFlex 525 drives only.
Appendix E Encoder/Pulse Train Usage and Position StepLogic Application
Wiring Notes
The encoder option card can supply 5V or 12V power (250 mA maximum) for
an encoder. Be sure the DIP switch is set properly for the encoder. In general, 12V
will provide higher noise immunity.
The encoder can handle 5V, 12V, or 24V inputs, but the pulse train can handle
only 24V inputs. The inputs will automatically adjust to the voltage applied and
no additional drive adjustment is necessary. If a single-channel input is used, it
must be wired between the A (signal) and A- (signal common) channels.
Encoder Wiring Examples
I/O Connection Example I/O Connection Example
Encoder Power
Internal Drive
Power
Internal (drive)
12V DC, 250mA
Encoder Power
External
Power Source
Encoder Signal
Single-Ended,
Dual Channel
Encoder Signal
Differential,
Dual Channel
+V
Cm
B-
B
A-
A
12V 5V
No. Signal Description

+V 5...12V Power
(1)(2)
(1) When using 12V Encoder power, 24V I/O power, maximum output current at I/O Terminal 11 is 50 mA.
(2) If Encoder requires 24V power, it must be supplied by an external power source.
Internal power source 250 mA (isolated).
Cm Power Return
B- Encoder B (NOT)
Quadrature B input.
B Encoder B
A- Encoder A (NOT)
Single channel, pulse train or quadrature A input.
A Encoder A
Output DIP switch selects 12 or 5 volt power supplied at terminals +V and Cm
for the encoder.
Common
+12V DC
(250 mA)
A
A-
B
B-
Cm
+V
to SHLD
+C
o
m
m
o
n
External
Power
Supply
to
SHLD
A NOT
A
B
B NOT
to SHLD
to Power Supply
Common
A
A-
B
B-
Cm
+V
to SHLD
A NOT
B
A
B NOT
A
A-
B
B-
Cm
+V
IMPORTANT A quadrature encoder provides rotor speed and direction. Therefore, the
encoder must be wired such that the forward direction matches the motor
forward direction. If the drive is reading encoder speed but the position
regulator or other encoder function is not working properly, remove power to
the drive, then do one of the following:
Swap the A and A (NOT) encoder channels.
Swap the B and B (NOT) encoder channels.
Swap any two motor leads.
Drives will fault when an encoder is incorrectly wired and A535 [Motor Fdbk
Type] is set to 5 Quad Check.
Encoder/Pulse Train Usage and Position StepLogic Application Appendix E
Positioning Overview
The PowerFlex 525 drive includes a simple position regulator which can be used
in a variety of position applications without the need for multiple limit switches
or photo-eyes. This can be used as a stand-alone controller for simple
applications (up to 8 positions) or in conjunction with a controller for more
flexibility.
Please note that this is not intended to replace high end servo controllers or any
application that needs high bandwidth or very high torque at low speeds.
Common Guidelines for All
Applications
The position regulator can be configured for operation appropriate for a variety
of applications. Certain parameters will need to be adjusted in all cases.
P047 [Speed Reference1] must be set to 16 Positioning.
A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] must be set to the match the feedback device.
Positioning mode must use A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] option 4.
A535 [Motor Fdbk Type] Options
0 None indicates no encoder is used. This can not be used for
positioning.
1 Pulse Train is a single channel input, no direction, speed feedback
only. This should not be used for positioning. The Single Channel
selection is similar to a Pulse Train, but uses the standard encoder scaling
parameters.
2 Single Chan is a single channel input, no direction, speed feedback
only. This should not be used for positioning. Single channel uses the
standard encoder scaling parameters.
3 Single Check is a single channel input with encoder signal loss
detection. The drive will fault if it detects that the input pulses do not
match the expected motor speed. This should not be used for positioning.
4 Quadrature is a dual channel encoder input with direction and speed
from the encoder. This may be used for positioning control.
5 Quad Check is a dual channel encoder with encoder signal loss
detection. The drive will fault if it detects that the encoder speed does not
match the expected motor speed.
A544 [Reverse Disable] should be set to 0 Rev Enabled to allow bidirectional
movement necessary for position control.
P039 [Torque Perf Mode] default setting is 1 SVC. However, any mode can be
used to improve the low speed torque for positioning applications. For best
results, tune the application first. The autotune routine can be completed to
further improve the drive-motor performance.
A550 [Bus Reg Enable] default setting is 1 Enabled. If the deceleration time is
too short, the drive may overshoot the desired position. For best results, a longer
deceleration time may be necessary. A550 [Bus Reg Enable] can be disabled to
provide precise stopping movements, but the deceleration time will need to be
manually tuned so that it is long enough to avoid F005 OverVoltage faults.
A437 [DB Resistor Sel] default setting is 0 Disabled. If improved deceleration
performance is required a Dynamic Brake resistor can be used. If used, this
parameter should be set to the appropriate setting for the resistor selected.
P035 [Motor NP Poles] must be set to match the number of motor poles on the
motor driven by the PowerFlex 520-series drive.
A536 [Encoder PPR] must be set to match the number of pulses per revolution
of the encoder used (i.e., 1024 PPR Encoder).
A559 [Counts Per Unit] sets the number of encoder counts that will be used to
define one position unit. This allows the encoder positions to be defined in terms
of units important to the application. For example, if 1cm of travel on a conveyor
belt requires 0.75 turns of the motor, the motor encoder is 1024 PPR, and the
Motor Feedback type is set to Quadrature, then this parameter would need to be
set to (4 x 1024 x 0.75) = 3072 counts for one cm of travel. Then all other
positions could be setup in units of cm.
A564 [Encoder Pos Tol] indicates the desired position tolerance for the system.
This will determine how close the drive must be to the commanded position
before the drive will indicate At Home or At Position in units of raw encoder
pulses. This has no effect on the actual positioning control of the motor.
Positioning Operation
Parameter A558 [Positioning Mode] must be set to properly match the desired
operation of the positioning function.
A558 [Positioning Mode] Options
0 Time Steps uses Step Logic times. This mode ignores the Step Logic
settings and moves through the steps (Step 0 to Step 7 and back to Step 0)
based on the times programmed into L190...L197 [Stp Logic Time x].
This can be used when the desired position is based only on time. In
addition, this mode only accepts absolute positions in a positive direction
from home. This option provides an easy way to implement a simple
positioning program or to test the basic positioning setup. For additional
flexibility one of the other settings should be used.
1 Preset Input directly commands movement to any step based on the
status of the digital inputs programmed for Preset Freq. This setting
ignores the Step Logic Commands settings and instead the drive will move
directly to whatever step is currently commanded by A410...A425 [Preset
Freq x] and L200...L214 [Step Units x]. This is useful when an application
needs direct access to any position step based on discrete inputs. This
mode moves in the forward direction from Home and is an absolute move.
2 Step Logic provides a highly flexible mode of operation. This can be
used to move through the steps (Step 0 to Step 7 and back to Step 0) or can
jump to a different step at any time based on time or the status of digital
inputs or communication commands. In this mode the drive always starts
at Step 0 of the Step Logic profile.
3 Preset StpL is identical to 2 Step Logic except the drive will use the
current status of the Preset Inputs to determine which Step Logic step to
begin. This only affects the initial step. After start, the drive will move
through the steps in the same manner as if setting 2 was selected.
4 StpLogic-Lst is identical to 2 Step Logic except the drive will use
the step prior to its last stop command to determine which Step Logic step
to begin. This only affects the initial step. After start, the drive will move
through the steps in the same manner as if setting 2 was selected. This
allows a process to be stopped and then restarted at the position where it
stopped.
In all position modes, the following parameters will control the characteristics at
each step:
L200, L202, L204, L206, L208, L210, L212 and L214 [Step Units x] are the
number value to the left of the decimal (whole number) of the 8 positions desired
for an application, beginning with Step 0 (L200) and continuing with each step
until Step 7 (L214). For example, enter 2 into this parameter if you would like a
commanded position of 2.77.
L201, L203, L205, L207, L209, L211, L213 and L215 [Step Units F x] are the
number value to the right of the decimal (the portion less than 1) of the 8
positions desired for an application, beginning with Step 0 (L201) and
continuing with each step until Step 7 (L215). For example, enter 0.77 into this
parameter if you would like a commanded position of 2.77.
A410...A417 [Preset Freq x] are the parameters that define the maximum
frequency the drive will run at during the corresponding step. For example, if
[Preset Freq 2] is set to 40 Hz, the drive will accelerate to 40 Hz maximum when
moving to Position 2.
IMPORTANT Advanced Step Logic options such as incremental move are not
available in this mode.
Frequency Source Step Source Position Source
A410 [Preset Freq 0] L180 [Stp Logic 0] L200 [Step Units 0]
L190...L197 [Stp Logic Time x] are the parameters that define the time the drive
will remain in each corresponding step if that step is time-based. For example, if
L192 [Stp Logic Time 2] is set to 5.0 seconds and that step is time-based, the
drive will remain in Step 2 for 5.0 seconds. Note that this is the total time in that
step, not the time at that position. Therefore, it will include the time needed to
accelerate, run, and decelerate to that position.
L180...L187 [Stp Logic x] are the parameters that allow additional flexibility and
control various aspects of each step when a positioning mode is selected that
utilizes the Step Logic functions. Note that in Positioning mode these parameters
have a different function than when used for normal velocity Step Logic. Each of
the 4 digits controls one aspect of the each position step. The following is a listing
of the available settings for each digit:
IMPORTANT The default value for A410 [Preset Freq 0] is 0.00 Hz. This value needs to be
changed or the drive will not be able to move during Step 0.
Frequency Source Step Source Position Source

Note: Incremental move commands will cause the drive to move the amount
specified based on the current position. Absolute commands are always with
reference to Home.
A565 [Pos Reg Filter] provides a low pass filter at the input of the position
regulator.
A566 [Pos Reg Gain] is a single adjustment for increasing or decreasing the
responsiveness of the position regulator. For faster response, the filter should be
reduced and/or the gain should be increased. For smoother response with less

Logic for next step Digit 1
Logic to jump to a different step Digit 2
Different step to jump Digit 3
Step settings Digit 4
Not Used
Velocity Control Settings (Digit 4)
Required
Setting
Accel/Decel
Param. Used
StepLogic
Output State
Commanded
Direction
4 Accel/Decel 1 On REV
5 Accel/Decel 1 On No Output
A Accel/Decel 2 On REV
b Accel/Decel 2 On No Output
Positioning Settings (Digit 4)
Required
Setting
Accel/Decel
Param. Used
StepLogic
Output State
Direction
From Home
Type of
Command
2 Accel/Decel 1 Off REV Absolute
3 Accel/Decel 1 Off REV Incremental
4 Accel/Decel 1 On FWD Absolute
5 Accel/Decel 1 On FWD Incremental
6 Accel/Decel 1 On REV Absolute
7 Accel/Decel 1 On REV Incremental
A Accel/Decel 2 Off REV Absolute
b Accel/Decel 2 Off REV Incremental
C Accel/Decel 2 On FWD Absolute
d Accel/Decel 2 On FWD Incremental
E Accel/Decel 2 On REV Absolute
F Accel/Decel 2 On REV Incremental
Settings (Digit 3)
Setting Description
0 Jump to Step 0
1 Jump to Step 1
2 Jump to Step 2
3 Jump to Step 3
4 Jump to Step 4
5 Jump to Step 5
6 Jump to Step 6
7 Jump to Step 7
Settings (Digit 2 and 1)
Setting Description
0 Skip Step (Jump Immediately)
1 Step Based on [Stp Logic Time x]
6 Step if either Logic In 1 or Logic In 2 is Active
7 Step if both Logic In 1 and Logic In 2 are Active
8 Step if neither Logic In 1 nor Logic In 2 is Active
9 Step if Logic In 1 is Active and Logic In 2 is Not Active
A Step if Logic In 2 is Active and Logic In 1 is Not Active
b Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 1 is Active
C Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 2 is Active
d Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 1 is Not Active
E Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and Logic In 2 is Not Active
F Do Not Step/Ignore Digit 2 Settings
TIP Use the Wizard in Connected Components Workbench to simplify setup instead
of manually configuring the parameters.
overshoot, the filter should be increased and/or the gain should be reduced. In
general, the gain will have a larger effect on most systems than the filter.
Homing Routine
This drive supports incremental encoders only. Therefore, when the drive powers
up it will reset the current position to zero. If this is known to be correct the
position routine can be started without further adjustment. However, in most
applications the drive will need to be homed after each power-up and prior to
starting the position routine.
This can be accomplished in one of the following two ways:
1. Manual HomingProgram the following drive parameters:
t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] = 37 Pos Redefine
Program one of the digital inputs to 37 Pos Redefine. Then, move the
system into the home position with a run command, a jog command, or by
manually moving the system into the home position. Then, toggle the Pos
Redefine input. This will set the drive to Home at its current position
and d388 [Units Traveled H] and d389 [Units Traveled L] are set to zero.
Alternately, the Pos Redefine bit in A560 [Enh Control Word] can be
toggled instead of utilizing a digital input.
2. Automatic Homing to Limit SwitchProgram the following drive
parameters:
t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] = 35 Find Home
Program one of the digital inputs to 35 Find Home.
t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx] = 34 Home Limit
Program one of the digital inputs to 34 Home Limit. Normally, the
Home Limit input would be wired to a proximity switch or photo-eye
and will indicate the system is in the home position.
A562 [Find Home Freq] sets the frequency the drive will use while it is
moving to the home position during the automatic homing routine.
A563 [Find Home Dir] sets the direction the drive will use while it is
moving to the home position during the automatic homing routine.
To begin the automatic homing routine, activate the Find Home input and
then initiate a valid start command. The drive will then ramp to the speed set in
A562 [Find Home Freq] and in the direction set in A563 [Find Home Dir] until
the digital input defined as Home Limit is activated. If the drive passes this
IMPORTANT The Pos Redefine input or bit must be returned to inactive before
starting the position routine. Otherwise the drive will continuously read
a position of 0 (home) and the position routine will not function
correctly.
point too quickly it will then reverse direction at 1/10th A562 [Find Home Freq]
to the point where the Home Limit switch reactivates. Approximately one second
after the routine finds home the drive will stop. Alternately, the Find Home
Freq and/or Home Limit bits in A560 [Enh Control Word] can be activated
instead of utilizing a digital input. The inputs or bits should be returned to
inactive after the routine is complete.
Encoder and Position
Feedback
d376 [Speed Feedback] indicates the measured speed feedback or the calculated
speed feedback when no feedback device is selected. Parameter d376 [Speed
Feedback] is the number value to the left of the decimal (whole number) and
d377 [Speed Feedback F] is the value to the right of the decimal (the portion less
than 1).
d378 [Encoder Speed] indicates the measured speed of the feedback device. This
is useful if the encoder is not used for motor speed control. However, the encoder
must be used for some purpose in order for d378 [Encoder Speed] to indicate a
value. Parameter d378 [Encoder Speed] is the number value to the left of the
decimal (whole number) and d379 [Encoder Speed F] is the number to the right
of the decimal (the portion less than 1).
d388, d389 [Units Traveled x] indicate the current position of the system in
terms of units away from Home. Parameter d388 [Units Traveled H] is the
number value to the left of the decimal (whole number) and d389 [Units
Traveled L] is the number to the right of the decimal (the portion less than 1).
d387 [Position Status] indicates the status of the positioning functions. The
indication bits are:
Bit 0 Dir Positive indicates the current direction the drive has moved
from Home.
Bit 1 At Position indicates whether the drive is at its commanded
position. If the drive is within A564 [Encoder Pos Tol] of the commanded
position, this bit will be active.
Bit 2 At Home indicates whether the drive is at Home. If the drive is
within A564 [Encoder Pos Tol] of Home, this bit will be active.
Bit 3 Drive Homed indicates whether the drive has been homed since
power-up. This bit will be active once the drive has been homed either
manually or automatically. It will remain active until the next power down.
IMPORTANT After the position is reached the drive will stop. If the Find Home is removed
before the homing is complete, the drive will begin running the position
routine without the proper home. In this case Home will not be reset and the
position will be in relation to the power up position.
Use Over Communications
If 8 steps are not adequate for the application or if dynamic program changes are
required, many of the positioning functions can be controlled through an active
communication network. The following parameters will allow this control.
C121 [Comm Write Mode]
Repeated writes to parameters over a communication network can cause damage
to the drive EEPROM. This parameter allows the drive to accept parameter
changes without writing to the EEPROM.
C122 [Cmd Stat Select]
Selects velocity-specific or position/fibers-specific Command and Status Word
bit definitions for use over a communication network.
A560 [Enh Control Word]
This parameter allows many of the positioning functions to be completed
through parameter control using an explicit message. This allows the operation
over communications instead of with hardware inputs. The bits have the same
functions as the digital input options of the same name. Options relating to
positioning are:
Bit 0 Home Limit indicates the drive is at the home position.
Bit 1 Find Home causes the drive to find home at the next start
command. Deactivate this bit after completing the homing routine.
Bit 2 Hold Step overrides other inputs and causes the drive to remain at
its current step (running at zero speed once it reaches its position) until
released.
Bit 3 Pos Redefine resets the home position to the current position of
the machine. Deactivate this bit after completing the homing routine.
Bit 4 Sync Enable holds the existing frequency when A571 [Sync Time]
is set to enable speed synchronization. When this bit is deactivated the
drive will accelerate to the new commanded frequency based on A571
[Sync Time].
Bit 5 Traverse Dis disables the traverse function when this bit is active.
Bit 6 Logic In 1 provides an identical function and is logically ORed
with setting 24 Logic In 1 for t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk
xx]. It can be used to move through the Step Logic functions (speed or
position) using comms control without requiring actual digital input
transitions.
Bit 7 Logic In 2 provides an identical function and is logically ORed
with setting 25 Logic In 2 for t062, t063, t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk
xx]. It can be used to move through the Step Logic functions (speed or
IMPORTANT Parameter values set prior to setting 1 RAM only are saved in RAM.
position) using comms control without requiring actual digital input
transitions.
L200...L214 [Step Units x]
All of the position steps can be written to while the drive is running. The changes
will take place at the next move. For example, if step 0 is over-written while the
drive is moving to step 0, the drive will move to the previous commanded
position at step 0. The next time the drive is commanded to return to step 0 it will
proceed to the new position. One possible use of this capability is when an
application requires full control of the movement by a controller external to the
drive. The Step Logic program might be written to jump from step 0 back to step
0 when Input 1 is active. The controller could write any desired position to step 0
and then toggle the input 1 bit of A560 [Enh Control Word] to cause the drive to
move to the new position. This allows almost unlimited flexibility and can be
used with absolute or incremental moves.
Setup Notes
The RA computer tool (Connected Components Workbench) can make setup of
the positioning functions much easier. Refer to the latest versions for additional
tools or wizards which can aid in the setup.
Notes:
Appendix F
PID Set Up
PID Loop
The PowerFlex 520-series drive features built-in PID (proportional, integral,
derivative) control loops. The PID loop is used to maintain a process feedback
(such as pressure, flow or tension) at a desired set point. The PID loop works by
subtracting the PID feedback from a reference and generating an error value. The
PID loop reacts to the error, based on the PID Gains, and outputs a frequency to
try to reduce the error value to 0.
To enable the PID loop, P047, P049 or P051 [Speed Referencex] must be set to
11 PID1 Output or 12 PID2 Output, and the corresponding speed reference
activated.
Exclusive Control and Trim Control are two basic configurations where the PID
loop may be used.
Exclusive Control
In Exclusive Control, the Speed Reference becomes 0, and the PID Output
becomes the entire Freq Command. Exclusive Control is used when A458 or
A470 [PID x Trim Sel] is set to option 0. This configuration does not require a
master reference, only a desired set point, such as a flow rate for a pump.
Example
In a pumping application, the PID Reference equals the Desired System
Pressure set point.
The Pressure Transducer signal provides PID Feedback to the drive.
Fluctuations in actual system pressure, due to changes in flow, result in a
PID Error value.
The drive output frequency increases or decreases to vary motor shaft
speed to correct for the PID Error value.
IMPORTANT PowerFlex 523 has one PID control loop.
PowerFlex 525 has two PID control loops, of which only one can be in use at any
time.
+
PID Prop Gain
PID Loop
PID Integ Time
PID Dif Rate
PID Selected
PID Fdbk
PID Ref
PID
Error
+
+
+
PID
Output
Accel/Decel
Ramp
Freq
Command
Appendix F PID Set Up
The Desired System Pressure set point is maintained as valves in the system
are opened and closed causing changes in flow.
When the PID Control Loop is disabled, the Commanded Speed is the
Ramped Speed Reference.
Trim Control
In Trim Control, the PID Output is added to the Speed Reference. In Trim
mode, the output of the PID loop bypasses the accel/decel ramp as shown. Trim
Control is used when A458 or A470 [PID x Trim Sel] is set to any option other
than 0.
Example
In a winder application, the PID Reference equals the Equilibrium set
point.
The Dancer Pot signal provides PID Feedback to the drive. Fluctuations in
tension result in a PID Error value.
The Master Speed Reference sets the wind/unwind speed.
Pump
PID Feedback =
Pressure Transducer Signal
PID Reference =
Desired System Pressure
+
PID Prop Gain
PID Loop
PID Integ Time
PID Dif Rate
PID Selected
[Speed Referencex]
PID Fdbk
PID Ref
PID
Error
+
+
+
+
PID
Output
Output
Freq
+
Accel/Decel
Ramp
PID Set Up Appendix F
As tension increases or decreases during winding, the Speed Reference is
trimmed to compensate. Tension is maintained near the Equilibrium set
point.
PID Reference and Feedback
PID mode is enabled by setting P047, P049 or P051 [Speed Referencex] to
11 PID1 Output or 12 PID2 Output, and activating the corresponding speed
reference.
If A459 or A471 [PID x Ref Sel] is not set to 0 PID Setpoint, PID can still be
disabled by select programmable digital input options (parameters t062, t063,
t065...t068 [DigIn TermBlk xx]) such as Purge.
[Speed Referencex]
0V
PID Feedback =
Dancer Pot Signal
10V
PID Reference =
Equilibrium Set Point
IMPORTANT PowerFlex 523 has one PID control loop.
PowerFlex 525 has two PID control loops, of which only one can be in use at any
time.
A459, A471 [PID x Ref Sel] Options
Options Description
0 PID Setpoint A464 or A476 [PID x Setpoint] will be used to set the value of the PID Reference.
1 Drive Pot The drive potentiometer will be used to set the value of the PID Reference.
2 Keypad Freq The drive keypad will be used to set the value of the PID Reference.
2 Serial/DSI The reference word from the Serial/DSI communication network becomes the PID Reference.
4 Network Opt The reference word from a communication network option becomes the PID Reference.
5 0-10V Input Selects the 0-10V Input. Note that the PID will not function with a bipolar analog input. It will
ignore any negative voltages and treat them like a zero.
6 4-20mA Input Selects the 4-20 mA Input.
7 Preset Freq A410...A425 [Preset Freq x] will be used as an input for the PID Reference.
8 AnlgIn Multi
(1)
The product of the 0-10V and 4-20mA Inputs will be used as an input for the PID Reference.
9 MOP Freq A427 [MOP Freq] will be used as an input for the PID Reference.
10 Pulse Input Pulse train will be used as an input for the PID Reference.
11 Step Logic
(1)
Step Logic will be used as an input for the PID Reference.
12 Encoder
(1)
Encoder will be used as an input for the PID Reference.
13 Ethernet/IP
(1)
The reference word from the Ethernet/IP communication network becomes the PID Reference.
A460 and A472 [PID x Fdback Sel] are used to select the source of the PID
feedback.
Analog PID Reference Signals
Parameters t091 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] and t092 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] are used to
scale or invert an analog PID Reference or PID Feedback.
Scale Function
For a 0...5V signal, the following parameter settings are used so that a 0V signal =
0% PID Reference and a 5V signal = 100% PID Reference.
t091 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] = 0.0%
t092 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] = 50.0%
A459 [PID 1 Ref Sel] = 5 0-10V Input
Invert Function
For a 4-20 mA signal, the following parameter settings are used so that a 20 mA
signal = 0% PID Reference and a 4 mA signal = 100% PID Reference.
t092 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo] = 100.0%
t096 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi] = 0.0%
A460, A472 [PID x Fdback Sel] Options
Options Description
0 0-10V Input Selects the 0-10V Input (default setting). Note that the PID will not function with a bipolar analog
input. It will ignore any negative voltages and treat them like a zero.
1 4-20mA Input Selects the 4-20 mA Input.
2 Serial/DSI Serial/DSI will be used as an input for the PID Feedback.
3 Network Opt The reference word from a communication network option becomes the PID Reference.
4 Pulse Input Pulse train will be used as an input for the PID Feedback.
5 Encoder
(1)
Encoder will be used as an input for the PID Feedback.
6 Ethernet/IP
(1)
Ethernet/IP will be used as an input for the PID Feedback.
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PID Reference (%)
I
n
p
u
t

V
o
l
t
s
2
4
6
8
10
12
A459 [PID 1 Ref Sel] = 6 4-20mA Input
PID Deadband
Parameters A465 and A477 [PID x Deadband] are used to set a range, in percent,
of the PID Reference that the drive will ignore.
Example
A465 [PID 1 Deadband] = 5.0%
The PID Reference is 25.0%
The PID Regulator will not act on a PID Error that falls between 20.0 and
30.0%
PID Preload
The value set in A466 or A478 [PID x Preload], in Hz, will be pre-loaded into
the integral component of the PID at any start or enable. This will cause the
drives frequency command to initially jump to that preload frequency, and the
PID loop starts regulating from there.
PID Limits
A456 and A468 [PID x Trim Hi] and A457 and A469 [PID x Trim Lo] are used
to limit the PID output and are only used in trim mode. [PID x Trim Hi] sets the
maximum frequency for the PID output in trim mode. [PID x Trim Lo] sets the
reverse frequency limit for the PID output in trim mode. Note that when the
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PID Reference (%)
4
-
2
0

m
A

I
n
p
u
t
4
8
12
16
20
24
PID Enabled
Freq Cmd
PID Output
PID Pre-load Value
PID Pre-load Value > 0
PID reaches the Hi or Lo limit, the PID regulator stops integrating so that
windup does not occur.
PID Gains
The proportional, integral, and differential gains make up the PID regulator.
A461 and A473 [PID x Prop Gain]
The proportional gain (unitless) affects how the regulator reacts to the
magnitude of the error. The proportional component of the PID regulator
outputs a speed command proportional to the PID error. For example, a
proportional gain of 1 would output 100% of max frequency when the
PID error is 100% of the analog input range. A larger value for [PID x
Prop Gain] makes the proportional component more responsive, and a
smaller value makes it less responsive. Setting [PID x Prop Gain] to 0.00
disables the proportional component of the PID loop.
A462 and A474 [PID x Integ Time]
The integral gain (units of seconds) affects how the regulator reacts to
error over time and is used to get rid of steady state error. For example, with
an integral gain of 2 seconds, the output of the integral gain component
would integrate up to 100% of max frequency when the PID error is 100%
for 2 seconds. A larger value for [PID x Integ Time] makes the integral
component less responsive, and a smaller value makes it more responsive.
Setting [PID x Integ Time] to 0.0 disables the integral component of the
PID loop.
A463 and A475 [PID x Diff Rate]
The Differential gain (units of 1/seconds) affects the rate of change of the
PID output. The differential gain is multiplied by the difference between
the previous error and current error. Thus, with a large error the D has a
large effect and with a small error the D has less of an effect. This
parameter is scaled so that when it is set to 1.00, the process response is
0.1% of P044 [Maximum Freq] when the process error is changing at 1% /
second. A larger value for [PID x Diff Rate] makes the differential term
have more of an effect and a small value makes it have less of an effect. In
many applications, the D gain is not needed. Setting [PID x Diff Rate] to
0.00 (factory default) disables the differential component of the PID loop.
Guidelines for Adjusting the PID Gains
1. Adjust the proportional gain. During this step it may be desirable to
disable the integral gain and differential gain by setting them to 0. After a
step change in the PID Feedback:
If the response is too slow increase A461 or A473 [PID x Prop Gain].
If the response is too quick and/or unstable (see Unstable Response on
page 221), decrease A461 or A473 [PID x Prop Gain].
Typically, A461 or A473 [PID x Prop Gain] is set to some value below
the point where the PID begins to go unstable.
2. Adjust the integral gain (leave the proportional gain set as in Step 1). After
a step change in the PID Feedback:
If the response is too slow (see Slow Response Over Damped on
page 221), or the PID Feedback does not become equal to the PID
Reference, decrease A462 or A474 [PID x Integ Time].
If there is a lot of oscillation in the PID Feedback before settling out
(see Oscillation Under Damped on page 221), increase A462 or
A474 [PID x Integ Time].
3. At this point, the differential gain may not be needed. However, if after
determining the values for A461 or A473 [PID x Prop Gain] and A462 or
A474 [PID x Integ Time]:
Response is still slow after a step change, increase A463 or A475 [PID x
Diff Rate].
Response is still unstable, decrease A463 or A475 [PID x Diff Rate].
The following figures show some typical responses of the PID loop at different
points during adjustment of the PID Gains.
Unstable Response
Slow Response Over Damped
Oscillation Under Damped
PID Feedback
PID Reference
Time
PID Feedback
PID Reference
Time
PID Feedback
PID Reference
Time
Good Response Critically Damped
PID Feedback
PID Reference
Time
Appendix G
Safe-Torque-Off Function
The PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function, when used with other safety
components, helps provide protection according to EN ISO 13849 and
EN62061 for safe-off and protection against restart. The PowerFlex 525 Safe-
Torque-Off function is just one component in a safety control system.
Components in the system must be chosen and applied appropriately to achieve
the desired level of operator safeguarding.
PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-
Off Overview
The PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function:
Provides the Safe-Torque-Off (STO) function defined in
EN IEC 61800-5-2.
Blocks gate-firing signals from reaching the Insulated Gate Bipolar
Transistor (IGBT) output devices of the drive. This prevents the IGBTs
from switching in the sequence necessary to generate torque in the motor.
Can be used in combination with other safety devices to fulfill the
requirements of a system safe torque off function which satisfies
Category 3 / PL (d) according to EN ISO 13849-1 and SIL CL2
according to EN/IEC 62061, IEC 61508, and EN/IEC 61800-5-2.
PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off Overview 223
EC Type Examination Certification 224
EMC Instructions 224
Using PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off 224
Enabling PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off 227
Wiring 227
Verify Operation 228
PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off Operation 227
Connection Examples 229
PowerFlex 525 Certification for Safe-Torque-Off 233
IMPORTANT The Safe-Torque-Off function covered in this chapter is specific to
PowerFlex 525 drives only.
IMPORTANT The function is suitable for performing mechanical work on the drive system or
affected area of a machine only. It does not provide electrical safety.
Appendix G Safe-Torque-Off Function
EC Type Examination
Certification
TV Rheinland has certified the PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function
compliant with the requirements for machines defined in Annex I of the
ECDirective 2006/42/EC, and that it complies with the requirements of the
relevant standards listed below:
EN ISO 13849-1:2008 Safety of machinery Safety related parts of
control systems Part 1: General principles for design.
(PowerFlex 525 STO achieves Category 3 / PL(d))
EN 61800-5-2:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part
5-2 Safety requirements Functional.
(PowerFlex 525 STO achieves SIL CL 2)
EN 62061:2005 Safety of machinery Functional safety of safety-related
electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems.
IEC 61508 Part 1-7:2010 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/
programmable electronic safety-related systems Parts 1-7.
TV also certifies that the PowerFlex 525 STO may be used in applications up to
Category 3/ PL(d) according to EN ISO 13849-1 and SIL 2 according to
EN62061 / EN 61800-5-2 / IEC 61508.
The TV Rheinland certificate may be found at:
www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/.
EMC Instructions
PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function requires CE Conformity as described
on page 49.
Using PowerFlex 525 Safe-
Torque-Off
The PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function is intended to be part of the safety
related control system of a machine. Before use, a risk assessment should be
performed that compares the PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function
specifications and all foreseeable operational and environmental characteristics of
the machine to which it is to be fitted.
ATTENTION: Electric Shock Hazard. Verify that all sources of AC and DC power
are de-energized and locked out or tagged out in accordance with the
requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70E, Part II.
To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has
discharged before performing any work on the drive. Measure the DC bus voltage
at the +DC and -DC terminals or test points (refer to your drives User Manual for
locations). The voltage must be zero.
In safe-off mode, hazardous voltages may still be present at the motor. To avoid an
electric shock hazard, disconnect power to the motor and verify that the voltage is
zero before performing any work on the motor.
Safe-Torque-Off Function Appendix G
A safety analysis of the machine section controlled by the drive is required to
determine how often the safety function should be tested for proper operation
during the life of the machine.
Safety Concept
The PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function is suitable for use in safety
applications up to and including Category 3 / PL(d) according to
ENISO13849-1 and SIL 2 according to EN 62061 / EN 61800-5-2 /
IEC61508.
In addition, the PowerFlex 525 STO may be used together with other
components in a safety application to achieve an overall Category 3 / PL(e)
according to EN ISO 13849-1 and SIL 3 according to EN 62061 and
IEC61508. This is illustrated in Example 3 in this appendix.
Safety requirements are based on the standards current at the time of
certification.
The PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function is intended for use in safety-related
applications where the de-energized state is considered to be the safe state. All of
the examples in this manual are based on achieving de-energization as the safe
state for typical Machine Safety and Emergency Shutdown (ESD) systems.
Important Safety Considerations
The system user is responsible for:
the set-up, safety rating, and validation of any sensors or actuators
connected to the system.
completing a system-level risk assessment and reassessing the system any
time a change is made.
certification of the system to the desired safety performance level.
project management and proof testing.
programming the application software and the safety option
configurations in accordance with the information in this manual.
ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper
installation. Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the
compliance or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or otherwise for
the proper installation of this equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or
equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation.
ATTENTION: In safe-off mode, hazardous voltages may still be present at the
motor. To avoid an electric shock hazard, disconnect power to the motor and
verify that the voltage is zero before performing any work on the motor.
ATTENTION: In the event of the failure of two output IGBTs in the drive, when
the PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off has controlled the drive outputs to the off
state, the drive may provide energy for up to 180 of rotation in a 2-pole motor
before torque production in the motor ceases.
access control to the system, including password handling.
analyzing all configuration settings and choosing the proper setting to
achieve the required safety rating.
Functional Proof Test
The PFD and PFH values provided in the table below are contingent upon the
Proof Test Interval (PTI). Before the end of the PTI specified in the table below,
a proof test of the STO safety function must be performed in order for the
specified PFD and PFH values to remain valid.
PFD and PFH Data
PFD and PFH calculations are based on the equations from Part 6 of EN 61508.
This table provides data for a 20-year proof test interval and demonstrates the
worst-case effect of various configuration changes on the data.
PFD and PFH for 20-year Proof Test Interval
Safety Reaction Time
The safety reaction time is the amount of time from a safety-related event as
input to the system until the system is in the Safe State.
The safety reaction time from an input signal condition that triggers a safe stop,
to the initiation of safe-torque-off, is 100 ms (maximum).
IMPORTANT When applying Functional Safety, restrict access to qualified, authorized
personnel who are trained and experienced.
ATTENTION: When designing your system, consider how personnel will exit
the machine if the door locks while they are in the machine. Additional
safeguarding devices may be required for your specific application.
Attribute Value
PFD 6.62E-05 (MTTF = 3593 years)
PFH
D
8.13E-10
SFF 83%
DC 62.5%
CAT 3
HFT 1 (1oo2)
PTI 20 YEARS
Hardware Type Type A
Enabling PowerFlex 525
Safe-Torque-Off
1. Remove all power to the drive.
2. Loosen the screw of terminals Safety 1, Safety 2 and Safety +24V
(S1, S2, S+) on the control I/O terminal block.
3. Remove the protective jumper.
4. Safe-Torque-Off function is now enabled and the terminals are ready to
function as safety inputs.
Wiring
Important points to remember about wiring:
Always use copper wire.
Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended.
Control wires should be separated from power wires by at least
0.3 m(1 ft).
See I/O Wiring on page 35 for wiring recommendations and Control I/O
Terminal Designations on page 40 for terminal descriptions.
If Safety Inputs S1 and S2 are powered by an external +24V source, apply it only
in SELV system, PELV system or low voltage Class 2 circuit.
PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-
Off Operation
The PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function disables the drives output IGBTs
by breaking the link with the drive microcontroller. When used in combination
with a safety input device, the system satisfies the requirements of EN ISO 13849
and EN62061 for safe-torque-off and helps protect against restart.
ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage
on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on
the drive. Measure the DC bus voltage at the +DC and -DC terminals or
test points (refer to your drives user manual for the location of the
terminals). The voltage must be zero.
R1
S1 S2 S+ 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
R2 R5 R6 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Recommended Wire
Type Wire Type
(1)
(1) Recommendations are for 50 C ambient temperature.
Description Min. Insulation
Rating
Shielded Multi-conductor shielded cable such as Belden 8770 (or equiv.) 0.750 mm
2
(18 AWG),
3 conductor, shielded.
300V, 60 C (140 F)
Under normal drive operation, both safety inputs (Safety 1 and Safety 2) are
energized, and the drive is able to run. If either input is de-energized, the gate
control circuit becomes disabled. To meet EN ISO 13849 operation, both safety
channels must be de-energized. Refer to the following examples for more
information.
Verify Operation
Test the safety function for proper operation after the initial setup of the
PowerFlex 525 Safe-Torque-Off function. Retest the safety function at the
intervals determined by the safety analysis described on page 224.
Verify that both safety channels are functioning according to the table below.
IMPORTANT By itself, the Safe-Torque-Off function initiates a coast to stop action.
Additional protective measures will need to be applied when an application
requires a change to the stop action.
Channel Operation and Verification
Safety Function
Status
Drive In
Safe State
Drive In
Safe State
Drive In
Safe State
Drive
Able To Run
Drive Status Configured by t105
[Safety Open En]
Fault F111
(Safety Hardware)
Fault F111
(Safety Hardware)
Ready/Run
Safety Channel Operation
Safety Input S1 No Power Applied Power Applied No Power Applied Power Applied
Safety Input S2 No Power Applied No Power Applied Power Applied Power Applied
IMPORTANT If an external fault is present on the wiring or circuitry controlling the Safety 1
or Safety 2 inputs for a period of time, the Safe-Torque-Off function may not
detect this condition. When the external fault condition is removed the Safe-
Torque-Off function will allow an enable condition. Fault in the external wiring
shall either be detected by external logic, or excluded (wiring must be
protected by cable ducting or armoring), according to EN ISO 13849-2.
Connection Examples
Example 1 Safe-Torque-Off Connection with Coast-to-Stop Action,
SIL 2/PL d
Stop Category 0 Coast
(1) Enclosure Recommended. Note: External wiring failure modes must be considered as described in EN ISO 13849-2. Enclosure or
other measure to exclude these failure modes should be used.
(2) In some situations, a safety relay is not required if both the switch and PowerFlex 525 are installed in the same enclosure.
Stop
Start
A1 S21 S11 S52 41 13 23 33
A2
24V DC
common
+24V DC
S22 S14 S34 42 14 24 34
MSR
GuardMaster
Trojan
Gate
E-Stop
latching
button
+24V DC
PF 525
Stop
Start
Gate control
power supply
Gate control
circuit
AC line
input power
S1
S2
M
(1)
Stop
Start
GuardMaster
Trojan
Gate
E-Stop
latching
button
+24V DC
PF 525
Stop
Start
Gate control
power supply
Gate control
circuit
AC line
input power
S1
S2
M
(2)
Stop Category 0 Coast with Two PowerFlex 525 Drives
(1) Enclosure Recommended. Note: External wiring failure modes must be considered as described in EN ISO 13849-2. Enclosure or
other measure to exclude these failure modes should be used.
(2) Each safety input draws 6 mA from the supply.
Circuit Status
Circuit shown with guard door closed and system ready for normal drive
operation.
Operating Principle
This is a dual channel system with monitoring of the Safe-Torque-Off circuit and
drive. Opening the guard door will switch the input circuits (S13-S14 & S21-
S22) to the Minotaur monitoring safety relay unit. The output circuits (13-14 &
23-24) will cause the Safe-Torque-Off Enable circuit to trip and the motor will
coast to stop. To restart the drive, the Minotaur safety relay must first be reset
followed by a valid start command to the drive.
Fault Detection
A single fault detected on the Minotaur safety input circuits will result in the
lock-out of the system at the next operation and will not cause loss of the safety
function.
A single fault detected on the PowerFlex 525 safety enable redundant inputs will
result in the lock-out of the drive and will not cause loss of the safety function.
Stop
Start
+24V DC
PF 525
Stop
Start
Dig. comm
Gate control
power supply
Gate control
circuit
AC line
input power
S1
S2
M
Stop
Start
+24V DC
PF 525
Stop
Start
Dig. comm
Gate control
power supply
Gate control
circuit
AC line
input power
S1
S2
M
(1)
(2)
(2)
S11
S21
S12
S22
13
14
23
24
L11
A1
S34
L12
A2
SI
24V DC Supply
24V DC COM
E-Stop
Y32
0
AM
MM
Reset
Reset
Example 2 Safe-Torque-Off Connection with Controlled Stop Action,
SIL 2/PL d
Stop Category 1 Controlled
(1) Enclosure Recommended. External wiring failure modes must be considered as described in EN ISO 13849-2. Enclosure or other
measure to exclude these failure modes should be used.
Circuit Status
operation.
Operating Principle
S22) to the Minotaur monitoring safety relay unit. The output circuits (13-14)
will issue a Stop command to the drive and cause a controlled deceleration. After
the programmed delay, the timed output circuits (47-48 & 57-58) will cause the
Safe-Torque-Off Enable circuit to trip. If the motor is rotating when the trip
occurs, it will coast to stop. To restart the drive, the Minotaur safety relay must
first be reset followed by a valid start command to the drive.
Fault Detection
function.
A single fault detected on the PowerFlex 525 safety enable redundant inputs will
result in the lock-out of the drive and will not cause the loss of the safety
function.
24V DC
Common
+24V DC
GuardMaster
Trojan
Stop
Start
A1 S21 S11 S52 S12
A2 X1 X2
13 23
14 24
S33
Y2
S34
Y1 X3
37 47 57
38 48 58 X4
S22
Y39 Y40
Minotaur
MSR138DP
Gate
+24V DC
PF 525
Stop
Start
Gate control
power supply
Gate control
circuit
AC line
input power
S1
S2
M
(1)
Example 3 Safe-Torque-Off Connection with Coast-to-Stop Action
Using External +24V supply, SIL 3/PL e
Stop Category 0 Coast
(1) Enclosure Recommended. External wiring failure modes must be considered as described in EN ISO 13849-2. Enclosure or other
measure to exclude these failure modes should be used.
Circuit Status
operation.
Operating Principle
S22) to the Minotaur monitoring safety relay unit. The output circuits (13-14 &
23-24 & 33-34) will cause the output contact and Safe-Torque-Off Enable circuit
to trip and the motor will coast to stop. To restart the drive, the Minotaur safety
relay must first be reset followed by a valid start command to the drive.
Fault Detection
function.
Closed
Open
External +24V DC
24V DC COM
MSR127TP
Reset
+24V DC
PF 525
Stop
Start
COM
Gate control
power supply
Gate control
circuit
AC line
input power
S1
S2
X1 AUX
X2
A1 Coil
A2
External
contactor
100-C
100S-C
13 23 33
14 24 34
M
A1 S11 S52 S12 13 23 33 41
S21 S22 S34 A2 14 24 34 42
(1)
PowerFlex 525 Certification
for Safe-Torque-Off
Notes:
Appendix H
EtherNet/IP
This section contains only basic information to setup an EtherNet/IP connection
with your PowerFlex 520-series drive. For comprehensive information about
EtherNet/IP (single and dual-port) and how to use it, see the following
publications:
PowerFlex 525 Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual, publication
520COM-UM001.
PowerFlex 25-COMM-E2P Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Adapter User
Manual, publication 520COM-UM003.
It is recommended to use Allen-Bradley Ethernet RJ45 cables, shielded or
unshielded (catalog number 1585J-M8xBJM-x), for connecting your
PowerFlex 520-series drive to an EtherNet/IP network.
Establishing A Connection
With EtherNet/IP
There are three methods for configuring the Ethernet IP address:
BootP Server Use BootP if you prefer to control the IP addresses of
devices using a server. The IP address, subnet mask, and gateway addresses
will then be provided by the BootP server.
Adapter Parameters Use adapter parameters when you want more
flexibility in setting up the IP address, or need to communicate outside the
control network using a gateway. The IP address, subnet mask, and
gateway addresses will then come from the adapter parameters you set.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) (only with PowerFlex
25-COMM-E2P adapter) Use DHCP when you want additional
flexibility and ease-of-use compared to BOOTP in configuring the IP
address, subnet mask, and gateway address for the adapter using a DHCP
server.

ATTENTION: PowerFlex 523 drives support only the 25-COMM-E2P dual-port
EtherNet/IP adapter. PowerFlex 525 drives support both the embedded
EtherNet/IP adapter and the 25-COMM-E2P dual-port EtherNet/IP adapter.
IMPORTANT If you are setting your network addresses manually using parameters, you
must set the appropriate drive or 25-COMM-E2P adapter parameter value to
1 Parameters. See the respective EtherNet/IP adapter user manual for more
information.
Appendix H EtherNet/IP
IMPORTANT Regardless of the method used to set the adapter IP address, each node on the
EtherNet/IP network must have a unique IP address. To change an IP address,
you must set the new value and then remove and reapply power to (or reset)
the adapter.
Appendix I
Control Diagrams
This chapter contains various diagrams on the PowerFlex 520-series drive
functions and behaviors.
Induction Motor Tuning
Diagrams
[Speed Reg Sel] Diagrams For Motor Tuning
Speed Controller
Gain
Freq (Hz)
A515 [Freq 3 BW]
A513 [Freq 2 BW]
A511 [Freq 1 BW]
Low Speed
Control Mode
Mid Speed
Control Mode
High Speed
Control Mode
A
5
0
9

[
S
p
e
e
d

R
e
g

S
e
l
]

=

0
G
a
i
n

s
e
t

a
u
t
o
m
a
t
i
c
a
l
l
y
A512
[Freq 2]
A514
[ Freq 3]
A510
[Freq 1]
Speed Controller
Gain
A
5
0
9

[
S
p
e
e
d

R
e
g

S
e
l
]

=

1
G
a
i
n

s
e
t

m
a
n
u
a
l
l
y
Freq (Hz)
A525 [Freq 3 Kp]
A526 [Freq 3 Ki]
A523 [Freq 2 Kp]
A524 [Freq 2 Ki]
A521 [Freq 1 Kp]
A522 [Freq 1 Ki]
A510
[Freq 1]
A512
[Freq 2]
A514
[Freq 3]
Low Speed
Control Mode
Mid Speed
Control Mode
High Speed
Control Mode
Appendix I Control Diagrams
Adjusting Speed Control
Parameters
These settings show how to adjust the speed control for motor tuning.
Run
Speed Loop Bandwidth:
A511 [Freq 1 BW] = 10 Hz
A513 [Freq 2 BW] = 10 Hz
A515 [Freq 3 BW] = 10 Hz
Set Speed Controller Gain
automatically
A509 = 0 (Automatic)
A509 = 1 (Manual)
Set Speed Controller Gain
manually:
A521 [Freq 1 Kp]
A522 [Freq 1 Ki]
A523 [Freq 2 Kp]
A524 [Freq 2 Ki]
A525 [Freq 3 Kp]
A526 [Freq 3 Ki]
Increase the bandwidth to obtain
faster speed response. If oscillation
occurs, decrease the bandwidth.
For general use, set A509
[Speed Reg Sel] to 0 (Automatic)
Set A509
[Speed Reg Sel]
For [Freq x Kp], gradually increase by 1%
For [Freq x Ki], gradually increase by 0.1 s
Numerics
2-wire
inputs, 47
3-wire
inputs, 47
A
accel
override priority, 48
selecting, 48
accessing
control terminals, 30
power terminals, 30
applications
safety, 225
auxiliary contact
drive, 33, 35
B
basic operation, 61
drive, 56, 61, 150
programming, 61
safety, 228
C
circuit breakers
inputs, 22
ratings, 22
common bus
drive, 35
communications
positioning, 212
configuring
RS485(DSI), 190
control terminals
accessing, 30
counter
programming, 197, 200
D
decel
selecting, 48
derating
factor, 117
temperature, 17
digital inputs
selecting, 47
start source, 47
dimensions
mounting, 16, 173
disconnect
output, 33
drive
auxiliary contact, 33, 35
basic operation, 56, 61, 150
common bus, 35
mount, 15
programming, 57, 60
safety, 227
drive damage
preventing, 19
ungrounded distribution systems, 19
E
encoder
programming, 203
wiring, 204
environment
storage, 18
Ethernet
programming, 235
F
fault monitoring
ground, 21
fuses
rating, 22
G
ground
fault monitoring, 21
motor, 21
RFI filter, 21
safety, 21
shielding, 21
H
homing
automatic, 210
manual, 210
programming, 210
I
inputs
2-wire, 47
3-wire, 47
circuit breakers, 22
power, 20
L
logic
basic, 197, 198
timed steps, 197, 198
M
Modbus
reading, 193, 195, 196
writing, 191, 193, 196
motor
ground, 21
start, 33
stop, 33
mount
drive, 15
mounting
dimensions, 16, 173
N
noise immunity
wiring, 36, 190
O
output
disconnect, 33
override priority
accel, 48
decel, 48
speed reference, 46
start source, 46
P
parameters
AppView, 68, 138
CustomView, 139
programming, 59, 63
PID
programming, 217
positioning
communications, 212
power
inputs, 20
power and control module
separating, 27
power terminals
accessing, 30
preventing
drive damage, 19
programming, 61
basic logic, 197, 198
counter, 197, 200
drive, 57, 60
encoder, 203
Ethernet, 235
homing, 210
parameters, 59, 63
PID, 217
positioning, 205, 206
pulse train, 203
timed steps, 197, 198
timer, 197, 199
tools, 60
pulse train
programming, 203
R
rating
fuses, 22
ratings
circuit breakers, 22
reading
Modbus, 193, 195, 196
recommended
wiring, 35, 227
reflected
wave protection, 33
RFI filter
ground, 21
RS485(DSI)
configuring, 190
S
safety
applications, 225
basic operation, 228
drive, 227
ground, 21
testing, 226
wiring, 227
selecting
accel, 48
decel, 48
digital inputs, 47
speed reference, 46
start source, 46
separating
power and control module, 27
shielded
wiring, 32
shielding
ground, 21
speed reference
selecting, 46
start
motor, 33
start source
digital inputs, 47
selecting, 46
stop
motor, 33
storage
environment, 18
T
temperature
derating, 17
wiring, 32
testing
safety, 226
timer
tools
programming, 60
U
unshielded
wiring, 32
V
voltage reflections
wiring, 33
W
wave protection
reflected, 33
wiring
encoder, 204
noise immunity, 36, 190
recommended, 35, 227
RS485 (DSI), 189
safety, 227
shielded, 32
temperature, 32
unshielded, 32
voltage reflections, 33
writing
Modbus, 191, 193, 196
Notes:
Publication 520-UM001G-EN-E September 2014
Supersedes Publication 520-UM001F-EN-E March 2014 Copyright 2014 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products.
At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/, you can find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, technical and
application notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that you can customize to
make the best use of these tools.
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting, we offer
TechConnect support programs. For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation
representative, or visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/.
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this
manual. You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the
manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this
document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.
United States or Canada 1.440.646.3434
Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/americas/phone_en.html, or contact your local Rockwell
Automation representative.
United States Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your
distributor to complete the return process.
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.
Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444
Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation NV, Pegasus Park, De Kleetlaan 12a, 1831 Diegem, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640
Asia Pacifc: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846
www.rockwellautomation.com

520 Um001 - en e PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

520 Um001 - en e PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

520 Um001 - en e PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PowerFlex 520-Series Adjustable Frequency AC Drive

PowerFlex 523 Catalog Number 25A

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001G-EN-E - September 2014

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001G-EN-E - September 2014 25

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001G-EN-E - September 2014

05 DigIn TermBlk 05/

12 +10V DC Referenced to Analog Common.

Rockwell Automation Publication 520-UM001G-EN-E - September 2014 39

C2 C2 This is the signal common for the communication signals.

C2 C2 This is the signal common for the communication signals.

11 +24V DC Referenced to Digital Common.

12 +10V DC Referenced to Analog Common.

15 4-20mA In Not Active For external 4-20 mA input supply.

(1) See Footnote (1) on page 37.

0.1% of base speed across a 100:1 speed

0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 2.5 85...132 A 25A-V2P5N104 25B-V2P5N104

0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 2.5 170...264 A 25A-A2P5N104 25B-A2P5N104

0.5 0.4 0.5 0.4 2.5 170...264 A 25A-B2P5N104 25B-B2P5N104

No. Signal Description

You might also like